DOCUMENT RESUME

ED 046 205 EC 031 470

AW"u0P Carr, norothy P.; And ()filers TITLE Fegu:.-nced Instructional Proarams in physical Education for the Handicarmed. TNSTITUTION Los P.naPles Unified School Pis ,-ricf, Calif. SPONS AGENCY Bureau of Flerentary and Secondary Education (DHEY/nF), Washington, '.C. PUB PATE Dec "0 NOTE 31p.

?DRS PRICE FDPs Price M7-$0.c.5 VC-c11.1 DESCRIPTORS *Curriculum Guiles, *"xcentional Child "dilation, *Handicapped Children, *Physical rducation, Program Guiles, seauential learnina, Skill Development

ABSTPACT The curriculum guidelines for a comprehensive physical education Program consist of developmentally seauencna skills and instructional activities apnronriate for handicapped children from early preschool age (10 months) through high school. suggested activities and materials are arranael in color-coded sections on motor ar.1 movement skills, olayaround and recreation skills, rhythm, swimming, and physical fitness. Tnforration orovid=0 for each activity includes level of difficulty, seauences-teachina progressions, suggestions for lesson implementation, source materials, and codes to indicate appropriateness to the handicapping condition. (rr) ce 03/ (10 e- PHYSICAL EDUCATION FOR THE SEQUENCEDHA DICAPPED I STRUCTIONAL PROGRAMS in LOS ANGELES CITY SCHOOLS PHYSICAL EDUCATIONSPECIAL PROJECT EDUCATION BRANCH P.L. 88-164,Project Title No. HI 142709 U S DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH. EDUCATION & WELFARE OFFICE OF EDUCATION iHIS DOCUMENT HIS SEEN REPRODUCED EXACTLY AS RECEIVED FROM THE POSITIONSTATEDPERSON DO OR OR NOT ORGANIZATION POLICY NECESSARILY ORIGINATING REPRESENT IT OFFICIAL 01,ICE OF EDUCATION POI"TS OF VIEW OR OPINIONS PHYSICAL EDUCATION FOR THESEQUENCED HANDICAPPED INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAMS in DR. DOROTHY B. CARRLOS ANGELES CITY SCHOOLS SPECIAL EDUCATION BRANCH CurriculumProjectPrincipal Coordinator Specialists Investigator GWENANITACAROLELYONEL L.R. L.DELFSWATERS D. BROWN AVANCE Public Law 88-164,Physical Title Education III Project Project No. 142709 December, 1970 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS accomplishedDevelopingtion of many the through individuals.contents the ofcombined this publication efforts and has coopera- been SpecialandProgram contributed Education advisors meaningful Branchof the providedcentral reactions officemuch tohelp stafftentative when of neededthe mate- Theandinwere principalsreviewing supportingmost helpful materialsof the the in members schoolsmaking produced of theirinvolved their by facilitiesthe staff in project the during programavailable, team, the Mrs.rialsthis BeatriceStellaDiane duringgroup Leichman;Cable; Gold; were:th course NorbertMorris Dr. ofMildred E.Castel the Hay; project. Murry; DeMrs. Oro; MarjorieMrs. Patrick Beverly Huserik; Estes; Mrs. Louise Barr; Dr. Louis Bernoff; Included in NormanMarltongroupRosaliefield were: Levine testingSchool; Celan. of phase Dr.ofPacific BlendWilliam of theBoulevardSchool; Hirschproject. Mrs. School;of LowmanRhoda Fred FreemanSchool; Lull of John Aflame of Shoemaker School; Miss Included in this planning,TheStarr;Presser; principal and designing,RalphRobert consultants Salaway; Williams. and evaluation Mrs.who assistedMildred of Shehorn;variousthe staff aspectsWilliam during School.ofHoraceClaytonof Banneker Sellery StinsonShehorn School;School; ofof LokrantzMiller andHelen Mrs. and RobertsSchool; ShirleyWidney ofMrs. HighWolkShoemaker Jane Schools;of McBrideToland School; Dr.Cra;:tyandsuggestions.of Gerald thereviewed gaveproject Gardner many tentative waresuggestions reviewed greatly materials. materials forappreciated. guidance and ofoffered the staff. many Dr. Frank Hewitt met with project staff Dr. Bryant ofOthertheinvolved East-Valley projectprincipals in includedthe School; whoseprogram, theMrs.schools following:but Rose whowere Engel gave not of supportdirectly Salvin during Mrs. Kay Curnaw Dr.gratitudeOtherthe Genevie developmentconsultants is Dexter; expressed andwho Dr. review provided included:Lawrence of valuablematerials Rarick; services Janetand to Pomeroy; whomin Dr. Charles Buell, StahlemVictorSchool;School,to Mrs. KitzesofMrs. Dellafor Bennett Carrie herof Blakeway, Ninthassistance School. Fitch Street Principalof Millerin School; reviewing ofHigh andMcDonnell School; tentativeMrs. Evelyn Avenue Special thanks are extended M.D.;Weandtive areDr. and materials indebtedJulian Harriett Stein. toand B.Elena offered Randall, Boder, many M.D. M.D.; helpful who Margaret reviewed comments Jones, tenta- and materials. suggestions to the staff. iii whophysicalcalMost conducted Educationof alleducation we the teacherswould field sequences like whotesting to met asthank revlarlyofthey sequencesthe were Remedial towritten examineand Physi-audio- and preliminarywhoSpecialsequences had thanksthe andandresponsibility are whofinal duealso draftsto guided the for ofcurriculum thethethe preparationfieldphysical specialiststesting education of ofthe children.usvisualtheir solve materialsown problems insights inand theirinto suggested theschools. learning new methods problems based of on They often helped MembersthesustainL. Brown;materials of the theMiss project. clericalin Anita the schools.,Mrs.L. staff Delfs; Dorothy worked and Arp,Misslong MissGwenand hardCandelariaR. Waters. to They were: Miss Carole KrisSidneyMrs.MissIncluded vonSarahMary Hallburn; Hoetzendorf; LyninFields; thisDavidson; Mrs. groupDr. WalterJane Virgil Misswere: Harvey; Jaquith; ConstanceFornas; Mrs. JosephHerbert Engvall;Vale Kubelka;Himonas; Haas; James Breen; Aaron Buggs; manuscriptVirgen and with Mrs. diligence Sue Reames and typed dedication. and retyped the final Williams.ArthurMrs.Mrs. Ann EleanorPreciado; Levy; Tibbitts;Archie Mrs. HelenLifland; Miss Reeves; KarenMiss RonaldSusanWard; Nafieh;andRiccitelli; Waldon ProjectLYONEL D.Coordinator AVANCE hisWillenberg,Sincere continued gratitude Director, support is andSpecialexpressed encouragement. Education to Dr. ErnestBranch, P. for ProjectDOROTHY ILvestigatorB. CARR p. iv ThePrograms purpose in of Physical the publication, Education Sequencedfor the Handicapped, Instructional is OVERVIEW ThePrograms overall in development Physical Education, of the publication, covers physical Sequenced skills physicalactivities,oftofrom developmentallypresent theeducation beginning suggestedand are program. srquenced appropriate leversguidelines - skillsPre-school for handicappedandthe instructionalcomprehensive(18 months) pupils These guidelines consist handicappedpassvitiesand theboth range corresponding limitedpupils. from andthe vigoroussimpleactivities to movement. the for complex, all categories and encom- of The scope of the skills and acti- co Thispupil).throughlines publication alsothe advancedmay is be one appropriate levels of the (high four for school).curricular the non-handicapped guides (The guide- afflictedthenecessaryaidsIt isimprovement suggested the partsforintent the emphasizeofand that developmentthe use thebody; of the materialsthe and skills ofless forthe permanentlyandthetotal activitiestheremediation child; teaching for ofpublicationsbeingtionalLos the Angeles developedassessment-service areas proposed Cityof in learning Unifiedthe are Special centerconcernedasSchool part Education concept District.of with the forthreeBranchimplementation the addi- ofhandi- the The other activity.Theobtainedof specific material for deficiencies. inthe the pupil Guidelines prior to has participation been field testedin Medical approval shall be SOCIAL:capped..:0K4UNICATIVE: child. Self Care, Inter-Personnel, Study Habits, These publicationsLanguage are:and Reading. handicaps.withtheand pupilsactivitieswith different of varying wheneve- types maturity and of whereverabilities, and developmental needed. disabilities, levels, and Teachers were and are encouraged to modify QUANTITATIVE-QUALITATIVE: andStudy Pre-Occupational Skills, Geography, Skills. History, Civics, Mathematics.Health, Science and beenThe contentarranged for into the five PHYSICAL sections: EDUCATION Publication has FORMAT Thesequence, objectives and areare morewritten specific, to reflect are arrangedthe critical in factors SectianSection Two:One: RecreationTheMovement Development Skills. Skills. of MotorPlayground and and andpupilattainmenttherequired physical objectives,is the for ofabilityattainment thethe progress achievementgoals. that of is canthe beneficial, thenofmaximum the be goals. madelevel desirable, toward of health the The goal for each By achieving Section Five:Four:Three: The Development of PhysicalSwimmingRhythmic FitnetTs.Skills. Skills. Progressions,withTheenjoyable, materialthe following and hasSuggestions practicalbeen headings: divided forto him.Lessoninto five Implementation, vertical columns Levels, Sequences-Teaching =that are found in one Section,pfrilosophy selves.appearmight justtobe belongthat Sections they to arethatcontain relatively area, the and skills completeare written and untoactivities with them- the which However, many of the skills and activities as reasonably ThisSourceLEVELS column Materials, indicates and Codes.the approximate difficulty of a nizationalhaveroundedForactivities beenexample, development foundpurposes will Section in be another are taughtof II, foundall Goal Section. simultaneously,pupils, in I, different is and vital therefore, Sections.tobut the for well-isorga- Also, many of these non-gradedparalleldifficultyforsequence. individualization an withapproach,age orthat grade particularthe of level.sequences instruction activity have and beenand to doeswrittenutilize not a The numbering refers only to the level of In an effort to allow PhysicalAntantimportant introductory information Education to all statement aboutSections.Guidelines, that to eacharea gives Sectionof thethe reader curriculum.of the impor- activitieshowever,onefrom to theindicate does simpleare notmore the toalways difficultsimplestcomplex, begin skill.andthan at numbered levelothers. one, beginning since some at The numbering, Eachcatedtointent.The the Sectiongoals bycomplex. numbers are contains written in thegoals as "Level" aand broad objectives column. direction, for purpose,that area. or They are arranged sequentially from the simple The difficulty of the activity is indi- The numbers maturity.andpriateThethe relatingteacher amount for a mustofthechild exposure activitydetermine by assessing the to what childhis activitieshismental has ability, had and to arephysical determiningan appro- activity, range from "one" to the highest listed number. vi wellTheCODINGlities asteacher chose and shouldwholimitations have be specificknowledgeable for each disability. individual about the child capabi- as He should beThis omittedletters section foropposite is pupils marked, those with when activatesspecific appropriate, disabilities.which withwould the need to Thevitiesandpupil's freelycoding his which need.abilities adoptsection would and isbe are.modify toof bebenefit theused activities onlyto him as anda toguide, not meet harmful. andthe is The pupil should learn what his potential, He then can choose those acti- TheVare -coding asA visualfollows: letters handicap and theand definitionsincludes the of pupils the categories who are based on the followingI. premise. becauseThe pupil of wouldhis handicap. be unable to perform the activity' A L= =An A auditorylower extremity handicap involvement and includes and the includesdeafblind pupils or or hard thewhopartially pupilsareof hearing. sighted. 2. performThe pupil the would activity. be harmed by attempting to U = An upper extremity involvement and whoincludespupils functionsthehave motor whoseriousthe haveinfunction the impairmenta seriousupper in theparts impairmentof lower the of locomotiontheparts inbody. ofthe the motoror body.in =NI T = A total disability and includes the pupilsareasenergya theserious uppersuch whooutput impairmenthave asand respiratorymechanisms lower inparts the whichor of motorcardiac theare functionbody;reflected handicaps. and in inin both the vii ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEWFORMAT vi PART THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS 31 AssessmentBibliographyTeachingSafety Suggestions 453 AxialDirectionalityLateralityBody SkillsAwareness - Spatial Relationships 20161410 on CombinationBeanbagsLocomotorBalance SkillsMovements 38332625 HulaShortLongBalls HoopsJump Jump Rope Rope 49475139 TiresSquareBalanceJump Board Balance Beam Board 59585655 DoubleSingleWandsParachute HangingClimbing Rope Rope 66646360 Trampoline 66 viii PART II. ResponsibilityPrinciples of Recreationof the Teacher for theand Handicappedthe SchoolTHE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATIONAL SKILLS 717168 AssessmentSocialBibIiogr.iphy Behavior . 827271 SimpleClimbingSandWheel Box ToysGames 96959291 StallHorizontalStuntsLow HorizontalBars Ladder Bar 107105104101 Complex Games SoccerBasketballFootball type typetype 115712111110 CD BasketballFootball VolleyballSoftball typetype 125121119117 VolleybnitSpeedbnllSoftballSoccer 13012912712(1 GO7rBowlingBadmintonArchery 14119'35134 WrestlingTrackTennisHandball '48'471/.51A3 ix Gymnastics Free exercise 150150 TumblingParallelSideUnevenBalance horse parallel beambars bars 158160156155152 RecreationalQuietTable Games Games and 167165164 SpectatorBowlingBasketball . 168167 SoccerGolfFootballIce 169172171170 PART III. TrackTennis and Field THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS 175174173 ThePurpose Scope-Content of the Rhythmic of a Rhythmic Program Program . 177 BibliographyMethodsSuggestions for Teachingfor Teaching DanceThe BasicRhythm Dance Steps 178177 ElementsAssessmentLocomotor of MovementsMusic to Music . 187184180 CreativeCombinedAxialBasic Movements Steps ExpressionAxial and to LocomotorMusic Movements to Music 200193192191 HoopsRopesBallFolk DancesHandling 2141711207205 PART IV. THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS 219 GencralClassSafetyTeaching SizeValues S-iggestions of Swimming 222221 UseLessonTeaching of Multi-SensoryPlanning Hints Approach 223222 GlidesAdjustmentAssessmentFloatingBibliography to Water 233230228224 BackCrawlKick Strol:eCrawland Arm Stroke 238237235234 JumpTreadButterflySideBreast StrokeintoWater Stroke WaterStroke ?4324?241239 SwimDiveWaterSurface Underwaterinto Games Dive:ate: 2492482A5 PART V. Water StuntsRaces and Relays THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS 253251250 AcquisitionGoalsImportance of Fitness ofof FitnessFitness 255 PlanningComponentsMaintenance and of of ExerciseFitness FitneSs Program 257256255 xi AssessmentAssessmentBibliographyFitness ofand Fitness the Handicapped Child 259258'57 AgilityCoordinationFlexibilityStrengthEndurance 276275272266263 ComponentsBalanceSpeedFitness Level of Fitness 2802792772 7 PART VI. Books RESOURCE MATERIALS 284283 PhonographPicturesSuper16mm Films 8mm RecordsLoop Films 304102299298 PART VII. AssessmentClass Work Sheet APPENDIX .. 306305 TapeSuperSuggestions Cassette 8mm Loop for Evaluation EvaluationUse of TapeSuper Form Form Cassettes 8mm Loop Film 336334333332329 LIST OF PHOTOGRAPHS ACTIVITYObstacleSuper 8mm CourseLoop Film Projector PUPILSPhysically Handicapped LokrantzSCHOOL School PAGE NO. xiv 2 SuperBall 8mmHandling Loop Film Projector TrainablePhysically Mentally Handicapped Retarded BannekerLokrantz School 4L43 LocomotorHula Hoop Skills PhysicallyPhysically Handicapped Handicapped Sellery School 5453 PlayscapeBall Skills PhysicallyPartially HandicappedSeeing and Blind McBrideBlend SchoolSchool 7068 tl Sandbox Partially Seeing and Blind Blend :;chool 93 L i-46Co.; PlayscapeStall Bars Partially Seeing and Blind Blend School 137 94 GymnasticsBowling PhysicallyDeaf and HardHandicapped of Hearing MarltonShoemaker Junior School High School 153138 FolkCreativeLog RollDance Expression PartiallyPhysically Seeing Handicapped and Blind LokrantzBlend School School 218176154 Flutter Kicking Physically Handicapped Shoemaker School 252220 11-...-rizontalDirectedElectrically Exercises Bar Operated Activity Hydraulic Lift TrainablePhysically Mentally Handicapped Retarded McBridePacific SchoolBoulevard School 282254 )*

14 )1 '4,;" rr

ti

''''st

!,

y% i 11 I & ...7 °s- ? 1--- vel...wf.s.es i r PM t-'5Att, 31; le t.' I a

141 4 ' -

j

trin N-WW. ".

oe MOTORTHE DEVELOPMENT AND OVEMENT OF SKILLS SPECIALLOS ANGELES EDUCATION CITY BRANCH SCHOOLS P.L. 88-164, Title III J.V. 69 -68 ;%,,:;4ge,, - -. 44.

4. V, i ' AtitiLLa INTRODUCTION SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS TheseimportanceThespatiallife. attainment skills relationships to arethe of basicpupilmotor skills (lateralityinand his movement thatphysical areand skills useddirectionality);development. throughoutis of great The concepts involved include body awareness; encouraged.ThebeisIf protectedofthewearing varying surface of from heightsnon-slippingis injuryslick or orbytextures, hard,soledthe use orshoes theofif mats,pupiltheis toequipment turf,needsbe etc.to Sinceationbalancefundamental (includingpupils (static aremovements andinternalizedindividuals, dynamic); (locomotor rhythmhaveand eye-hand-footandspecific and axial tracking). needs,skills); coordin- grow withoutTheTEACHING concepts the SUGGESTIONS use and of theequipient. activities may be taught with and The following ideas are . at varying rates, and learn in many ways, the teacher given as suggestions to aid the teacher in the planning mustatoryutilizedvisual,disabilities meet auditory,thein the individualof instruction.each motor, pupil. needs, and kinesthetic--need the capabilities, to and be and problem solving methods of teaching also aids All channelsEmphasis of learning- upon the- explor- andtivethe when teachingenvironmentand theconstructive; activityof theis favorable,lessons. is when suited the when tospace histhe is needs.teacher large enough,is posi- A pupil learns best when 11...1 in the learning process. SAFETY 2.1. KnowprogressBegin the teaching pupil. to the themore simple complex skills skills. first and then Use as many stimuli as possible. mentmustandThe safely.knowmovementpupil how needs toskills getto knowon,prior around,how to tousing performand thethrough equipment.the basicthe equip- motor He must know how to pick-up, put-down, and He 3. kinestheticChallengeIncorporate theapproaches the pupil visual, with to learning.auditory,questions motor,and statements, and Anualusenecessary area and/orthe ofvarious angroupfor appropriate the typesactivity successful of materialssizecan takeperformanceand aplace.before safe surfacesafeof an individ- activity. is yourwithhow...,""Dosuch ownthateverything as "Let'sideas "Canidea." you...," of see...". you "Dohow can itto "How anotherthinkdo it."can of." way."you...," "experiment "Show "Show Use sentences such as, Whenbeandchanginglook onthefor ability in classgreater speeds,the isdirectionof control moving,thethere pupil is heinchanging aistheto need traveling. movemovements. fordirections, without additional falling, and space and Emphasis must 4. toProvide move freelyan area and large to beenough active to atallow one alltime. pupils 5. Use words like, "Give yourself plenty of room," 14. Evaluate continually. Know how the skill is 6. "StandProvidein order an enough arm'sto position distance small equipmentthe away pupils from (beanbags, overyour theneighbor," area.balls, "Why?""Whatstrateperformed are itto wein the(you)order pupil. doingto verbalize that is itcorrect?" or to demon- "How can we (you) improve?" Ask questions such as: 7. hashoops,Place one short pupilsto use. jump-ropes, into small etc.), groups so of that 2-4 eachfor thepul:O. BIBLIOGRAPHY 8. Beginetc.equipmentto an with unstructured sucha structured as apparatus, setting. setting mats, and longprogress jump-ropes, Hackett,Activities,PerceptualCratty, LayneBryant. Inc.,Motor C. 1967.andTasks. Jenson, Robert G. Developmental Sequences of 88 pp. New York: Educational A Guide 9. toingBe stop. surea skill: the pupil knows the three aspects of perform- how to begin, how to continue, and how ToCityLearningPeek Movement Publications,Unified to Exploration. MoveSchool - 1967. MovingDistrict: to Learn, 74Palo pp. Alto, California: Division of Los Angeles 11.10. EncourageandEncourage consistent the pupil useto useof bilateral,the preferred cross- hand lateral,-unilateral movements. No.Physical Instructional260, 1968. Education Planning Framework and Committee.Services, Publication 122 pp. Physical 12. toequipment--howProvideand put foot it specific inaway. throwing to directionsget and it, kicking how for to theactivities.use useit, ofand the how mentSacramento,KindergartenEducation of Education, Framework California: Through 1969. forGrade California Twelve. Public Schools. California 70State pp. Depart- (Tentative) 4 13. skill,Review andthe evaluate,skill previously with the learned, pupil, histeach progress. the new Children.Schurr,1967. Evelyn. 569 pp. New York: Movement Experiences for Appleton-Century-Crofts, 4 THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS ASSESSMENT FOR SECTION ONE usedThe followingby the teacher pages to:contain an assessment device to be motivationalThe assessment tool device for pupils can be toward very effectiveself-improvement. as a 1. InstructionaldeterminePre-Test. Sequences. the placement of the pupil within the Assess the abilities of the pupil to Thispost-test,Ifresponsible the device pupil he is is for then intendedinvolved his becomes own as inpiogress. amorethe means pre-test,interested to aid instruction,the in teacherand cic, 3.2. Post-Test.Instruct. Teach theMeasure appropriate the improvement sequences. of the pupil. necessaryTherefore,evaluatea intest determining to themareas measurethe in marking oftherelation pupilsinstruction. pupil's and againstto reporting aneeds, standardized each abilities, system other norm.toor andbeto usedthe It is not intended as needsThethenSequences teacherassessment anduses abilities thetoestimates makedeviceassessment itin thehasmoreperforming abilitiesbeendevice usable coordinated to thefor ofdetermine necessary thethe teacher.pupil,with the skills.the andpupil's "yes"evaluationTheshould teacher orbe "no" individualof may themay select pupil.be andappropriate, and flexible. use his in own others, symbols a scalefor In some casc a simple Hedualizationaidupon thenincreasing tothe adjuststhe performance teacher ofand theinstruction. decreasing instructionin of order the pupil.theto to plandifficulty, an f6rappropriate the dependingindivi- level, This serves as an notdoesnotescolumnranging applicable, well about is fromwithplanned the 1 left etc.performanceto to 4arm, givemight needs the beof teachermoreimprovementthe pupil;usable. space forwith to example, makeright, The comment SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS DATES COMMENTS GOAL I. 1. DevelopsIdentifiesRelationships. Body body Awareness parts andand surfaces,Spatial on 2. himself,himself,bottom,Identifies other up,other directions dawn, people, people, sidewards, and -and left, objects. objects. etc.right, - ontop, GOAL II. 1. BendsUses Fundamental and stretches Movements. ) 2. Pushesbody parts and pullsin various obiects. ways. D 4.3. easilyRisesLiftssafely. fromandand lowersrapidly.a lying heavy to a andstanding light positionobjects positioncalls from in aa standingrelaxed manner.position to a lying ,--- 6.5. TurnsSwings and and twists sways inhis various body and directions. its parts. SECTION ONE MOTORTHE DEVELOPMENT AND MOVEMENT OF SKILLS DATES COMMENTS 7. movements.Creeps and crawls with cross-patterned . 9.8. WalksRuns with in cross-patternedvarious directions. movements. 11.10. withGallopshisJumps rightarms forwards with tofoot help left leading.and him. foot backwards leading and and uses then 13.12. HopsSlides on eitherin various foot. directions. 14.15. LeapsSkips withevenly various and swings speeds. his arms freely. 16.17. bodyStartsPivots in andbalance. dodgesstops movingin various easily directions. and with -. _ t 7 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOtOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS DATES COMMENTS 4 GOAL III. . TossesUses Small and catchesObjects aAnd beanbag. Equipment. 3. . ThrowsRolls anda ball catches and retrievesa ball. it. . RunsBounces while a ball.bouncing a ball. 7. . KicksStrikes a ball. a bail with his hand and ZZ . Jumpshits aand target. turns a long lump rope. 10. 9. JumpsRolls and the turns hoop aand short runs ins, along rope. beside it. 12.11. WalksbouncingJumps forwardon athe ball. topon aof 2" jumpboard balance beam.while R.CTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS DATES 13. Balances and turns around on a square .. COMMENTS balance board. , . - 14. Runs through tires placed flat on the - 15. Usesmiddleground a parachutebyof puttingeach one. with a foot others. in the 17.16. HoldsClimbsit, anda wandup steps a insingle back.both hanginghands, stepsrope. over . 19.18. hangingHangsDoes ina ropes. bouncean inverted on a trampoline.position on double .

9 Goal I. Helpof hisevery body's pupil position to acquire in space.an acceptance, and an understanding of his body, and knowledge SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS LevelsObjective 1. f Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can identify the parts and surfaces of his body. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials odes 1 people,andGiven- Recognizeto an Observethe opportunity pupil his Himself owncan: toarms andexplore andOther - Encourage pupil to: 'Books. 63:55: Hatcher:Gessell: p. 16.25. V - -Enjoy Imitate faces. gross faciallegs. expressions - Encourage the pupil .to PlayObserve aid observation his ownmirror and around objects. "peek -a -boo" by looking into a hands and feet. Mirror.Equipment. - Imitate gross movementsin a stationary when position. - Encourage the pupilhumanby"goodbye". touching to smile, respond asto welltogreet the as people, looking. and to wave 2 and-Surfaces,Given Touchdiscover opportunities and the hisname pupil Zodv the can:toPartsparts explore andand - ProgressInstruct fromthe pupilsthe etc.byidentification totelling indicate about, bodyof pointingthe parts to, touching, aedu- 63:24:11: Hatcher:Clure:Braley: p. 6. p. 50. surfaces of his body. wholesurfaces. body to the individual parts and 108: Physical66: Hon: Committee:EducationFramework p. 11. 10 - Instruct the pupils in the names of the parts. Upper and arms,surfaces lowerbands, ofoutside; top,arms,the 8 armsbottom, fingers, elbows,tips and of front, bands. wrists,2fingers, thumbs, back, backfingernails, side, of inside,hand, - Instruct the pupilsparts in theand namessurfaces of theof thumb,palmthe legsof etc. band, and feet.heel of hand, heel of . Upper legs, thighs,bottom,side,soles,shins, lower tips front,arches,ankles, legs,of back,toes. toes,feet, calves, side, toenails,heels, inside, insteps, top, out- - TeachInstruct the thepupils pupil variousand to. "Thistoobserve followtypes is my the ofthe head, fingerteacher directions, your such head." as: - Use various typesand of .hand teachingFlannel games. boardsaids. andto aidflannel in body board part figures identification. . Large sheets ofpupil's thethenpaper detailsoutline ask shape.to himreproduce of to hishimself, cut body thewith parts,and scissors to clothing,fill around in Draw around pupil and etc. BODY AWARENESS SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS 11 Levels Sequences - T'schingLProgressions SECTION ONE - GOAL I - OBJECTIVE 1 Suggestions for Lesson implementation Source Materials- Codes - Touch his body partsbody to parts. other - Provide a wide rangeelbowsshoulder,touch of activities;tonose legs, toesto knee, chinto i.e., nose, tochin wrists, wriststo chest, wriststo ears, ear to co - Touch his body partsbody to surfaces. his - Instruct the pupilsback,ankles, .to: Touch foot fingers the to frontleg. to shoulders,of his body. wrists to . TouchPlace the insideback ofof of inside hisyour (Thenhis hand head.leg ofsides, tohisto the thearm.back, top top, and bottom). - Touch his body surfacesother bodyto surfaces. . Tell the name ofleg."touching. the(sole) surface of my he foot is to the front of "I am touching the bottom my . Complete sentencesmy"Ithe seewhich usage with tell ofmy aboutthe various body parts. " ." "I walk with 12 Cool I. Helpbody's every position pupil toin acquirespace. SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT an acceptance, and an understanding of his body, and SKILLS knowledge of his LevelsObjective 2. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can demonstrate knowledge of laterality. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation 5 ofGiventhe his Left anbody, opportunity and the Right pupil Sidesto ess: explore and Parts Books.Source108: Materials EducationPhysical Codes hisside,Touch, body. right move, side, and nameand partsthe left of partsurfaceinvolvementEncourage of the while thepupil. to someone pupilname orwith else move upper touches the extremitypart the and pp.Committee.Framework 20-31. Instruct(right)Instruct theleg the pupil(arm, pupil toear, to "Touch "Touchetc.)". the your left left Records.148: AwarenessmentThe ofDevelop- Body parttoInstructside nameis of located. yourthe the partface,"pupil and toetc. the move side a bodywhere part the and inand Space. Position BODY AWARENESS SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS 13 SECTION ONE - COAL I - OBJECTIVE 2 els Sequences - Teaching Progressions I Suggestions for Lessen implementation Source Materials Codes bodyGivenVertical and an bodyopportunity Midpoint parts theacross to pupilmove the thecan: - Encourage the pupilsposition:offront to his use andbody sitting,various back with while hisbodystanding, bodycrossing parts. and the lying center on 115:Books.121: Stein:pp.Roach: 44-47. - Move the whole body .by: .Rolling Rocking on on left, and to the right. the buttocks,side to the . ProvideUse words sway,shrug, shake, clap, beat, tap, push,stamp. pull, reach, instruction in stunts suchand tumblingas: twist, turn, swing, pp. 7, 15. forward and backward. activitiesRoll", and such "Angels as the in "Logthe Snow."Roll", "Egg . - 14-Mrs* 4 histhe bodyleft assidebending, atwisting, whole(arm andetc.by turning,leg swaging, - InstructEncourage the bilateral, pupil tolateral unilateral,touch movements. right andshoulder cross- Equipment. body.acrossseparately the front and/or part together) of the Repeat on the right side. - Instruct the pupilsawith etc.smooth, roleft turn rhythmicalhand, a long cross rope fashion right in legto theover left left, Eraser.LongChalkboard.Chalk.Low JumpBar. Ropes. - Instruct the pupilandpattern tofootto hopthe and by onetimeright. onea 2-2 time onpattern, orone the aother. 1-2 pattern, Vary the PeekPercept-O-Grid.Mats Publications.or Turf. - Move the left sideacross (armleg separately andthe back partand/or of together)the - Use the chalkboardetc. as .an Draw activity, two and:chalkboard. horizontal X's 24" apart on Ask pupil to keep his body body.side. Repeat on the right . drawnconnectingstraight with andtheone X's.hand while the pupil draw with one hand a line The line should be remains in one place. 14 . Request the pupil to draw a circle 20" - hand.himself.eitherin24" front in sidediameter of hisor inbodydirectly front rather of in the thanfront preferred on of The circle should.be directly 5 HorizontalbodyGiven andan opportunitybody Midpoint, parts acrosstheto movepupil the his - hangingpositionsEncourage by - knees, thestanding, pupil etc., tolying, anduse to variouskneeling, cross bodythe Books.115: P.Roach: 53. -can: bodyBend theto touchtop part the ofbottom his - partsbodyInstruct partsbelow the abovethe pupil waist. his towaist touch with the the right body leg 120: pp.Stein:12,.14, 7, 8, 18. part of his body. - withInstructthe theleft left elbow,the hand,pupil etc. theto turnright and foot jump with a short Eraser.Chalk.Chalkboard.Equipment. - hisbodyBend body. tothe touch bottom the part top ofpart his of rope smoothly forwards and backwards. PeekPercept-O-Grid.ShortMats Publications. orJump Turf. Ropes. -. backwardandRoll backward head roll). over (forward heels roll-forward - andRoll,"activitiesProvide "Tangle." instruction such as "Egg in stuntsSit," and tumbling "Backward Roll," "Human Ball," "Forward - Useand: .the chalkboard as a classroomPlace activity two small X's shoulder width apart, bottomdown,linesRequestover theofneithersimultaneously thepupil's pupilboard. bow headinto nor fromdrawon out.chalkboard. thetwo X'sstraight to the Lines go straight LATERALITY t. SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS ObjectiveGoal I. 3. Thebody'sHelp pupil every position can pupil demonstrate in to space. acquire knowledge an acceptance of directionality. and an understanding of'his body and knowledge of his Levels . Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 4 andGiven locate an opportunity Body Parts toand identify Surfaces _ Books. -ofon Name People, and locatetheDolls, pupil theand can:bodyon Pictures parts - Ask the pupil to touch, name, and tell the . 108: 11: EducationPhysicalpp.13-16.Braley: 2, - Name and Dvate bodya surfacesanddoll. partssurfaces onand flannel on a person board and on - As a classroom activity:(left-right,side and the up-down,location front of the - back).body parts pp.Committee:Framework 20-31. pictures.figures and on people in . AskUse theflannel pupil board toperson,board. draw tofigures reconstruct a andpicture and later, body ofthe aaparts bodypicture shape of himself.on flannel FlannelDolls.Crayons.Equipment. Board.Board - -Encourage Evaluate thethe usepupil's picture.himselfoftions, detail perception bysize, innoting theplacement of the detail, on paper, propor- etc. People.PicturesPaper.Figures. of 16 5 whilehisGivenPositions, body anin partsopportunityStationary the and pupil body orto can: Movingsurfacesidentify - Teach the conceptsposition.vertical, while the horizontal, pupil is in and a inverted body 29:11:Books. Braley:Cratty: pp. 18, 20. - Name and locate hisand stationary.body surfaces parts while being - InstructTeach the the pupil pupil activitiesvarious"Double to stand stunts Walk." such and andasbend, "Wringtumbling sit The Dishrag" and 120; Stein:63: Hatcher: pp.p.p. 51. 12,21. 14. groundbodyhorizontaland stretch,parts,parts and other arebar,as lie wellin etc.objects andrelation as lift, in around relation tohang his him.on other tothe the law Ask him where his BalanceEquipment.Balance Beams. Boards. - Name and locate whilehis body moving. parts - Instruct the pupilvariouswithdirections, to various levelsmove in(forward, speeds(high, various (fast,low, backward, etc.). slow, etc.). etc.), in Mats.Low HorizontalBar. 6 Shskultim2111:hatGivention anto opportunityfired objects, to in Identifythe rela- pupil 11:B92ks. Braley: p. 19. -can: Place his body andunder,next its to,parts over, inside in of,front on of,top andof, in - Provide various placeboxes,types sidesoftables, objects, and etc. parts such of as his body near and Instruct the pupil to JAMiament.29: Cratty: P. 22. back of various objects. etc.tellon objects. which side or part is near the objects, Ask questions and let the pupil VariousMatsChairs.Boxes.Balls. or Turf.Objects. DIRECTIONALITY 17 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION ONE - GOAL I -9BCTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codt..1, - Name the location inof relationhis body to the object. . Instruct the pupilofpupilthein him,atob. box, tellplace behind underwhether his him, thehands thebytable, hisball back, hisis inback side, front to 1, head on the chair, etc. Let - Initruct the pupil to place his back relationandetc.on people to byhimself. telling where they are in Instruct pupil to locate objects mat,the etc.mat. Ask him to put his side on the Rooks. 7 MovingGiven-the Name Position anOhlects, theopportunity location of the Stationary pupil toof identifythe can: objectand - Inquire whether the object is in front of, 29:11: Cratty:Braley: p.PP. 21. 5, 8. V - Name the directionsisin themoving.relation object to his own body. - Use specific direction,:etc.forward,in back such of,backward. as to left, the leftright or right side of, 63: Hatcher: pp. 23-26. ... VariousChairs.Boxes.Balls.Eaa.21=C- Objects. 18 Giventopple.Body anParts opportunitythe andpupil Surfaces can: to Name of Otherthe pp.Books.120: 17, Stein: 25. - Indicate the sides,andright, their of bodyother parts. people's bodies left and - Identify the pupil'sthe use of a ribbon, tape, etc. left hart or arm by RibbonChairs.Equipment. or Tape. - Describe the positionpeople and their body parts. of other - Reinforce the conceptsmoves,the directionssides or when and the partschange. body remain position the sameis changed, - only that when the pupil - Request the pupil side,oftothe atell person'schairetc. is leftby the and teacher's right arm, left whether or right about the location - Provide instructionactivities "Monkeyin. Encouragestunts Roll." such as "Rumenof himself Rocker," and andothers. pupil to describe body position and tumbling

DIRECTIONALITY 19 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKI7,1S ObjectiveGoal II. 1. TheProvide pupil each can pupilmove inwith place the inopportunity a variety toof developways. skill in fundamental movements. Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes AxialGiven Skills,an opportunity the pupil to can:explore Books.Th90: pp.21-22,59,61.L.Aptity: - Bend. - hisEncourage .body and the his pupil body to parts. bend andToward stretch and away from the center of 108: EducationPhysical - . hisIn body.various positions: PP-Committee.Framework 7-8, Stretch. . WhileWithstanding, bigat differentand sitting, small levels.movements. kneeling, lying. 117: p.Schurr:20-24. 249. . "reach".UseAlone the and terms with "curl", a partner. "tuck", and - StresswithPrecede warm-up good tasks balance activities. involving before maximum moving. stretching 20 - Instruct pupil whendistanceto pushingbend apartknees, and and pulling,place to pushfeet (knees, etc.) a Bails.Equipment. - Use sentences suchpull as:. toward"Show howthe manycenter parts of theof yourbody. body you away from and Ropes.andObjectsBeanbags. pull. to push . "Show how you canandyou canpush lying,"are use andstanding, to pull push while andkneeling, pull." sitting, 190:Records. Shoemakers'Dance. . "Show"Push howwhile you moving andwouldtriangle." "Pushpull inpush a with with circle,and the thepull left."sqUare,right some- side of "Reverse." your body 196: The Swing. - Encourage 'pupil to use. Principles the: of balancethatthing andwas that thevery was center heavy." very light and something - Use sentences suchpush, as, "Showpull...": us how toof gravity. . An object whiletowardAnbody. objectsitting,standing, or away fast, lying. fromkneeling, slow. the - Perform stunts andsuch tumbling, as "Skin activities the ASnake." partnerlying etc.who is standing, sitting, AXIAL SKILLS 21 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 1 Levels Sequences --Teaching Progressions Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationhaveTie athe 7ne pupils to a stationarypull on it. object and Source Materials 1Codes, - Lower.Lift. - Instruct. pupil that: movementsLifting involvesin a vertical pushintz direction. and pulling rather Books.117: pp.Schurr: 246-247, - Pall.Rise. ..-7 . lowerobjectThethan hands, as inis the apicked arms,horizontal object up,and is andknees direction.moved extend bend to anotheroras the 120: pp.Stein:251-252. 7-8, Fall.,/ )47 / - place. 12-13,17-18. . Encourage. . the pupil to: UseLift a wideand lowerbase ofan support.object close to his Balls.Equipment.Beanbags. - theandEncourage fallto move over the slowly widepupil areas downward,when offalling the endbody. body. toto relax,spread Mats.Ropes. - Use .sentences for falling such as:"Relax". . "Roll"Tuck"Bend with head".joints". the fall". - Have. the pupil: Perform stunts and tumbling activities . -such as: "Back to Back Rise". "Turkity...... A Stand". 15....11 22 - Instruct pupil whento pushingbend knees, and pulling,place feet (knees, etc.) a Equipment. - Use sentences suchpulldistance as: toward apart the andcenter to pushof the away body. from and Ropes.andObjectsBeanbags.Balls. pull. to push . "Show how youmany youcan partscan arepush use ofstanding, and toyour pushpull body andkneeling,while you pull." sitting, Records.190: Shoemakers' . ."Push "Push while with movingtheand righttriangle." inpulllying," aside circle,with of the your square, left." body 'Reverse." 196: TheDance. Swing. - Encourage pupil to use. the:"Show how you wouldthatthing pushwas that veryand was pullheavy." very some- light and something - Use sentences suchpush, as,. Principlespull...": "Show us ofhow balance toof gravity. and the center . An object fast,whiletowardbody. sitting,slaw.standing, or away lying. fromkneeling, the - Perform stunts and tumblingsuch. A aspartner "Skinactivities whothe isSnake."lying standing, etc. sitting, AXIAL SKILLS 21 SECTION ONE - GOAL II OBJECTIVE I Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressics Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationhaveTie a the:--ne pupils to a pullstationary on it. object anti Source Materials Codes - Lower.Lift. - Instruct. pupil that: movementsthanLifting in ainvolvesin horizontal a vertical pushinc direction. direction and pulling rather Books.117: 251-252.pp.Schurr: 246-247, - Rise.Fall. . Theplace.object lowerhands, isas arms, pickedthe objectand up, knees andis movedextendbend asto or theanother 120: pp.Stein:12-13,17-18. 7-8, - Encourage. the pupil to: LiftUse aand wide lower base an of object support. close to his Beanbags.Balls.Ecuipment. 0 - theandEncourage fallto move over the slowly widepupil areas downward,when offalling the andbody. body. toto relax,spread Mats.Ropes. - Use .sentences for falling such as:"Relax". . "Tuck"Roll"Bend head".joints".with the fall". - Have. the pupil: -suchPerform as: stunts and tumbling activities"Back to Back Rise". - tit`-"Turk ---.AStand". n-lln 22 . JumpRoll in a forward, sideward, and backward. from a low box and go into a curled position when falling . .MeltLift Collapse a bowlingroll. ball. like an ice cream cone., a balloon,like a a balloon. . Lift a box shelf. medicine ball. and put it on a high Books. - Swing. - Instruct the pupil that:. Swinging and/or hanging, and supporting movements involves rotary pendular, - 22:21: L.A. City: pp. 12-13. - Sway. . Swaying involvespart.aroundthe sidebase a fixed of thesupport base moving which below part. is the above moving or to movements with 110:100: L.A. City: p. 12-13.12. - Use sentences such as:"Show. Stand us how you can...": and swing one arm and one 117: Schurr: pp.P. 52. 253-254. . LieSit downand swing oneyourandleg. part onebody. part backward. and sway four parts of forward Mats.HorizontalEquipment.Low Bar. Ladder. AMY CYTTTC 23 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 1 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - Use stunts such as:Suggestions. "Toe-Reel for Lesson xImplementation Rock". Source Materials Codes - Turn (whirl). - Instruct the pupil that:. "Trees in the "Windy gees ". Wind ". - Twist. . TwistingTurning ofof the the body body as anda. whole.its parts by turning involves rotaryinvolves movements rotaryimovements ]i . Stopping keepingand/orthe parts revolvingthe infeet opposite stationary.around directionsthe center after a-last turn requires 0 - Use sentences suchyou as, can...": weight.regaining balance and control of "Let's see--- how . SitStandTurn youron one quickly, then slowly. down, turn yourself around quickly, whole body around. foot, turn body around \arms.. .Twist Twist one one arm anotherthen slowly. in the other direction. body part in one direction, around the body; both ....,. - Teach"Lariat", 'stunts "Twister such as ", "Wring "Windmill", the Dish and Rag", "Wood- . chopper." 24 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS ObjectiveGoal II. 2. TheProvide pupil each can pupilbalance with in thestatic opportunity and dynamic to developpositions. skill in fundamental movements. Levels Sequences Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementations Source Materials Codes -StaticGiven theBalance, opportunity the pupil to Explorecan:Balance in a sitting, Encourage. the pupil to: backward,gravityBalance byand and bending change holding forward,his his center arms leaning ofout Books. 47: 85-88,pp.Fleishman: 33-34, 157. L - Balanceposition.kneeling, on andone standingfoot. . withBalanceto his his eyes withsides closed.his or eyesclose open to hisand body.then 108: FrameworkEducationPhysical - Reverse.directlyBalance withbehind one the foot other. pp.Committee:51. 2,4,7-11, Given the opportunity to Explore, . - Encourage the pupil to: 16mm Films. . . 202: Dynamic- Balance, the pupil can:Balancestraight while line. moving in a . Usesidesuch goodvarious byas bodyside.heel types alignment.against of foot toe, placement and feet Skills.Balance L - curvingBalance line. while moving in a . directions.Balance while moving in different AXIAL SKILLS. BALANCE SKILLS 25 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS ObjectiveGoal II. 3. TheProvide pupil each can pupilmove fromwith placethe opportunity to place in to a developvariety skillof ways. in fundamental movements. Levels GivenLocomotorSequences an opportunity Skills,- Teaching the to Progressions pupilexplore can: - Provide opportunitiesSuggestiunslearn for thethe followingforpupil Lesson to vocabulary Implementation and Books.Source24: Clure: Materials pp. 1-24. Codes - Crawl.Creep. concepts.. Speeds:Levels:Formations: triangles, etc. high,slow, low. slower, fast, faster. lines, circles, squares, 29:28: Cratty: pp. 6-44.39-40. - -Walk. Roll. . Directions:Forces; tight-heavy,over,to the in left , around, and sideward through, to up,the down.right; forward, backward, sideward soft, loud. 52:37: Franklyn:fie; P.pp. 61. 1-26. . Space:Surfaces:Distances: farther, farthest. large, small. rough, smooth,close, wet, closer, dry, closest, far, 108: Physical FrameworkEducationCommittee: - Use safety precautions:. Individualizehard,on a soft,one to even, one basis.uneven. the instruction and teach 117:110: Schurr:L.A. City: 160-169.pp. 7-8.119, 124, . Allow the beactuallyTeachonly unsafe, on for the on the i.e.,surfacesthat type rough,surface, of which surface, vet, whenwould uneven, itnot be would safe. etc. pupil to perform activities 121: Stein: P-236-238.pp. 7 232-234, 26 - Use an Obstacle DefineCourse.can. Usecrawl, areas tape creep,on (yellow and plastic tape)roll. to or help masking mark the course. mats where pupils FootChairs.Blocks.Balls.Equipment. and Hand . PlaceUse traffic inner tubesconesMats.theposition. onfor tubes. mats guides in anon uprightthe Have pupils crawl through MatsRhythmRopes.Inner or tubes. turf.InstrumentsPrints. - -Encourage Motivate theby placingpupilbut to outobjects use of cross-pattern his near immediate pupil reach. TrafficToys.Tape.Signs.Saw Horses. Cones. - Be aware.of the safetynecessarymovementto lookfactors whenatin extendedwalking thatcreeping are onhand anddifferent whencrawling moving. surfaces. and Records.Various134: Basic Objects. Motor walkingan.Instruct uneven,Instruct on a pupilssplinterywet, the slickpupil towalking usefloor. surface,to speciallean up theforwardor care onhill when whenand to lean backward 184: Round And Village.RoundSkills.And Ball The . Instruct the pupilandvariationswhenlength to whatwalking tell oradjustments thataboutstride, down exist thehill. speed, may in bethe etc. needed surfaces in LOCOMOTOR SKILLS 27 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - Instruct the pupilSuggestionsballs to walk of thefrom forfeet, heel Lesson andto thenImplementation to the toes. Books.Source30: Cratty: Materials pp. 6, 44. Codes - Use key phrases, suchheadahead,""Swing asup, "Toes "Push legschin straightfromoffin, withlookhip", toes,"straight and "Swing "Walk ahead," armstall; 52:38:37: Franklyn: Crume: pp. 1-34.1-26. - Encourage the creativeandsteps,types hands use oflarge forward walkingof varioussteps, smoothly."steps, small such steps, as shufflecam- 117:110: Schurr:L.A. City: pp.p. 61. 119, 124. - Encourage the pupilbinationstypes to walkof of"foot withsteps, placement: various cross-over steps, etc. heel placed pp. 232-234. - Instruct the pupilorofagainst to foot,paper walk toes, etc.discson foot toesplaced patterns placed at varying against distances. arch - Select objects ofhis spatialover,thevarious eye-foot judgments around, awarenessheights. coordinations etc.of theof to the pupilsee relationships arewhether as accurate.he stepshis and Note - Alter the heights elevatetunnelsof"lower" doorways surfacesfrom by thetosawhorses, make useby usingofthem achairs, tape;hollow construct etc.,blocks, etc. 28 - Teach games such as"Lines "Rail and Walking," Zig Zags," and "Object Touching." Records.169: Music For Physical - fc.n. - UseKnow sentences the capabilities suchpupils as: and for limits safety. of the Fitness. . . "Run on "Swing"Bend handselbows and and arms knees." forward." balls of feet." . - Be sure that as the equal.pupil ."Head "Run use runs, up."lightly." to heboth gives sides of his body by - Run for short distancesusingLeadthem armsupin in tothe asthe greater directionwell beginning. as distances. legs he isand traveling. extending - Instruct the pupil to:. Jog by putting toes. heel down first and then the balls of the - Teach games such asTag." "Relay". Sprint and by "Beanbagrunningfeet. on ,-...... ,.. LOCOMOTOR SKILLS 29 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching ProgresssionsJurap. -Suggestions for Lesson ImplementationInstruct the pupils to swing arms in the EquipmentSource Materials Codes L slightlypushdirecto coveroff whenagainst greater landing. floor, forward and distance, to bend kneesto on of the jump and to lean forward Mats.Drums.Balls.CoconutCastanets. Shells. - Provide"SquareTeach activities instructionHopscotch" and and ingames stunts"Jumping such and as:Fancy." WoodRopes. Blocks. - Gallop. - Use3/4, tumblingballs 4/4 andturns. activities, ropes to enrich such asthe 1/4, lesson. 1/2, Records.158: Shetland.ToI GoShould To Like - Use sentences. such as: "Lead with same foot." 197:180: TenRhythmIndians. Little Time. - short,Emphasize. long, the rhythm of the movement,"Keep"Big step, toes littlepointed step." forward." - changepreferredEncouragefor a towhile thefootpupil andother; for to then alead leadwhile with with with andthe the thethenright. left 30 - Slide. - Use phrases "Step to side," "Draw foot up - Instruct the pupilleadto to. the And slide:to otherchangefollowing and directions hop,"foot." "Shift smoothly. weight from - Be sure the pupilbalancing has. WithWithoutthe onandskill bumpingonewithout of foot anyone. abefore partner. introducing - Utilize the supportmovementperson, .of Use a onaproppole, movingone such chair,foot. prop as a'etc.as skill is learned. - Hop. - Use short sentences .such Give as: othex 'hvsicalbefore support pupil practices on his own. when needed . "Hold"Lift"Hop upyouror inswing headtheare armsaironhigh." going." the onin onesamethe foot foot." and land direction you . "Bend"Land"Keep youronthe toes, inactiveknee thenthetothen give kneefootball heel." more bentfromof foot, totouching keep and the ground." spring." - TeachEncourage games the such pupil as:Hopand to (hop,then hop inonslide, aboth pattern etc.).feet' - such as the Flea . "Hopscotch" and "Beanbag Hop." LOCOMOTOR 31 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 - Instruct the pupilsSuggestions to: for Lesson Implementation Records.Source Materials Codes L - Skip. . HopRepeat. a few times ontimes fewer times on left; fewer times on right. left foot then a few 134: Skills.andBasic Ball Motor . .HopRepeat Hop one two until hops onmovingright. forward. hop left and one hop on right, this is mastered. left and two hops on right - Use sentences such as:. . "Step forward "Step-hop, step-hop." and hop up." - Encourage one pupilwith skipping..to "Swing anotheruse aarms prop who oris tohaving skip difficulty in up." - Instruct the pupil to. Useland words on balls such as:of"Bend"Push "Swingfeet. yourup, arms andknees, upstretch, and slightly." forward." and reach." - Use sentences to makerun,"Leap,. Encourage arun," movementleap, etc. leap, pattern, leap."height. pupil to attain distance and "Leap, leap, 32 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS CoalObjective II. 4. TheProvide pupil each can pupilcombine with moving the opportunityin place and to moving explore from and place develop to place.skill in fundamental movements. , Codes Levels - Jump and land. es - Teach& sions - Encourage the pupilSueeestions .to: Jump in for the Lesson airbent- Implementation and land with the knees 30:Books.Source Cratty: Materials pp. 11, 21-22, L .- JumpJump,Run, jump,overturn,land, a andand land. jump again. and land with a partner. line or a rope and land. land. 108: Physical Committee.FrameworkEducation33. . HangJump onoff apparatus, of objectsmaintainthe let heightgradually go,balance. andland increasingland. and 109: L.A. City: pp.136,121, 49-51.57-59, 141.125, - Teach the pupil to: . BendLandHold knees.onarms sideward. balls of the feet. 121:117: Stein: Schurr: pp.241-242. 236-238, . .Ask HoldKeepLook the thechestwhere pupil andyou to arejumpswitch to holding one hand. pupil's hand for support. head high. landing. forward. Standing Next Equipment. pp.17. 6-7, 9, .- LandLook lightlyin the directiononside by side. both feet. of the next movement. HorizontaljumpingclimbingSturdyBalls. Objectsoff. onLadder. and for COMBINATIONLOCOMOTOR SKILLSMOVEMENTS 33 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 4 Suggestions for Lesson implementation Source Materials Cocies - Provide instructionTopsuch Spinin asstunts - "Kangaroo and tumbling Hop," "1/4 and 1/2 and "Crossing The Brook." SturdyHorizontalEquipment,Balls. objects- Ladder. - L - BeUse aware apparatus of and and provide surfaceobjectsthe topfor on toto a which jumpthesafe groundfromto land. below. andfor jumpingclimbing off. on - Pivot. - Encourage the pupil .to: .Pivot Pivot andin changea circle directions on right onfoot command. or . .Walk Run,Face a stop,a partnerpoint.left foot- short distance, stop, and pivot. and pivot and run to starting and pivot away from him. . PivotBounce on a ball, Makestop,on heels.a pattern of pivoting on toes, then hands (hips, etc.). and pivot and throw. - Have the pupil placeandfeetfront thebackward. inrightof a thestationary foot left in and position, while keeping turn forwardhis Reverse feet. 34 - Use sentences such a: .the "Push"Spin following: on ball of foot." with the free ;root." - Provide instructionactivities in. "Bend"Keepstunts suchweight and astumbling low- "Coffee over stationary Grinder." foot." knees." - Teach games such as: . "Circle Travels, and "Find It and Walk It."

COMBINATION MOVEMENTS 35 Levels Sequences - Tesching_Progressious SECTION ONE - GOAL II - Suggestions for Les OBJEcrivE 4 - Use sentences for dodging. ."Shift "Bend - suchweightunees." as: movement."backward to stop forward - Dodge. - Encourage the pupil to:. Run"Push aroundto offa line ina series theand newchange of direction." obstacles. directions. . DribbleDodgeRunStand and severaland aavoid balldodge at ballsbeingand ahim. balltry beingtagged andbeing thrown.dodgeby throwna partner.a partner - Teach games such as:. Dribble a ballwho andin is andodge .tryingobstacle around to course. getpins the as ball. - Start and stop. - Use phrases such as .the "Exchange"Roll following Dodge Dodge Ball." for Ball.""Center Tag." starting:. "Lean"Begin forward to move when whenforward.""Go" you you orare hear when moving the you word see the signal, etc." 36 - Use sentences such as the following for stopping:. "Bend"Think knees." about stopping before you stop." . "Stop with"Shift one yourahead weight of the in other. the direction with feet apart, side by side, or Head up." 1 opposite your movement. -- - Encourage the pupil .to: .Start MoveStart at(run, on a aspecific skip,distance point. and stop. command. gallop, etc.) a certain . . MoveCombine and stop onin aansignal. line. area. various movements such as - . Move jump, run, and stop. and stop with a partner. , t . Move a continuestop for toa certainmove. count and then in a group and all stopcertain at once.number of steps and e( \'''''' - Teach games such as:. "Circles & "Beefsteak." Half Circles," and "One Base," \,, ' . t, COMRTNATION MOVEMENTS 37 BECTON ONE - TEE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS Levels ObjectiveGoal II. 5. The pupil can use small objects and equipment. Sequences - Teaching Progressions Provide each pupil with an opportunity to develop skill in fundamental movements. Beanbags.Given an opportunitythe pupil can: to use - EncourageProvide one the beanbag pupilSuggeastions tofor experiment each pupil. for withLesson the Implementation Books.39:Source Dauer: Materials pp. 88-89. Codes U -Use beanbags inways. a variety of - Encourage the movementspupilmotivatingbeanbag to usebeforeto challenges.developbilateral giving both specific sides of the 108: Physical90: L.A. City: FrameworkEducationp. 37. - Select activities legs,allbody.to involveparts head, of theand the usetrunk. body of including arms, Equipment. pp.Committee: 7-8. . Toss anda beanbag catchwith aunderhandwith beanbag right(into alternating withahand,to box). a both partnerwith hands. hands, left hand, and then Boxes.BeanbagBeanbags. boards. . .Toss Toss beanbag beanbag into into feet.afrontcenter beanbagthe and air,opening backboard clap of of fromhands body distance inand catch. of 5 38 . Toss beanbag to partnerawaypartner and has 6catch feet thrown. the beanbag that . Balance beanbag andhandsrun,on head,headcatch skip,behind and putbeanbag hop, walk,back,both and as tip jump.it headfalls. backward - Incorporate zany of the. Lie above on back,activities pickReverse. feet,up beanbag put beanbag with behind head. Balls,Given anthe opportunity pupil can: to use - Provide: into relays and other types of games. Books, - Roll balls. - Encourage each pupilballs .to BallsOne beforeexperiment ball of giving variousfor witheach specific sizes. pupil. activities. 106: Nagel: Alamedapp.Schools: 50-51.58-63, County 65, - Use motivation phrases"Let's"Can such you..," see..," as: etc. "Show us...," 110: L.A. City: pp.83,91,67-68, 71, 149,144, 80-81,70, 153.151. 77, JumpEquipment.Boxes.BowlingBalls. Ropes. Pins. BALLSBEANBAGS 39. Seuutnces Tescblng Progressions SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Sugsestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Instruct pupil to: . RollRoil a ball andwho retrieve is also it. seated so it passes between while seated, to a partner 134:Records. Basic Motor Skills.and Ball . Roll aa ball forhisit feet.rolls back. ball intoto a awall box and10 feetcatch away. it as 10 feet down a . Roll a -3 -footTwo Two hands alley.hands underhand. underhandside, from the the right left side. ball with: - Teach games such as:"Hot Potato," and "Tunnel- One ." underhand fromside; thethe leftright side. - Instruct the pupilwhentheInstruct when rollingball seated withthe the pupiltotwo ball. push bands to look with at fingers the target - Bounce and catch balls. - Instruct pupil to thecatchingpointinglook ball. at theandup toballat preventthe when target scraped when fingers.bouncing 203:16mm Films.Ball Skills. U 40 - Instruct pupil to: . CatchBounce a and catch aball ball. bounced from a partner. U \. Bounce. a.Bounce ballMake soaaball that to ittwo"Bounce, goes or moreover bounce, partners. catch, etc." rhythm of bouncing andball catching; to partner 5 feet away. . .Bounce Bounce aa aball ball, continuouslya turnsquares.jump around rope in stretchedand hopscotch catch waistit. high. ball several times while - Teach games such as:. Bounce walkingleft hand, and running.and then with the right hand. ball with both h;; with the . - Throw and catch balls. - Instruct the pupil"Two to:. Look Square at theBounce." ball when catching;. . .Point Step thein thehands direction handusingtowardthrowing. when the theof throwing.foot thetarget targetopposite when his throwing BALLS 00 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - Instruct the pupilSuRoestions to:. Toss a for Lessonthrow Implementation to a partner. ball with a two hand underhand Source Materials Codes . LetThrow a handballit. wall. the ball bounce and catch it. ball withup in an the underhand air and tosscatch to Let the ball bounce and . Throw a away.catch it. ball usingunderhand a side into toss a boxto 6 feet . toThrowpartner partner a 10ball feet10 withfeet away. answay. overhand throw . Throw ropeThrowthrow.side held atoss, ball at underhandshoulderto a partner heighttoss, over and10 afeetover jump away.-hand aball at handball wallLet with the aball bounce and catch it. . Throw a - ChestOne-handTwo-hand throw. overhandoverheadunderhand throw. throw. ball with a: - Teach games such as:"Target"Circle"One"Ball Old Distance Race."KeepCat Throw."Away." Throw." 42 (

-vs

I,

itaamoi--rroolowr 'Irl-OPIFORragsZ1.

Pc.1-71"

t 1, njook.-4.toi . rwiii6114,' 111&.- '44 ar 1.sow.

oitttts Oftr

/0001111111111P -par lit, 9

I

ti

11 .' 41 - Kick balls. S Use .sentences "Keep your such eyes as: the"Aimon theball." slightly ball." (Kick below through the centerthe ball). of - Instruct pupil to: . Kickto"Use aa handballyourstationary arms wall. for ball balance." on the ground . Kick a ball rolledKickaway.to toaa partnerbouncingstationaryhim by ain ballpartner. aball game to on acourt partner.the ground10 feet - Teach games such as:"One. .Kick Catch Base," a balla kickedand held "Line ball.in theUp Kickhand. Ball." - Strike ball with the hand. - Provide a targetEncourageaiming. to aid the pupil pupil to inlook at the ball until oftheEmphasizeit the ballhits hands. is thethe controlled target.fact that by the the direction position of . Instruct the pupil to hit: Thedownward.forward. backtop ofof thethe ballball ifif itit isis toto gogo goThe upward. bottom of the ball if it is to BALLS ZD SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - Stress safety factors.Suggestions. Protect for the Lesson little Implementation finger by keeping Source Materials Codes . MakeHit thea hand,it close not theto theends other of the fingers. fingers. fist by closingball with bands the and palm curling of the - Drop the ball from waistthe rebound, height, strikeand on-of thumb itway open-handed ofoutside ball. of with the fingers and out - Drop the ball fromtwo waistthe hands rebound, height, overhandunderhand strikeand and onand it hit hitopen-handed a atarget. target. with - Toss the ball upand above face,thehit thedescenta striketarget. head, whenit and with iton twois inhand:: front open of -the handed - Hold the ball, waisthand;strike high,swing ball in other andpalm hit armof adown target. and back and heelhand;contactthefrom of ball swingone the the withside handother ball anto and armandopenthe side acrosshit otherhand ofa target..usingandthumbthe strikebody theto 4§ andhandTossswing sidethewith other ballof open thumb arminto hand up tothe usingandcontact air strike theover the heel ballthe ball, of head;under- handand Holdhitsideswing a ball, target.to other the waist otherarm high,across and instrike the palm body theof fromhand;ball one withTeLzh"Circle"Chinese the games fist, Sock Handball," such and Ball," as:hit a"Bat"Two target. andSquares," Run," and Given the opportunity to use Provide"Beginning one longFist ropeBall," 15' - 19' long 21:Books. D.A. City: -Jump Jump Ropes, long jumpthe pupilsropes. can: ropeInstructfor to:each thegroup pupil of 4-5who pupils.is jumping the 39:22: Dauer:L.A. City: p.pp. 8. 8, 15-16. - Turn long jump ropes. . Jump intwo rhythm times toonRepeat.tworope, one times jumpside on overof the stationary theother stationary side of therope, rope. and words, "Jump, jump." Equipment. pp. 359-362. . himStandjumps.and, to beside asjump the over therope rope,it comes using face near two the him,small turner ask Repeat the movements. 16'Long - Jump19'. Ropes,

i BAILS 1 LONG JUMP !,7ES 47 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions . .Look Jump at on the balls rope. of feet and bend his Records.185: Rope Jumping and Ball - Instruct the pupilrope who. to:isTurn turning with atheknees. straight arm and look at 16mm Films. Handling. . .Swing Turn ropefrom the shouldersropearm.the injumpers a usingcomplete feet. the arc. entire 1/4 arc before turning the 232: Rope Jumping, - ProvideAdd music the and/or opportunity rhymesis learned.. Walk,to:after thenrope jumpjumping over a stationary . TurnWalk, a run,long andrope right.rope--1/4ropejump rhythmically onover the arca ground.low (front-door, left swinging and back-door). . DoubleStand nextjump towhile roperope.theoverhead, standing ground.before jump itnext isthe toswung rope the as it touches . .Run Run in out as ofthe the rope himandrope isandjump. afterturned jump. jumping. awaytoward from him ("Run in the front door"). ("Run in the back-door"). . Run in with a partner. 48 . Jump. . JumpBouncePlay andcatch a turn.ball.touch and jump.the ground. . ,... - Jump and turn short ropes. - TeachProvide the one pupil short to correct ropemeasure for length jumpeach ropepupil.by having for the pupil stand U - Instruct the pupiluponfeet tomiddle hisjumpand armof bendon rope pits.balls knees. and of bringing the ends 0.- - Use sentences such .as: "Pull"Swing it the with rope both forward hands overclose your to yourhead." Id . "Swing, jump;jumps swing,junp;(doubletoes." swing,jump." jump). jump, "Jump over it." "Do it again." (single jump). jump..' - Instruct the pupil to:. JumpTurn turninginthe place rope an withoutoverhead imaginary the (from rope. back to . . Single jump turningbackward.touchedfront) the rope andthe forward,jumpground. the rope after it has SHORTLONG JUMPSUMP ROPESROPES 49 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation $burce Materials Codes . Double jump turningbackward. the rope forward, . . Single hop turningbackward. the rope forward, . . .Double Skip travelingjump and ropebackward.Skipperformforward. twirl.in placcthe alternate turning the rope forward, . JumpRock ropeon front with footcrossedrope while forward arms. turning and backward,the and alternate - . JumpHop, withplacing feet alternate together(sideward,(blekipgto back heelsand foot.step). apartforward,forward backward). . .Jump,Hop, Hop,Speed tapping crossingswing jump foot(singtoe one Alternate. inforward. jump--"Hotfoot front, over in thePepper").back. other. Alternate. . Jump withwhileinandas time long changea twopartner. toas ropes jumpplacesit safely arerope with turning rhymes.possible. a partner. . Jump while fourdoors). peopleropessimultaneously(Double thatare Dutch--front-doors turningcross in each oppositetwo other. directions. and back- 50. - After music and/or rhymes. Jump afterover aropejumping a short rope. long rope while turning and - Provide one hoop forjumping each ispupil. learned. Books. Hoops,-Given Use thehoopsan opportunitypupil in variouscan: to ways. use - Encourage each pupildoto withexploreto experiment a hoop. and to andfind out what he can 126: Van Hagen:90: L.A. City: p. 339.39. - Be aware of the capabilitiestations of theand pupils.limi- . Equipment. - Use the hoops forvertically, placestargets for when orpupils placedhorizontally; to do axial and movements. for 16mmHoops.222: yilms. Hula Hoop - Provide opportunity .for Lay the the pupil hoop to:on thewithin and one out. foot in and one foot out. floor and jump Skills. . .RollHold Roll the the hoophoop hoop uprightinthrough. a andcircle. climb andforward, run along backward, side. and t. UnTAJUMP WINPCRUriS 51 SECTION ONE - COAL II - OBJECT1"E 5 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions. Roll for Lesson Implementation the hoop and climb through as Source Materials Codes . Swing the ofRolljump it ittheand a8 hoop,catch it turns runit on andaround. the cross other inis side.front rolling. hoop as a jump rope and . SpinTwirl hoop hoop on around itswaist,body vertical twowrist, at andparts once. arm,ankle.axis of neck,andthe Reverse direction. . JumpRoll overa hoop a hoopto arollsrun usingpartner(low around one swing-1/4it whileto likeit. you. ahe arc,rope --- complete arc). - Arrange a sequenceor obstacleof. Teachhoops gamescoursein a suchhopscotch pattern. "Musicalas: Hoops ". "Squirrels"FollowMoe(Movement(Played theThe inlikehoopsLeader." explorationTrees." musical as trees). chairs). using hoops). 52 i i

i 69 07

V -

70 GivenBoards. an opportunitythe pupil can:to use .71ma - Provide. opportunity for the pupilJumpjump to: up to and the down ground. on the board and then 90:Books. pp.L.A.City: 41, L - Jump on boards in various ways. . Jump,boardJump forwardand thenhop from sidewardback the to groundtheon toground. theto theboard Equipment. 106-107. . doingJumpfrom from athe quarter theleft board andturn, right.to a thehalf ground turn, while _(16" x 18" xwithJump 314" Boards2" x 2" . Dothree "jumpingthe "scissors"quarter jacks" turns, whilewhile whole onon the theturn. board.board. bottomsupports16" width). of on the the . JumponJump theup with andground. onedown foot on theon boardthe board while- and one . Jumpwhileoftossing the ropebouncing board. andforward catching a ball. and backwarda beanbag, on andtop then - pupilsEncourageProvideor individually. may enough pupilsparticipate jumpto work boards without in smallso waiting.that groups the HOOPS JUMP BOARDS 55 Levels c uences - Teachi,L : essions SECTION ONE - GOAL IX - OBJECTIVE 5 u .estions for-- Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Emphasize safety factors:. UseLook your where arms you to maintainare balance. help you jump and tojumping. - Encourage the pupilactivities .to Allow think toone ofperform new on(16" the xjump 48" board-x 3/4") - at one time. pupil to be on a jump board Given an opportunity to balance .- Be sure the pupilhopping, stuntsknows howsuchetc. to as get jumping on and jacks and scissors, L can:on- aUse Balance a balance Beam, beam the inpupil various - Start the pupil balancinggetgradually off thein arai*ebeam line safely. thethen height level from the Jleaka,90:61: L.A. Hackett: City: P.p. 34.71. ways. - Allow only one pupilbeamfloor. atto aparticipate time. on the Beanbags.BalanceEauiam9pt. Beams. - -Instruct Use visual the targetspupil totheeye placed watch right,level, belowfoot etc.straight placement.eye level, ahead, to the left, to Recordg.Wands.148: Dynamic - -When When walking walking sideward, forwardentire orkeep foot backware, feet on beam,at keepright toes pointed forward. 202:1Qmm BalanceFilms, Skills.Balancing. anyleft to the board 56 1 - -Encourage Begin with the a pupilwidebody balanceto equallyuse bothbeam to sides ofmaintain 4" ofin balance. - Use mats on eitherawidth if2" side needed.balance then of asbeam beam. the for skills safety are learned, use - Provide opportunity for. SlideWalkthe pupils backward,forward,sfdcwards. to: handshands heldheld outout toto sides.sides. . Walk backwardforwardforward, beel_againstwithtofootthen middle left inturn frontfootof andtoe beam, inofslidewith backright.and leftsideward. Reverse. . Walk sidewardforward andtoorright.on thebackwardright. hips. left (cadwith tohands the Reverse. . .Walk Valk onforward forward, toes. and backward,beanbag pickthe centerup on asideward head.beanbag of beam. withfrom . Walk to center andto szccip.end of beam. Rise and walk _ _ . .CloseGoClimb Step under eyesthroughover a andwanda wand awalk whichhoopfrom heldbeam. held istop above held aboveof beam.the3 feetthe beam. beam. (Low Beam). BALANCE BEAM 57 Levels ;IID mences Teachi Pr essions SECTION ON: - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 estions for Lesson ementation Source Materials Codes Given-asusaimilauss_rrazu,can: Balance the opportunity on square balanceto use the pupil - SpaceInstruct boards pupil a safeto narrowbegin thedistance wide onbase. board base&part. withand progress to the more Book90:61: .L.A.Hackett: City: p.pp. 35. 25-25. boards. - Encourage the pupiltheto to balanceb,,ard. think andof newof otherways activities to do on Balls.Equipment. Provide. BalanceStoopStand opportunity andon with thepick anboard forup athe pupil to: with feet .together, feet apart. object balanced on and balance.beanbag. basesBoards.SquareBeanbags.(16" - Balance 3"x3"xx 16" with . Balance on theandhis knee,head. . and touch head, shoulders, hips, left and right foot. - 5"x5"x5".2", 4"x4"x4", . TurnStand the on toes right.the left, and to the right. himself around on the board to board to the left and to the and balance. 16aanFthas,202: Balance Skills. 58 Giventhe pupilan opportunity can: to use Tires, - Provide assortmentin of number tires fromwhich 4-12. range Books.61: Hackett: pp. 27-28. L - Move on and arounda tiresvariety in of ways. - Involve small groupsArrange.allformations. can of bepupilstires active inso variousatthat one time.patterns and 90: L.A. City: p. 48. . DoubleSingleIncorporate row.and doubletirescourse intorow combined.activities.obstacle TiresEquipment.InnerBeanbags.Balls. (automobile, Tubes. - Provide opportunity .for .Keep Runthe one aroundpupil foot to:a intire.around the middle the tire. and move bicycle).truck and . JumpRun amongonin the many tiremiddle tires out.and and bouncewithout then off. jumptouching - 204:16mm Basic Films. Movement . LeapRun throughon, in, the intires,the the tires. middleplacing of a eachfoot one. over the tires. SQUARE BALANCE BOARD TIRES 59 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions. Hop through for Lesson Implementation the tires on your leftright foot. foot. Source Materials Codes - Encourage pupil movements.to create. Move ownon patternsonly of tires. the tires with his feet touching - Use tires as visualthrow targets beanbags for pupilor ball to through. Books. withGiven- Use Parachutes, the parachute opportunity theinways. apupil tovariety practice can: of - Instruct the pupil to:. .ListenHold Work parachute together.carefully withupon two command. hands. and perform the action 90: L.A. City: p. 42. . ThornPlaceUse an infeet underhand, the in sametime.grip. directionoverhand, ator themixed same the direction they are 212:16mm Fun Films. With Parachutes. - Establish a "ready position". Raise parachuteto begin pulling. each"stretch"as high as for possible, maximum height. and junioment.Parachutes.(16', 24',28' ordiameter). activity:. InstructDistributeSpread parachute the the pupils pupilsparachute. smoothly to evenlykneel out andaround on getfloor. the ready to grasp the rims of the Chute. 60 . - - ProvideEncourage opportunity pupilswithout to forpull themoving the pupil parachute the to: feet or jerking. . Raise and withposition; rapid("Making movementsthen Waves"). in a whilekneeling in aposition. standing lower the parachute repeatedly . Walk,Raise run,the parachutejump,theairthen parachute. so rapidlyto that the airright catches while itholding and lifts on to it etc. to the left and into they, . Raise higher.towardover head center. and quickly take 2-3 steps the parachute as high as possible( "Umbrella "). When the parachute . . Place a heldvigorouslyreaches("Mushroom"). waist its high, up peak, and and down.take shake 2-3 chute steps back. ball on the parachute as it is ("Bounce Ball"). . Raise the parachuteWhenraisethestep theas parachuteone quicklyhighparachute hand, as 2-3 overkneel reaches steps head and toward itsandpull peak,to rimthe the ofcenter, floor possible. behindfromparachutefloor. underthe body. touchesit and spreadthe floor chute all evenly come outon ("Astrodome"). When the center of the . . TIRESPARACHUTES 61 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials I Cod? . Raise the parachutepulloneusing foot tochute the waist forward underhandhard level andand holdgrip.one footfor sixback, Place . Raise parachute areturntheseconds.to waistfacingoverhand around level the sogrip. centerthatusing the of pupil'sthe chute. backs Repeat. ("BicepRelease Builder"). one hand . Raise parachute Reachtoforwardfootchute waist back forwardwith heightand with overhandpull. and withthe one left grip. foot and back, regrasp lean ("Horse Pull"). Place one . originalthantheoverhand chute unroll position. griptoward the and chutethe stretch center and tight.return with hands, ("Roll the Chute"). - -to Roll . Sit in a cross-leggedthenheadparachutegrip. lieto position, thedown. to shoulders knees raise using and theremain overhand sitting, Pull the parachute over the ("Bedtime"). 62 Given the opportunity to practice - Emphasize safety factors. Books. with- Use Wands, wands the in pupila variety can: of ways. . KeepLeave wand a large under space -control -One Onearound end handat onalleach onfloor times. eachpupil. and end. one in hand. 90:39: Dauer:L.A. City: p.pp. 49. 20, 99. U - -Provide Make wands one wandfrom 7!cowling,for1".or rolledeach pupil. broomsticks,paper 36" - 42" x 1/2" Wands.Eouiament. - MoveHold wand with bothover hands it. overand stephead Step back. get:ioldit.and up. wand,behind sit back down and cross then - steplegged over and Reverse. - -Throw Balance wand wand in airon oneand liehanduatch down, and it. walk,get UD, kneel, etc. - Pretend the wandwood,it.for isthings, aa canoe,flag,variety (a abaseballetc.), flagof pole,and bat, show a apaddle sawhow toto cutuse PARACHUTES WANDS 63 SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions EmphasizeSuggestions safety for Lessonfactors. Implementation Books.Source Materials Codes 1 pupilonGiven Single can:an opportunityRanging Ropes, to practicethe . LegsClimballow. lockuponly with the as thepositionhigh hand-over-hand as strengthand push will thegrip. 39: Dauer: pp. 273-280. - Climb single hanging ropes. . Climb bodyInstructgrip. up. the pupil to descend the rope down with the hand-under-hand Robes.Equipment.Single Climbing . Place mats under slideheropes.slowly used down inusing the arope.climb. similar foot lock as It is unsafe to - - Instruct the pupilpupilEncourage in the: is climbing. resting with resting stops as . Cross - SwingGrasp therope right overhead upward.legso aroundandthat pull the the bodyrope Tope passes across the leg climb (easiest). . Stirrup lock. - Grasp the rope overhead,bodytheright ropeupward. instep. onpulling the instep. the The left foot clamps - The rope passes rightonlocked.are right clampedfoot side and tnether,underover left. the rope is When feet 64 - Provide opportunity .for .Pull Graspthe up pupil rope,from to:sittingstandingto sitting position position position to and and return. return. pull up from lying position . HangPullChin inupon afromthe ropeupposition, - tohang hands. and legs pull straight, chin and return. sitting position with flexed lying position to standing . hangClimb the rope Hangkneesknees.with in a:and an bentinverted arms. position. in a sitting position with straight . Descend the rope.- -Stirrup Foot-and-legCross-legHands onlylock climb. (difficult lock. for girls).

ti SINGLE CLIMBING ROPES 65 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION ONE - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 5 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes DoubleGivencan: Hangingthe opportunity Ropes, the to pupilpractice - Provide opportunity .for Jump the up, pupil grasp to: ropesand hang with arms straight. with the hands, Ximka.39: Dauer: pp. 159-160, U - Climb on double hangingin a variety ropes of ways. . .HangJump HangJump up up to to a anand raise and lower body several times. withand single peddle (double) legs like leg alifts. bicycle. bent arm hang.extended arm position DoubleEquipment. Climbing 279-280. . DoClimb up one ropeother. and "Skin the Cat" forward and backward. climb down the . Ropes. . HangClimb in up an one ropewayotherthe down). toprope, (reverse and continue the procedure the climb on tothe inverted position. halfway, transfer to - Use spotters forEmphasize "inverted"Skin. Place the safety: hangs"matsCat". under and roves. onGiven a Trampoline, the opportunity the pupil to practice can: - Teach the pupil how .to: Get on the trampoline. 32: Crotty: gcl..2 L - Use trampolines. . Jump.GetKillUse histhe arms.jump. off the trampoline. Equipment,Trampoline. pp. 1-54. 66 - Modify the activity when needed for the pupil.. A directionshyperactive and pupil emotional may need support manual from . spottingA theblind teacher pupilbelts while willand ropes.requireon the trampoline.special - . helpA retarded in analysis pupil ofwill the require movements. special landingProvide. positions.instruction in the variousSeat Drop. . . FrontHandBack Drop.andDrop. Knee Drop. - TeachEngageactivities. agility in a numberactivities of "calming" and balance activities, - ofPracticetrampolinerelaxation short, frequenton session. training,the trampoline turns. Pf*Ar shoulda vigorous consist TRAMPOLINEDOUBLE HANGING ROPES 1

A

"it%

'1/44 ,tj

'4.01;1;1

14\ :*,§54. T*0; -;t. PLAYGROUNDRECREATIONTHE DEVELOPMENT AND SKILLS OF SPECIALLOS ANGELES EDUCATION CITY SCHOOLSBRANCH P.L. 88-164, Title III J.V. 69-68

PRINCIPLES OF RECREATION FOR THE HANDICAPPED. SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS 3. groundAttitudes should and bethe understood meaning of and behavior taught. on the play- A pupil 1. participationandTheleisure rightshandicapped which as inall provide pupilsocially-accepted people has satisfaction to the develop same activities needs, skillsto the desires, forindivi- for 4. doesPupilsturns not and whoautomatically to have "play a disabilityby acquirethe rules". andthe areability unable to totake 2. possible.participateThedual. handicapped with shouldthe non-handicapped have the opportunity whenever to skills,spectator.givenligentutrticipatein'all an rules, andopportunity appreciative and scoring aspectsto understand spectator can of helpsports sportsandmake should participant. an 88 intel- abe Knowledge and the acquisition of the 3. Thepossible.as activitiesnearly like for those physical for the recreation non-handicapped should beas AlthoughSUMMARY.education many programs, schools thereare increasing is still atheir need physicalfor more RESPONSIBILITY1. OF THE TEACHER AND THE SCHOOL.Thein skillsa physical and ruleseducation of the class games and should the physical be taught asrecreationaltheactivity, a partstimulus of more many andfor opportunity, physicalhandicappedgreater selfactivities andpupils. realization more ofparticipation all for types, the usedon The potential of pupilsrecess,tunityshouldeducation could fcrbenoon, organizedand pupilshave andrecreation opportunities afterto inenjoy orderschool. program these to to provide activitiesinplay the at anschool home oppor-at Many handicapped Anderson,BIBLIOGRAPHY.physically Marion, handicapped, et al. must be tapped by our schools. Play With A Purpose. 2. wereparticipationTheand developedteacherin their should neighborhoodsonin theplay makeschool by anall playground.effortif pupils. their to basicencourage skills Many are not ThroughEducationPhysicalNew York. Grade EducationFramework'Harper Twelve. & FrameworkforRow, Public Publishers, Committee. Schools. 1966. (Tentative). Sacramento, KindergartenPhysical 549 pp. tomorrow.play.aggressivelead to the enough recreation to ask heto willbe included enjoy as in an others' adult The play which a pupil enjoys today will Handicapped.Pomeroy,California. Janet. 1969. New York. Recreation For The Physically70 pp. The Macmillan Company, 1964. 382 pp. 71 THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ASSESSMENT FOR SECTION TWO usedThe followingby the teacher pages to:contain an assessment device to be motivationalThe assessment tool device for pupils can be toward very effectiveself-improvement. as a 1. InstructionaldeterminePre-Test. the Sequences.placement of the pupil within the Assess the abilities of the pupil to Thisresponsiblepost-test,If the device pupil heisfor is thenintended hisinvolved becomesown asprogress. in amore themeans interestedpre-test, to aid the instruction,in teacherand 00 The3.2. assessment device has been coordinatedPost-Test.Instruct. with the Teach the Measureappropriate the improvementsequences. of the pupil. necessaryinTherefore,evaluatea testdetermining to areasthem measurethe inofthemarking relation instruction. pupilspupil's and against toneeds,reporting a standardized eachabilities, system other tonorm.orand beto the used It is not intended as needsusesHeteachersequences then theand assessmentadjustsestimatesabilities to make the theitindevice instruction moreperformingabillties tousable determine toof thefor anthe necessary the appropriate thepupil teacher. pupil's and skills. thenlevel, The "yes"evaluationTheshould teacher orbe "no" individualof may themay select pupil.be andappropriate, and flexible. use his in own others, symbols a scalefor In some cases a simple alizationaiduponincreasing tothe the performanceof teacherand instruction. decreasing in of order the the pupil.to difficulty,plan for the depending individu- This serves as an mentfortocommentranging makewithexample, notescolumnfromright, does 1about istonot wellplanned4 applicable,the,performancemight with tobe left givemore etc. arm, theusable. of needs teacherthe pupil;improve- space The 72 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES GOAL I. 1. TakesExhibits turns. Acceptable Social Behavior. COMMENTS 3. 2 Exhibits the ability to be a leader. 4 4.5. Exhibits goodthe abilitygrooming. to be a follower. GOAL II. 6. PracticesExhibits good Movement health Skills habits. In A 1. MovesVarietyother on childrenOf wheel Activities. toys or objects.without bumping 3.2. ClimbsusesBuilds toys. onwith objects sand in(climbing a sand boxstructures, and 4. off.Playsstall-bars, simple boxes,games. tables), and climbs SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS 5. bothPerforms directions. the Log-Roll on mat in I / 7.6. Performs the CrabBear Walk. 9.8. withHangsHeels.Performs hands. on barthe orstunt, horizontal Jump and ladder Slap 11.10. TravelshorizontalHangs by across hands bar. theand horizontalknees on low ladder. 13.12. PassesoverhandCatches a basketball apass. basketball. using a one hand 15.14. Dribblespass.Passes a abasketball basketball. using a bounce 74 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES 16. Shoots a basketball through the goal. COMMENTS 18.17. shootsDribblesstops, apivots, laya basketball,basketball up. and passes. whilestops, running, and 20.19. KicksThrows a andfootball. catches a . 22.21. ThrowsCenterspass toa footballthea moving football. withtarget. overhand spiral 24.23. itCatches securely a passedfootball in either football. and arm. runs carrying 26.25. partsKicksandDribbles theofa soccer theright a soccerfoot. ballfoot. ballwith withvarious the ?eft 73 SZCTTON TWO - THE DEVELOPMEWT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES 28.27. PuntsTraps a soccer ball. I I CO 30.29. BatsDrop-kicks from a battinga soccer tee. ball. --32.31. RunsCatches bases a onflyball. the diamond. (). . .- 34.33. ThrowsFields a softballground ball. with accuracy. (Softball). 35.36. BatsPitches a pitcheda softball. softball using a 37. Performs(full Speedball). swinga kick-up and followto self. through. 39.38. PerformsServesplayer. a lift up to another over(Speedball). the net. 76 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAWCIMMINDAND RECREATION SKILLS DATES 40. anotherPasses (strikes)player. a volleyball to COMMENTS 42.41. PerformsVolleys athe volleyball "bump". over the net. 44.43. PerformsServes the a netvolleyball recovery. with accuracy. (Volleyball). 46.45. Shootsteammates.Performs an aarrow pass, using set andproper spike form. with 47. Riteracket a shuttlecock in an underhand with astroke. badminton --. 49.48. Hitsstroke. a netshuttlecock shot. with an overhead (Badminton). _ 51.50. .ExecutesappropriateServes a theshuttlecock court one-step area. intodelivery the in SzCrION TWO - THE DEVELOP) Ni PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS or DATES 52. Executes the four-step delivery in COMMENTS 53. bowling.Swingsform. the golf club using proper 55.54. UsesChips aa woodgolf clubball. and hits a golf ball. , . 57.56. Serves a handball in various ways. 58. PerformsstrokesReceives it. a forwardhandball roll. and successfully '0' . 60.59. Performs a headstand.frogstand. -,. 62.61. aPerforms high balance a cartwheel.mount, beam, a simpleand a dismount.routine on SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES COMMENTS 63. movements,turns,utilizingPerforms and abalances, standingtumblingfree exercise movements,leapsmoves. routineand jumps,floor 65.64. Performshorse.Performsuneven parallela amount, front bar, avault movement and on a a dismount. onside the 66. horse.Performs a rear vault on a side . 67.68. PivotsPerformson the from parallela mount,a ready bar,a positionsimple and aroutine dismount.and 69. hitsRunsusing a totennisforehand the leftball stroke. orwith right, a racket stops 70. withPerformsquickly, a tennis aand backhand racket.strokes stroke a tossed in tennis.ball 79 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF FLAICROUND AND RECREATION SICILtS DATES r 72.71. Sprints.Servesstance a intotennis the ball appropriate with a correct court area. 73.74. Rec.ivesPerformsin a relay. and a passesstanding baton long to jump. teammate 75.76. ThrowsPerforms a baseballa running for long distance. jump. 77.78. wrestling.Performsstanding position.a breakdownwrestling maneuvertakedown infrom a 79. hold.Performs an escape from a wrestling _ 80 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES // GOAL I I. Gains Proficiency In Games, and Sports COMMENTS 1. SkillsPassestion InThat aRecreational written Will Lead test ToActivities. on His tennis Participa- which 2. players,Passesincludesfield aandwhich terminology,written leagues. includes test rules,onterminology, track scoring, and 3. whichPassesrules,scoring, includes scoring,a written players, terminology, players, test and on leagues. andbasketball rules, leagues. 4. Passes a written test on . 5. whichPassesscoring, includes a writtenplayers, terminology, test and onleagues. golf rules, which , 6. includesPassesplayers,includes a terminology,andwritten terminology, leagues. test rules,on rules, soccer scoring, scoring, which 7. Passesplayers, a writtenand leagues. test on bowling which . , players,includes and terminology, leagues. rules, scoring, 81 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ObjectiveCoal I. 1. TheProvide pupil experieaces can take turns which and will take enable care theof physicalpupil to educationdevelop and supplies exhibit and acceptable equipment. social behavior. Levels 1 Activit'm,GivenSequences an opportunity Equipment,- Teaching to Progressionsand Share - Instruct the pupilsSuggestions .in: Traffic for pattern Lesson to Implementation be used to approach Source108:Books. PhysicalMaterials Codes Sapplif_pupil can: with other Takepupils turns. Getthe and:equipment. . .How How to tomany work get may onon usetheandtime.and equipment.the offto equipmentleavethe equipment. the atequipment. one FrameworkEducation18-38.pp.Committee: 14, - Select an activity or. Waita piece his turn inetc.playground, games, at water fountain, . .WhatThe When amountto and do howwhenof space,they activitiesnecessary.they may havetalking, go finishedtoon anothertheand equipment. movingthe of equipment. Work bywith and:himself. aone small orpupils. twogroup other of andEncourage .then The change safetythe pupils tofactors anotherpiece to workinvolved. of on equipment. inan oneindividual place - Demonstrate the ability. Help to: another pupilstructivepupils. in a con- way. - Emphasize the needbasis. to. WalkFollowpractice from an safetyoneestablished area and: to another.traffic pattern. . FollowTalkAccept in established suggestionspositive,negativecriticisms rather procedures.and terms. than from others. . Wait until one beforewithinpupil hasanotheran areafinished usesor with workingit. the equipment 82 1 CareGiven-the Select of pupilan Equipment o7portunity acan: piece andof toequipment,Supplies, Take - OrganizeProvide athese place supplies wheresmallthat the equipmentinthey varioussuch are a readilyaremannertypes kept of and or easilystored. accessible workit.toreturn thewith locationit it in by the himself, where same hecondition and got - Instruct the pupilsto . in: thepupils.How thethey object are to works. use it. . HewTheRow tosafetymanyamount pick can factorsofup use space,and itequipment. putinvolved. at talking, one time. and moving down the piece of . WhenWhat andto dohow when necessarytheyofthe equipmenthaveequipment. tofinished do to the work usingwork. with it. they may get another piece

SOCIAL BEHAVIOR 83 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ---ObjectiveCoal I. 2.Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressional TheProvide pupils experiences can demonstrate which increasingwill enable self-confidence. the pupil to develop and exhibit acceptable social behavior. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 1 otherGiven-the Play pupilpupilsan withopportunity can: anda friend. to Make to beFriends, with - Encourage the pupils. to:AskIntroduce another themselves pupilplaythe to need withbeto hisanotherarises. him. friend when or to Books.108: Committee:FrameworkEducationPhysical - -Play Play with with an one increasing orof more friends. friends.number . Talk to each otherrather using than positive negative words, words. 18-38.pp. 14, 2 SuccessGiven-ties, Perform an thein opportunity amanypupil variety movement can: ofto activi-Rave skills - -Praise Help theand pupilencourage wasto learncorrect all effortswhat and he why. attempted.did that - Increase his skillactivities.to in his physical own satisfaction. - Provide activitiessuccessfully).successfully) which(something(something are a that challenge ratherthat he he feelsthan knows ahe threathe cannot can do do - AttemptExhibit newhappiness skills. anxiety.deuceand confi- instead of tension and - BeEmphasize consistent. the positive,performance, the correctrather than the incorrect. 84 - Accept suggestionscism and fromcriti- his peer. - -Encourage Teach the the safe pupils wayother toto whenworkpraise andsomething each play. is correctly 1 cism from adults. performed and to help another pupil if - HelpEncourage other andpupils. praiseperformance a good of peer. it is needed.

, . SOCIAL BEHAVIOR 85 Provide experiences which will enable the pupil to develop and exhibit acceptable social behavior. SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS reWirSequencesObjectiveCoal I. 3. The pupil can be a follower and a leader. - teaching Provessions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 1. GivenFollower, an opportunity the pupil tocan: be a - Be aware of pupilsencouragement, who are in need praise. of - Follow thedirections leader playground.teachertogiven the by (later the by a peer). - HelpEncourage pupil the pupilas in toin all followgroups). situations, directions (individually as well to develop problem solving - BeFollow willing the tosequences playin the anof activityevents or game. hisability own actions.and to accept consequences of 2 Given an opportunityassigned to be a posLtion. - Encourage pupils and provide needed Leader, the pupil can:Lead the class to the playground. leadership opportunities. 39: Dauer:Inas.2: p.42-43. Alameda Co. pp.Schools 31-35. - CetSelect the anequipment, activitybe carryorthe played. game game it to toarea, and return it. 108: Physical pp.Committee:FrameworkEducation 14, 18-38. - Choose an area to play in. 86 - Lead a group to a play area. - SeeBecome that a themember rules of areafollowed group. by the others. - HelpBeAssist sure others. withthat theall organizationget a turn. - Take responsibilityfollowingof forthe game. rules through - TakeTry allresponsibility positions self-discipline.on for a team. - Trust the ability players.leadership.of other - AbidePlay ownby decisionsposition to andof play official.strive it veil. SOCIAL BEHAVIOR 87 SECTION TWO-- THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ObjectiveGoal I. 4. TheProvide pupil experiencesis able to acceptwhich willand abideenable by the the pupil rules to of develop the activity. and exhibit acceptable social behavior. Levels 3 Sequences - Teaching Progressions - Encourage the pupilsSuggestions to make fortheir Lesson own Implementation Books.Source Materials Codes can:goodGiven- Get Sportsmanship, an along opportunity with other the to pupilpracticepupils. - Help teach conceptsdecisions- Exampleby: (assist of teacher. if necessary). 108: Physical - FrameworkEducationCommittee. - TakeHelp turns.his team by workingplaying andto the best of his - Stare at the levelprogress- ofEvaluation.Explaining, the pupilsfrom there.planning, and discussing. p. 14. - AcceptFollow leadershipdirections. ability.opportunities. - Accept the consequencesline,isown tagged,actions. isof out,his steps etc.). on or over a (Admit when he time to begin and stop the nosition aswhenle. its's activity when it's time to stop. 88 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ObjectiveGoal I. 5. ThedevelopProvide pupil proficiencya canvariety demonstrate of in activities, the good movement grooming games, skills and hegoodsports has health learned. which practices will allow as eachthey pupilrelate to to practice exercise. and to Levels 2 SequencesGiven an opportunity- Teaching Progressionsto practice Suggestions for Lessvl Implementation Source Materials odes good- Keep Grooming, handy andthe facepupilbefore clean, can: and both after activity. - Remind the pupils practicesthattheir the friends' groomingare for maximum their ownwelfare as well and as c1 - WearKeep suitableshoelaces clothing, tied,tiedzipped clothes and in-and buckled. buttoned, and belts - Encourage pupilsdaily. toenjoyment wear clean of theclothes activities. - Bathe following vigorousactivity.cluding suitable shoes for - Emphasize safety factors:. WearKeep rubber-soledshoelaces tiedoxfords, shoes, and clothedpreferableto prevent fastened. slipping. 3 Givencan:good anHealth cpportunity Habits, tothe practice pupil - HelpEncourage pupil pupilto understand toto eat get balanced adequatethe relationships meals sleep and for his needs. Books.65:36: L.A. City: pp. 417-438. - Keep sands and objectsnose,from and away and mouth. out of eyes, ears, betweenand good rest, health. diet, physical activity, pp. 1-160. . SOCIAL BEHAVIOR 89 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL I - OBJECTIVE 5 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Sit,Use thestand, restrooms and move activity.andfountains with drinking good before and/or after - Instruct the child to:. PlayUse"Sit, a cleansingstand, and tissue activities.walk to outside as much as possible. tall" in daily keep his Record.177: IlairAna-Relaxation - Exhibit enough energyenduranceposture. and to allow him to . .Avoid Breathe throwing throughwhichnose mayclean. hurt others. and nose when he coughs objects, sand,his nose. etc., - Become aware of properparticipatetheand need lighting ventilation, for in duringactivities. temperature, activity. . Cover mouth or sneezes. - RecognizeDifferentiate the causebetweenandrelationship concernand tattling effect for between others. what a - Accept correctionalpersonas (glasses, aidsa resultdoes and braces,of whatthe action.happenshearing aids, - Release tension vigorousbyrelaxationetc.) conscious on activity. himself and/or and through on others. 90 Goai II. Provideto develop a variety proficiency of activities, in the movement: games, andskills sports he haswhich learned. will allow each pupil to practice and SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS LevelsObjective 1. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can increase his skills in movement and learn the skills of simple activities and games. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 1 Given an opportunity to Ride t. Pull Wagons, Push - Instruct the pupilon andin theoff safeof the way equipment. to get 108:Books. Physical Wheelbarrows,wheelTricycles- Utilize toys, theand toyspupilto use and can: other move: - Use straps to hold feetselves.for thoseand body pupils stable unable to support them- FrameworkEducationCommittee. . WithUsingFor different purposes. different speeds.different directions. - Provide enough equipmentcan be so maximum that there participation. Equipment. pp.18-38. 17, - EncourageDraw a pattern creative fortoys. thinkingthe pathway and ofproblem wheel Wheelbarrows.Wagons.Tricycles.ProneIrish Boards. Mails. solving. "What"How by manyshapes asking directions can questions you makecan such Whentricycle?"youon theas: rideyou floor .ullthe the wagon?" . "Which one would things?""Canbe better you use theto a haul samewagon purpose?" and a tricycle for . "What piece of equipment wouldetc.?"to carry you usemessages (haul materials), WHEELSOCIAL TOYS BEHAVIOR Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 1 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 2 GivenpupilSaid an Boxcan: opportunity and Sand Box to Toys,use the the - intoInstructthe pupil'sbox pupilin eyes.order to keepto keep the itsand from down blowing in Books. 30: pp.Cratty: 18-25. U - Experiment. with sand and can: Pile up the sand. - Keep sand damp by frequent moistening. 108: 71: EducationPhysicalJaynes. . MakeDig a thehole sand in thelevel. sand. - EstablishRake and strain an "environment" it at regular by intervals.supplying pp.Committee:Framework 18-22. - Makeobjects. specific in the items sand areas, such asand a: certain.for example: types of toys on certain days -- Equipment. . . "Street"."Lake"."Castle". . AirportHarborConstruction area. area- area. .Airplanes.Boats. - playCreate. the specific type of areaspeople and and role"Tunnel". Encouragethinking. problem by asking solving and andsolving creativeFarm. such Lighthouses.Helicopters.GeometricCourse Sieves. Shapes. activities. found in that area.Walkin thein asand specific to reproduce pathway questions. as: "What"How manyshape directions is a lake?" does a street go?" Molds.PlasticPans. Bottles. variouscircle, shapes triangle, such square.as a . hold?""How manycan Icups make of a sandbridge does over this the bowl lake?" Ships.Shovels.Sand Box. heShow is. tothe walk. pupil a reproduction of"How ("soft",the can shape I "smooth",make the sand"rough")? "hard", Records.200:Steam Shovels. WatchOutdoors. Me . MakegeometricUse theseboth symmetricalfromshapes. cardboard, and asymmetricalwool. 92 01-441t06tel 44,1 yy -16 k".:4, -.5-It- 21, ' soi/ .**

ry 1

Jr,

`0.

I

s , - I ' -(4

109 110 OMB IOW NORM MOM MD Sem L--- 3 MovemsntGiven an onopportunity Objects--(stairs, to Explore - varyingProvide heights. sturdy, non-hazard objects of Books. 62: Halsey: L packing-door tables, cases, etc.)wooden the boxes, pupil out- can:Climb up on top of the object - areaofEmphasize the to objects. protect safety pupil in getting as he jumpson and down off Provide mat6 or turf 110: 90: L.A.p.pp, 47. 19City: 25. - Climband climb up anddown. jump down. - andPermitfrom one objects. oneor twopupil others on the waiting. object at one time MatsEquipment. or turf area. pp. 4-5. -- MoveJumpin aacrossoff different of the objectdirection. withand face WoodenBoxes.OutdoorLarge PackingWooden Tables. Boxes. - Jumpoffthe inchest off the the facingsame object position. down and and touch get - Jumpheelslanding. off together and clap before hands landing.before 3 StructuresandGiven to anmove opportunity such and asclimb the to onclimbing exploreClimbing - Encourage. safety practices: structureKeep one handat all and times. one foot on the Books.110: pp.L.A. 53-62. City: L cube,the pupilthe climbing can: tree, etc., . ClimbandEnter leave onthe andbystructure another.off the areastructure by one (never path - Climb allon andthe climbway around off. . Standallowstructure). apupil safe todistance jump off from of the structure - Climbwithoutthe otherover touching theside. top the and grcund. down . Allowatwhile any only waitingone a time.few turns. pupils on the structure SAND BOX ACTIVITIES t GLIDING 95 SECTION TWO - GOAL XI - OBJECTIVE 1 JLevels 3 -Sequences - Teaching ProgressionsClimb to the top and slide Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationEncourage pupil to think of new - Source Materials :odes - down.downClimb the up pole. the pole and slide activities and new ways to climb. - Climband out aroundthrough the other the the apparatusside.apparatus - heClimbalternating reaches up onthe thelow other outsideand side. high and until - downClimb on upthe on outside.inside. the inside and 4 theparticipateGiven pupil the can:opportunity in Simple Games,to - Help. pupil learn to: Followselecting the rulesgames ofwith the very games simple by rules Books. 30:, Cratty: pp. 11, 13, - Yellow"HotPlay Potato",CircleDuck", Games"Itiskit, "White such Duck, as: . underKeepand procedures. hiscontrol. hands, feet, body, and voice 108: EducationFrameworkPhysical14, 16. andBouncing","TunnelItasket", "Cross Ball", Over"Circle"Cut "Keep Ball".the Sock Cake",the Ball",Ball - TeachKick".Travels", additional "Ball gamesBounce", such andas: "Circle "Circle 110: pp.L.A.80,Committee: 71, 14, City:82-84, 75,17. 92. 96 . Eq,iipment. . ArrangeRollformation. a himselfball to intoa target. circle Instruct.to: pupils in making a circleHold hands and follow the leader Beanbags.Balls. Bouncerhythm. the ball in even . hands,Standaround togethertheste7 circle. back in slowly, a cluster, and stophold . hand.StrikeField thea batted bill withball. the moving when the circle is formed. . ThrowTagRollBounce a andbaseand and catch stopwith catch theathe ball. the ball.ball. ball. additionalIncreasesuch as the"Hot balls. difficulty Potato" by of adding the games 1 or 2 . withDropchaseRun accuracy.anaround someoneobject the torunning circle a target inand Provideto develop all pupilsskill in:with the opportunityonStarting signal. and stopping their movements . runningdirectionRunthe samearound arounddirection. while the the circlesomeone circle in is one Encourage the pupils to avoid bumpingKeepingBeginning score. and ending a game. ';11 the opposite direction. aroundwhile. runninga circle. in opposite directions Teach them to: . ShakeStopKeep and tohands thebow. whenright. they meet. CLIMBING SIMPLE GAMES 97 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 1 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 5 - "FollowPlayCarpet," Line The Games"Duck Leader," suchOn The as Rock," "Magic - Walking,"There."Teach additional games such as "Rail "Line Jumping," and "Here to Books. 40:30: DeSantis:pp.Cratty: 6-8. "StraightPassing. Race,"Line," andand can:"Beanbag - pupilsSelect cana specific line up. line upon which the 110: pp.L.A.City: 19, 21. . orArrangeFollow file formation.himselfthe leader into using a line - Encourage pupils to: . pp.170. 98, 131, . Handvarious an typesobject of to movements. a specific . LookMove inslowly the directionwhen they theyare liningare moving. up. Equipment. . person.Throw and hit a target. . Stop moving before they touch. Sococ:Beanbags. Pins. . 6 - ToPlay"Foursuch Play?" games as Corner "Mother on aTag," Tag May Game andWe Go"UncleCourt Out "Frogs and Flies," games.gamesTeach beforethe pupils going the outside words toused play in the 110:Books. pp.108-110.L.A.City: 99, Sam,". and can: Perform various types of - anotherEncourage lightly pupils rather to tag than by touchingby grabbing . Chaserequested.locomotor and tag skills another when pupil. or pushing. . Avoid being tagged. asheadBalance possible. while an objectmoving onas hisfast 98 6 - Play games on a Skillsuch Gameas "Around Court The Line," - Teach the games withoutelement the when competitive using with children at the Books.110: L.A. City: L And"Bounce .Run," BounceRun andCatchand and turncan: Race,"catch to the aand turnball. left "Bat to andthe right. beginning developmental levels; pp.143-144.137-138, 135, U 6 - Play games on the Primary. Roll a ball with accuracy. - Use a 9" or 13" ball for beginners. Ball,"Diamond"Beginning"One Base,""One such Base," Fist as"Line-Up "Throw Ball," and Kick"TeamBall," "Boot Ball," - Increase the difficultyplayers.Use a 6"of ballthe gamefor thefor more advanced Books.110: 30: pp.pp.L.A.CrAtty: 33-35. 146-City: VUL Circle,". FieldToss theanda tossed ballcan: forball.ordistance accuracy overhand using and toss. an underhand, 2ndthe andfielders 3rd base. by having them touch both 154. . .FieldJump RunKick orto athe kickedhopone ball forbase ball.foran only.and intervalaccuracy distance. of 6 - Play games on a Hopscotch time. - Use small beanbags or other objects for Books. L Hopscotch,"Squares,"Diagram. CatchBounce such a "Hopscotch," a bounced and ballas can""Hit to ball. athe partner."Square Middle laggers. 110: 160,pp.L.A.City: 158,163. V SIMPLE GAMES 99 Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL I/ - C3JECTIVE 1 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes . MaintainHop in a balancespace without pinglabile on step-bop-the lines. Balls.Equipment.Beanbags - . Jump into a spaceping,steppingTi-Jsa lagger.without turning, a Jagger on the and accurately. lines. picking up otherlaggers.3" x objects3", or for - Play games on a AlongLaddersuch And asDiagram "BeanbagJump Around," Hop," "Hop- - Provide variations for. Shortening beginners theby: game and having the Books.110: L.A. City: L "Ishigetigoko,". Toss a beanbag and with steppingHopcan: inaccuracy_ the on spacesthe lines. without . Hopping on one foot,beanbagspace.pupil anduse or kicking onlyobject a theportionwith the of other the availablefoot. Equipment. pp.169.164, 162, 168- V . JumpKick and makelandcontrol ain halfstrideobject. a forwardsmall turn- position. SmallBeanbags. Objects. 100 6 - Play games on a FourCourtand Square. ControlBounce"Twosuch Squares,"as and a"Bounce rolling catch and Scotch," aball. ball.can: - Emphasize that onlyball onewhen pupil it is chases knocked a out of the area. Books.110: pp.L.A.165, 156,City: 167. VUL . .RunReturn Bounce-serveControl a balla bouncing aftera ball. itball. has without stepping on lines. 3"BeanbagsBalls.Equipment. x 3". - 6 Given an opportunity to explore bounced once by hitting it up. Books.Small Objects. movementoncal, Mats, and in theinverted a horizontal,pupil bodycan: position verti- 39:21: PP.Dauer:p.L.A. :92.14. City: - Lie prone on matoutstretched with"Logto the armsRoll." left overheadand then andright. roll - EmphasizeEncourage safetypupil toatperforming stay.all Move times.on inmats theone while activity.direction on the mats. 120: pp.23.11,Stein: 5, 13, 7, 18, - SitLie on mat withon back, knee thestanding raisebent arms. closeto positiona without using "Rising Sun." - Stress how to start,how .to howRemove stop to thecontinue,all activity.objects, jewelry,and from pockets,eye glasses, etc. Mats.Equipment. toforth.rightleft chest. handhand. and right toes with "Egg Sit." Grasp left toes withRock back and - Use spotters. . Watch and ending of activity. for a correct beginning, middle, - Use unilateral, bilateral,lateral andmovements. cross- SIMPLE GAMES STUNTS 101 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - 'OBJECTIVE 1 Levels Sequences- Lie on -stomach, Teaching arms Progressionsoverhead, extended arch the back by Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes feetfloor)legsthenlifting on slightlyarch floor)and arms thelower slightlyand(keepback quietlylower byarms (keep liftingagain; withon - Squat and place handsoutsidecontrol.forward; on matsof jumpknees; feet move up handsto hands "Rainbow Arch." keeping"Rabbit both Jump." feet together. . - Lean forward and placearmTravelfloor, and hands keeping forwardleft on leg legsby at moving straight.the same left - Hold weight on both"Searright time.hands Walk."leg and at the same time. Then move right arm and upward,"Crabandstraight,both sideways, feet, Walk."hips walk withup in andbackward, thethis back body position. forward,facing 102 I - Jump-and into lift the feet air, highand bend slapbehind knees both body, heels with hands. - Kneel an mat, weightstraight;of"Jump feeton andballs and Slapswing knees, Reels". arm keep back back and position.withbodythenthe toes; forcefullyandsame risepull time, tofee: forward; pusha standingunder from atthe mat "Up Spring". - Lie face down on mat;backfeetfeet, crossand-graspagainst bend knees, thighs; the andleft reach bring foot backwithtorockright rollandthe from foot forthrightover side with oninhand to back;theorder sideand left rock tothein hand;order handserect.tionrock fromoverforward feetthe to feet;and a squatstand remove posi- "Tangle". STUNTS 103 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 1 Levels 7 SequencesGiven an opportunity- Teaching Progressionsto explore Suggestions- Use bars forof variousLesson Implementationheights. Books.Source Materials Codes U andLow to Horizontal practice movementsBar, the pupilon the can: - Emphasize safety. . Keep space betweenwork theon bar.pupils as they 110: 39: L.A.277-278.pp.Dauer: 159,City: L - RangHang with both handsarms the foldedon bar.bar. over . KeepAllow the only a thetime. length of the bar). (The number of pupilspupil's depends head fromon bumping the few pupils on the bar at one Equipment.Low Horizontal Bar. pp. 60-62. - -Rang Hang, and putput chinboth overfi-etbar.and raisethe over bar, legs.the . Instruct the pupilsdistancebygroundtheir being to whenstandturns. surefrom hanging athe safe bar or iswhile circling high waiting enough. the bar - -Hang Hang by by two knees hands and and let (doubletwo go knees.hands. knee hang). . Instruct the pupilwhen"Followthe toperforming directionturn your his thumb." "circling" bodythat inhis thumbactivities. is pointing - PerformHang by atwo "Single hands (singleKneeand oneMount". kneeknee. hang). - Use spotters. . Aid the pupil byleg(especially or hand as the he "doubleis hanging, knee turning,circle"). etc. keeping a hand on his - Pull knees to chest,betweenback.(forward put headarms and - back)."Skin the Cat" Pull knees through - Watch for balance sidesand the of equalthe body. use of both 104 - Ask questions concerning the pupil's body "Is"Areposition.whenand your itsyourthe partshead pupilfeet pointing andaboveis inits orz positionup verticalbelow or down?" the inor bar?" spaceinverted "Whatchanged,"Why?"thingsposition is arounddifferent notof yourthe you?" environment).bodyor upside or the down, people the and (The position of your body has - Provide activitieswhichchallenge for. Allowwill the aidpupiltherather hispupil to thanconfidence perform unassistedto threatenperform and variousonlyhim. will when stunts he can support his - Instruct the pupilthumboverhand, to use in theopposition underhand, correctown to grip orweight the mixed -- fingers. without and keep assistance. the 8 andGiven practice an opportunity movements to on explore a - Use safety precautions.. remit one pupil on the ladder at one time. 39:Books. Dauer: Horizontal- Climb up Ladder, steps ofthe inonto ladderpupil a straightthe can:holding supporting leg position poles, fromhang . EstablishInstruct thattravela standing the hangingin fromhorizontal one place ladder directiononly, a laddersafewhilenot only.fordistance waitingis climbing for turns. upon. 110: L.A. City: p.pp. 57. 158-159. droppingthe second to rung,the ground. and dismount by - Instruct pupil to supportingendget ofon theladder ladder.pole by and facing climb one steps of ladder. Place one hand on each LOW HORIZONTAL BAR 1 HORIZONTAL LADDER 105 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 1 Levels Sequences- Climb up- Teachingsteps ofbands Progressionsladder, on theplace outside of one of - Teach pupil to getSuggestionsdown off in ofthe ladder forreverse Lessonby climbingway Implementation he got up or by HorizontalEquipment.Source Materia's Ladder. Codes L handsslidingtootherthe the topalong end otherhandsrails, oftop endladder along rails,travel of topladderby travelto slidingrail, the by - Encourage pupil,atdropping whenfor once, a dropping,tolanding landto the lightly place,ground. look onlet downballs go with of feet,both handsand U - Grasp the secondhand rungtheclimb and other,with down. the one withthird palms rung facingwith - Instruct pupil todirectionbend swing knees. legs of theand travel.body in the r bodyeachtoladder.the side. facingotherside of andto the thebody ladder. side facing of theto Swing bodyDrop from to sidethe ground. Swing - Encourage pupil waysto create. ofHang moving. ownand patternsliftpeddlebring knees. legslegs and uplike toward a bicycle. body in an - Grasp both side andhands,railstravel then withpalms forwardthe both other.facing sliding in, andone hard . Hang and move legsposition.scissors."L" inbackor and"Half and out forthLever in a likePosition".straddle - Grasp first rungTravel withtherunggrip other overhandandwithto the hang.handone end handto of the andthe same ladder.bring rung. Grasp the second 106 - Grasp, using every other rung, to - Grasp first and secondhang,palmsthe rungs,endtravelof handsof thesideways, facing ladder. eaChswinging other, - Grasp the first runghand.handbody with onefrom onerung side ahead to side, of following leading hands,grip,otherhand,grasping andhandtheone hang.secondrungsbandusing on withtherung one overhand alternate withrung, the Travel forward, - Grasp side rail withswingReleaseand twothe body hands.othergrasp and on ofgrasp theone next.oppositeband and AlternatesidetheswingRelease railside and graspwithhands.of twist rails oneof body firsthand.and totongs. hand, grasp StallGiven Bars,an opportunity the pupil tocan: use - Encourage pupil ringto touch bell theattached ceiling to orthe ceiling. 103:Books. }tosston: - -Climb Bang upwith to twothe hands,top climbrung one anddown. hand. . Adapt the challengesmayTheto respondvisuallya tobell andto handicapped athe flag, auditorily etc. nay respond handicapped the pupil. StallEquipment. Bars. pp. 275-277. HORIZONTALSTALL BARS :ADDER 107 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION 740 - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 1 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Stand with feet togetherbodythatthe straight stall isand 6" bar;above on graspbottom the waistthe rung rung withof - Vary the activity andby standingclosepushing to andonthe the pullingbar. floor the body away from - Stand on bar and holdawayarmsboth onfromtohands, withmove the bend bodybar. andclose extend to and - Encourage pupil useto thinkbars. of new ways to - Stand erect with feetarmschinboth togetherdistanceonhands to bar.underhand, from the andbar; pull extendedBendgraspstraightthe forward waistthe between runguntil with keeping that theboththe ishead armsthehands. 6" knees isandabove untiloriginalpossible.the trunk.hipsthe position armsare backare by raisingas pulling far as Return to the 108 - Stand with left sidedistance an arm's away from the bar, and withPushgrasptouchlean left away rung toward lefthand. from at shoulder stall shoulderthe barbar, to andheight bar.and Bend left arm, - Hang facing the barsbodyReversereturn and from swing sides.to side the tostarting side. position. - Hang with back to barstraightthenlegs and in lift alegs. p'ketucked position position; with and - Hake this more difficult. HangingGrasping by: with with back oneother. tohand the higher bar. than the 1. 1 1 . STALL EARS 109 sEcTimnio - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ObjectiveGoal II. 2. ThedevelopProvide pupil proficiency acan variety increase in'.theof activities,his skillsmovement ingames, skillsmovement and he sportshasand learned.learn which the will skills allow of eachincreasingly pupil to complexpractice activities. and to . Levels 10 GivenSequences on opportunity - Teaching to Progressions play more - Use the problem solvingSuggestions approach for forLesson skill Implementation I Books.Source Materials odes . -Complex Increase Games, his accuracythe pupiltiming. and can: - Encourage the pupilsdevelopmentthemselves.conclusions to draw theirand and in ownsolve planning their strategy. problems 108: Committee:FrameworkEducationPhysical - Increase his efficiencymovementetc.).pivoting, inskills kicking, (dodging, passing, - Ask questions such"Who as, can"How show can uswe?" how...?" etc. 111: pp.L.A.136,27-38. 134,14,City: 248, 17, - UnderstandPlan plays reasonsand strategy forteammates. positions with - Allow each pupileach to. .Discuss have position.Discuss a turnreasons purposes playing positions.for and playing functions each ofposition. the 252. - Be a contributingand team.member can play of adifferent positions. - Teach games such Zoneas:Prisoner's Basketball, Ball, Section and Net Basketball, Ball. 110 10 pateGiven in an games opportunity related toto partici-Basket- - movingEncourage when pupilhe has to posssession keep his feet of thefrom Books. 28: Cratty: ball,-(See the p. pupil 121 forcan: Basketball). - ball.Use askill color tests identification and activities band tofor aid team. 39: pp.Dauer: 299-310.27-36. andExperiment. with a basketball Bounce a ball. - Adaptneedevaluation theof theheight andpupil. skillof the development. basket to the 111:106: L.A.City:pp.Nagel: 157-190. - Play. a game such as Keep AwayThrowCatch a ball. . Useplayground hoops and balls, boxes etc.,for baskets if needed. and 112: pp.Pomeroy:146. 322-323.125-130. and:. Catch a basketball. 117: pp.Schurr: 401-422. . GuardPivotPass the awith playerbasketball. the whobasketball. has Equipment. - . possessionIntercept of thea ball. baIl. - Baskets.Basketball. and:Play. a game such as Headman Shoot the hall to obtain a activities.Provide. supplementary and/or Attachmodified a string (heavy fish line) to a . . PassDribblegoal. the thebasketball. basketball. orattachedbeanbag wheelchair orto balla tohandicapped andaid tiein retrievingto pupil's a ring crutchtothe be - end:Play. a game such as Twenty-OneCatch the basketball. . incorporatingTeachobject. various thetypes "string of activities ball." . Catchgoal.Shoot the ball asto itobtain a - basketUseto athe plastic(can same be place trashmodified eachcontainer totime return foras awheel-the ball . shooting.Maintainrebounds balance of the while backboard. chair adaptation). COMPLEX GAMES BASKETBALL TYPE GAMES 111 3 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 2 Levels Sequences- - Teaching ProgressionsPlay a game such as Zone - SuggestionsProvide instruction for Lesson in: Implementation Source Materials Codes Basketball. and: Shoot for a goal from the . Two-handChest pass. underhand pass. . MakePassfield a thefree of ball. throw.play. . One-handOverheadBounce pass. pass.overhand. . GuardCatch thean opponent.ball. . -Catching- a basketball. AboveBelow the waist. - BasketballPlay. a game and: such as Section . . Two-hand- chest shot. Over the shoulder. . ofShoot play. a goal from the field . One-handTwo-hand setunderhand shot. shot. . MakeCatchPass a the freethe basketball. basketball.throw. . Guarding.Pivoting.Dribbling. . GuardDribble an theopponent. basketball. . 10 pateGiventhe in an pupilgames opportunity can:related toto partici-Football, - Encouragecan...?"a football pupils by using to become words acquaintedsuch as "Who with "Can you...?" "Show us...?" Books. 10: pp.L.A. 59-82.City: -(See p.125 for Football). Experimentand can: with the football - TeachProvide both one boys football and girls for howevery to twohandle pupils. a 106: 39: Nagel:pp.Dauer:318. 315, . HoldThrow it. (pass) it. - Usefootball. many types of activities and drills to 111: L.A.pp. 199-252.City: . CarryKickCatch it.it. teach and to reinforce skill development. 117: Schurr:pp.318. 303-304, pp. 422-432. 112 - Play a game such as Kick-over - Instruct the pupil in how to throw a and .can: CatchPass aa football.football. forward. pass. receiverUse words when such throwing." as, "Move toward the "Throw ball - Play. a game such as Base Punt a football. - directionahead of ofthe the receiver." target." "Step in the Football. and can: PuntPass a afootball. football. ofInstruct. catching pupil a football. in the skill performancesUse words for stationary catching such . kick.HoldPlace a footballkick a football. for a place as:"Anticipate(right, low, the or throw high)." to the left, "Reach toward the thrower." "Keep your . CatchRun with a football.a football. cuppedcaught,eye on thearound hold ball." thethe ballend, withand ballfingers held "After the ball is - andPlay. can: a game such as Pass Ball . Usein wordscrook forof armcatching tight overagainst the the body. . CarryBlock.Run anda football. dodge. ballshoulderupward down to atto catch passercarrying the and/or ball."position." ball. "Bring the "Reach "Keep . . ExchangePass the the football football. laterally. - running." aInstruct .punted ball.pupils in the skill Useof catchingwords such as: "Extend arms to Books.106: pp.Nagel: 208-211, caught,weightrunning."centerform a evenly." placebasket."of body." ball under arm and start "Pull"Distribute ball"After toward body the ball is 213-215. FOOTBALL TYPE GAMES SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 2 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - InstructSuggestions pupil for in Lesson how to Implementation puntUse a ball. words such as "Release ball with Source Materials Codesi ward."bothstraight."ofinstep." thehands target." as kicking leg comes for- "Kick the football using"Point the toes in the direction "Swing kicking leg - placeInstruct. kicking. the pupil in the techniquesUse sentences of such as "Place ball on - Instruct the pupil in the techniquekickingground," ofspot." and "Stand 11/2 steps back of holding. the Dail for s place kick.betweenUseside words of left thesuch kneekicker," as and"Kneel right on heel,"the right "Balance weight - "Hold"Slant on ball to theslightly ball withtoward band." kicker," - hand.RotateInstruct positions kicker tofrequently. kick ball from under

. . - pupilGivenin gsmes can:an opportunity related to toSoccer, participate the - pupils).activeProvide (at enough least balls one ballso that for allevery may two be Books. '8: pp.Cratty: 37-39. (See p.126 for Soccer). whoTeach .can wheelchairmove their soccerown chairs. to those pupils 106: 75: Nagel:pp.AARPZR: 77-79. andExperiment .can: with a Soccer BallKick it. . ConstructUseas theto blockwheelchair boundaries the ball. to with propel benches as well L.A.pp. 220-237.City: - . PassStop it. ball.Useremain (turneda 13" in playground onthe side) area. soball that or thea soccer ball-will Equipment. pp. 100-103. andray .can:a game such as Zone Soccer - Utilize additional games: "Push It,""Balloon Soccer Ball. . . PassBlockKick the the ball. soccerball. ball. - Provide"OpponentSoccer," skill Push," instruction and "Goal in Soccer." the "Line Soccer," - Play. a game such as Section Punt the ball. soccer. kick. towardUse phrases target," such as "Point your toes "Use the instep of the Soccer. and can: Kick the soccer ball. - thefoot," receiver and kick to that spot." "Pick out a spot in front of . DribbleTrapBlock the the theball. ball. ball. trapProvide. with skill sole instructionof the foot. forUse the phrases soccer such as "Stand in front of . PuntPass the ball. movingtopfrom of ball," ball,"ball to stop it," "Be prepared to kick,"Place bail of foot near "Remove foot - andPlay .can: a game such as Zone Soccer balance."dribble or pass," "Use arum for . BlockKick thethe soccerball.ball. - Providetrap. with skill the instruction inside of thefor foot.the soccer . PassDribbleTrap the theball. ball. ofUselean ball." phrases body towardsuch as, the "Move ball." in direction "Spread arms for balance and "Let ball . . HeadPunt the ball. hit the inside of the foot." FOOTBALL TYPE GAMES SOCCER TYPE GADS 115 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 2 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - SuggestionsProvide skill for instructionLesson Implementation in soccer block Source Materials Codes V .(trap) with body. .Use phrasescontactsextend armssuch trunk, foras "Asbalance."body ball gives approaches, to reduce "When ball - Provide. skill instruction in arms.Havethethe soccer girlsmomentum protect of the cheat ball." by folding dribble.. eitherUsefoot." phrases the insidesuch as: or the outside of the "Move ball along the ground by "Contact ball by . withEncouragetouching only one ballpupil foot." with to practicealternating changing feel or . againstEncouragedirections a wallthewhile pupilor dribbling. a fenceto practice and allow dribbling the - Provide. skill instruction in ballsoccer to heading.rebound. meetball."Use"As"Bend phrases theball legs ball." comes suchas thedown,as: ball body approaches." moves up to "Be at spot ball will hit." "Move head in direc- "Watch flight of . aball"Straightenmuscles tionlow contact ball."of taut the arms, isastarget." made."head legs contacts and body ball." when "Keep neck "Never head 116 times.Teach. and maintain safety rulesKeep at one all foot on ground when kicking a . ball.collisions.Be aware of other players to avoid - Aidtocalling . theassist visually out in wordslocating handicapped and/or the usingball. pupilUtilize a bellby a ballgrass surface, if possible. pateGiven in an games opportunity related toto partici-Softball, - theEncourage softball the diamond pupil toby becomewalking familiar around thewith Books. 39: Dauer: V -the(See pupil p.127 can: for Softball). Experiment with a softball and - TeachModifyhome,baselines, etc.the the most activity running severely whento bases,handicapped necessary. and back pupils 75: AAHPER:pp.p.120-121. 230106, bat .and can: HoldThrow the the softball. ball. - andto assumecoach. the roles of umpire, scorekeeper, 111: pp.L.A. 230-231, City: - . . HoldCatch and the swing ball. the bat. - EncouragebatsUtilize to makeplastic pupils the equipmentgamewith easier.crutches for ballsto bat and with Equipment. 236. andPlay. can: a game such as Tee Ball - "soft"the crutch. ball). (To protect the crutch use a BattingBats. Tee. . ThrowRunCatch thea aball ball.bases accurately. on a softball TeachrunAllow for pupils them orin towheelchairs push them toto pitchletthe someonebases. . . Batdiamond.Field a softball a ground from ball. a - Informchair.swinging pupils their using arm alongcrutches the thatside pitchingof their - BatPlay .and: a game such as Hit the Learnbatting rules tee. of softball. - mayInstructposition be easier onpupils thefor groundwhothem have in or a use flier.sitting of their feet . . CatchFungo ahit ball. a softball. butscorekeepers,runners little for use other ofor theirsubstitute players, arms, umpires, kickingto become aor ball SOCCER TYPE GAMES EollRoll the ball and hit the for batting. SOFTBALL TYPE GAMES 117 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 2 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - TeachSuggestions blind pupilsfor Lesson to listen Implementation for the ball Source Materials Codes - Play a game such as Long Ball - Instructaluminumrolling onpupilsfoil a gravelso to he call canarea tohit or blind iton ora teammate piececatch ofit. Books. V and. can: Throw a softball. - to aid them in running the base. 111: pp.L.A. 217-218.City: . . BatPitchCatch a pitched a ball. ball. whileifInstruct a ittotally is the rolling. blind fielderpupil that catches he is tie "out" ball 112: pp.Pomeroy: 321-322. . RunField the a ball.bases. - Utilizeaid the a blindplayground pupil ballin locating with a bellthe ball.to Audi-ballwithEquipment.inside). a bell (ball - OrganizeProvideother to thea practiceball class for in catchingevery squads two andfacing pupils throwing. each and SoftBattingBats. balls. tee. - Encourageteachingto each athem strike other.accuracy to practicezone intarget pitching throwing (handball by underhand arrang- wall). - Provide. instruction in: Overhand throwing. . Batting.UnderhandCatching pitching.(above and below the waist), - Utilizeas well a asbatting practice tee infor batting. game situationsfly balls and ground balls. 118 1Q Givenpate anin opportunitygames related to topartici- - theEncourage volleyball. pupil to become acquainted with Books. 28: Cratty: Volleyball,(See p. 134the forpupil Volleyball). can: Experiement with the volley- - Modifythe. thesize size of theand court,weight andof theUsethecan...?" ball,wordsheight such of as "Who can...?" etc. "How 39: pp.Dauer: 139-140,48-49.pp. 21-26, ball. and can: Hold it. the.. net to meet the needs of Usethe lightpupil. weight balls for pupils who 75: AAEPER:351, 352. . CatchBounceThrow it. it. - Utilize the following games: sarylack tp the hit arm the and heavier wrist ball.strength neces- 10S: Nagel:82-84.pp. 54-55, - andPlay. can: a game such as NewcombHit it. - ofAdaptball.""Balloon the thepupil. activitiesVolleyball," to meet the needs "Juggle Volley- 111: pp.L.A.City:278-283. 275-277,252-253, . ThrowCatchthe net.a avolleyball volleyball. over . orderball)Suspend totram akeep ballan theoverhead from ball a stringavailableattachment (swing to in 259. . . court.RotatePlay in ina volleyballa volleyball court. Utili'e"Swinga pupil theBall in following aWatch," wheelchair. games: "Swing Ball Volleyball.Equipment. - Play. a game such as One-BounceScore a game. CircleBallTouch," Catch Pass,' and andThrow," "Swing Ball Hit." "Swing Ball Dodge," "Swing Ball "Swing Volleyball. and can: Volley the ball over the - ballEmphasize rather control than distance. and placement of the . LearnServenet. theand ball.follow the rules playersEncourage closerin teamthe tolastplay the rowby net. instructingto throw to the . Playofcourt. the a game.position on the positions.insist that playert play their own VOLLEYBALLSOFTBALL TYPE TYPE GAMES GAMES SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 2 Levels Sequences- - Teaching ProgressionsPlay a game such as Net Ball - UseSuggestions words such for as Lesson "Foot Implementationopposite the hitting Source Materials Codes V .(Over the Net) and can: theServe underhand the volleyball snd/or using underhandhand'half-fist' is pointed serve." totoward, contact the the target." ball for"Use the a "Use the heel of your . pass.chestVolleyoverhand pass the serve. and/orball using underhand the - handTeach pass.when both serving the chest underhand." pass and the under- . court.Rotate positions on the . Useofandonupward wordsball kneesbody to to such followtoa completeteammate."get as: throughunder the the volley."in ball."direction "Hit the ball "Bend down "Arms

120 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ObjectiveGoal II. 3. skillsThedevelopProvide pupil of proficiencya thesecanvariety participate sports. of in activities, the in movement a variety games, skills of and sports he sports has activities learned. which will and allow develop each proficiency pupil to practice in the specificand to Levels 11 SequencesGiven an opportunity- Teaching Progressionsto learn and SuggestionsInstruct the for pupil Lesson to holdImplementation the ball with SourceBooks. Materials V es practicethe(See pupil p.111the can: skills for games of Basketball, related to Instruct.the fingers the pupiland thumb,to: neverThrow the palm.the ball into the air and catch 108: 10: Physical ;;A- .4!itey3: Aasketball-tator Basketball). and 13.167 for Spec- Teach. the pupil to use a pass whichBounceit. is the ball and catch it. EducationCommittee:Framework Handle. . a basketball and can:HoldThrow it. (pass) it. oftoappropriate thebe usedpasser isto and dependentthe intended situation. upon receiver. the position Th6 type 29-38.pp. 17, . BounceCatch it.it. aboutInstruct. passing. the pupil in these general rules - Pass. a basketball. . waistThe passer high. should hit the receiver about . BounceOne-handTwo-hand pass overhandchest - two-hand pass. pass. - elseshouldIf a theplayer reduce momentum is the moving ofspeed the toward oftwo the objectsyou, pass you or . one-hand.Underhand pass - two-hand - . willaheadIf amake player of thehim is'uoving, passand letvery him bardyou catch shouldto handle.up passto . HookTwo-hand pass. overhead pass. wasretrievethe a ballsecond arRther ballbefore. thatthan wasturn passed around where to he - Catch a basketball. . beforeoff-balance,If you passing receive tryto a someonetopass regain that else. yourforces balance you VOLLEYBALL TYPE GAMES BASKETBALL 121 ILevels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION IWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materiels Codes - Dribble. a basocetball: While standing. - Instruct. a pupil to use a dribble.When a pass is impossible. Basketball.Equipment. V . . WhileUsing walking.running. s low dribble. . WhenToarea. get a passout ofis troublereceived in close a congested enough to . . AndUsing change a high hands. dribble. the basket to dribble in for a lay up. . direction.And change directi^ns.pace and - Inform. the pupil that when dribbling:ThePush fingers the ball and gentlyhand should but firmly. give with . Thethe elbow ball isas flexed.it comes up from the floor. . The upperforearmfingers arm movesshould is steady. up be emd in down-contact with . Keeppushingthe theball headdown as longup.action. as possible in the - Shoot. s basket with a: TwoRight band or leftauL shot.layup. - rimbackboardTeach in theall forpupilother layups toshots. bank and theaim ballfor overoff thethe . OneTwo bandbandbead chem.:.pushsot shot.shot. shot. - Encourageguard. shooters to practice with a . HookJump shot. - Teach. the pupil to: Keep the body in a semi-crouched - Look for the good shots. . . Plexposition. the elbows. - hasPass a offbettor to ashot. teammate who . HoldKee"fingers the the ball eveswaist with on high. thethe frontthumb rimand of the 122 i . boundDevelopFollow it throughbackthe abilityto afterthe basket.to the catch shot and and pass re- V . GetPassin intoone with motion.a goodeither receiving band. position . Usereturnafter short passing,pass. passes andbecause be ready they forare a . handle.Neverharder pass t, interceptacross own and goal. easier to If the . peripheralBesurepass deceptive twois intercepted,points vision with for topasses. opponents. seeit iswhere almost team- a Learn to use . mates are. , . whenKeepFollow-through pasting.the elbows inin closeorder toto thebe accuratebody . withShiftfingers passes. the tmbody the weight direction behind of thethe pass.pass._ Learn to extend arms and . . CatchStepUse ainto wristthe theball snap pass. above for force.the waist with 1 the fingers pointing up and below the . waistStep"Give" withforward withthe tofingersthe meet momentum thepointing ball. of thedown. bell. . ofCatchasAllow hand,the withtheball not arms the touchesthe fingers,to palm. pull the backfingertips.thumb, slightly and heel BASKETBALL 123 flavels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL I1 - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes Shoot. a free throw with a: OneTwo hand pushunderhand. shot. - Teachthrow the should pupil not that be theunderestimated. value of the free V Use .appropriate footwork suchTwotwo hand overhead.chest shot. TeachInstructthe freethe pupilthethrow pupil toas use heto: doesthe samethe setstyle shot. for .as:. ReversePivot- pivot (turn). . Keepstopping. thecenter body of bet,een gravity the low opponent when and . Jump.ChangeStart.Stop. direction. . hard,FlexStepgreatestthe theorballwhen hopknees height.whenrebounding. before quicklypivoting. the andjump push to getoff the GuardRemold an opponent.r shot. . CeepMaintainKeepthe thebetweengoal. aeyes low, theon balanced theoffensive mid-section position. player of and usingPlay thea game rules. of basketball . AvoidUsethe a person.crossingsliding motionthe feet with when the moving. feet. - strategyInstruct. ofthe the pupil game. in the rulesHold endto one the arm side. forward and the other out 124 11 Given an opportunity to learn and - Provide opportunity to throw the football B1-;oks. practicepupil(See can: p.Football 112 for skil:s, games relatedthe to - manytwoavailable, times.pupils. preferably a ball for every Use as many balls as are 127- 10: Vannier:pp.L.A.City: 61, 82. 1 V Football).Football- and p. 169 for SpectatorThrow the football with an Instruct. the boy in: ballGripping,the withball fingersthrowing,held in cuppedcrook-of-arm carrying around (hold tightend, the Equipment.Footballs. p. 181. stationaryoverhandshort and spiral andlong moving passdistance fortarget. ato n . puntHoldingagainst - add and the the dropping body. one and the one-half ball for step the KickingHoops.Goal Posts. Tee. - CatchThrowthe legsathe thrown bail(centerpass). orbackward passed betweenball . Kickinglearned.approach for and distance kick. when style has been Tires. - Catchwaist.above athe thrown waist hall and whilebelow the . methodUsingPlace the askicking instepwell asfrom in soccer kicking.a tee-teach type 'nstep toe Aft -, usingandKickstanding long aa football varietyordistance moving. offor formethods a shortaccuracy - Encourage. using drills in very howkick.smallDefending to groupsrun whileagainst holding passes the and ball. runs and including:. PlacePunt in kick the onair. the ground. - Organizewith emphasis drills on and kicking games spirals.in which boys - lineplay.orPerform. stances basic for startint? backfield positions andDrop kick on the bounce. - manyLimitUsedistances.throw repetitions.relays size the ofasball teamspractice for soshort thatdrills. and everyone longer(Shuttle). has 1 - - . - RunCarrystraightrightsecurely to the thehand football,aheadwithleft, and etcher arm.whileright, holding carryingleft or orit - Askplayas:Provide boys for to targetseach make of up tothe andthrow basic execute or football kick a sampleto such hoops, tires, etc. - Followdirection.the ball. blockers in a specified - Demonstratewing,"formations.formations: "Spread," and practice etc. various defensive "T," "Single-wing," "Double- BASKETBALL FOOTBALL 125 SECTION NO - COAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 i---- 7.e a Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - siveorPlan plays football. and involved execute in Simple of fen- plans -- VaryInstructtagging. the game pupils by usingin the flags rules instead and modify of - opponent'seanueversPlayPlan Aand game toexecuteefforts. counteractof football defensive an using - TeachFootball,"them gamesto meet suchand the "Flagas: needs Football." of the group- "Association 11 the rules. - pupilandGiven (Seepractice canan p.II5opportunity Soccer for games .kills, to learnrelated the to - EncouragekickwithInstruct hardshort withpupil thepasses pupilpower to (kicks)keep tofor control thedistance. as ball well the under as ball to Books.101: 10: Meyer:pp.L.A. 90-91. City: V Soccer).Soccer and p.172 for Spectator - Usecontrol. .dribbling drills such as:Dribbling around a post or various 125: pp.pp.Van 202-233. Hagen:784-788. - partsKickinside theof oftheball the feet: using foot, various heel, instep, - Instruct. the runnersto keep armsDribblemarkers. folded and pass in combination. 126: pp.Vannier: 429-433. - distancesKickand outside the balland of lomc coveringthe distances.foot. short - withhandsover arms tochest preventand or hands. hold reaching their outside:: to hitwith ball their 238:232:16me Films Girls.Soccer for . pent,typesKick theandof kicks,balldrop usingkick. place various kick, Encourage"give"the ball with theand it pupilas and the tojump ball get slightly strikesin line back.thewith body, 206: FundamentalsPlay.Soccer-Let's - StopDribbleleft the foot themomentum andball the withof right ball the foot.by: - whenInstruct. "heading." pupil to keep eyes onTo themake ball the ball go forward, jump and of Soccer. . Trappingabdomen,Blocking andwith thighs. cheat,the sole of . Toofcontact head.change ball the atdirection t4e hairline of the of ball, front the foot. use the side of the head. 126 . Trappingthe ground, with "Singleone knee Knee and - weightInstruct on thethe stationarypupil to keep or outsidemost of foothis - Volleyrebound the from ball any by partletting of itbodyTrap." whileball.. attempting to get control Instructof the the pupils in the rules of - Takeheadexcept(Knee, the- calledarms ball foot, and away"Heading"). hands.shoulder, freil another and . Modifyofsoccer. the the group. rules to meet the needs player. by using a: tackle).Straight tackle (front -- MarkPlay. (guard). a game aof specific soccer player.using SideHook tackle. 11 Given an opportunity to learn andthe rules. - Instruct the pupil to point the fingers Books. V Softball).pupilpractice(See can: p.117 Softball for games skills, related the to - Encourageaandupward ball point belowto catchthe the pupilfingers awaist. ball to downwardaboveallow thethe to waisthands catch to 102: 10: Miller:pp.p.L.A. 101-120.447. City: - thrownCatch aor softball batted towhich him isbelow - Teachgive. withthe pupils:the catch. The use of a mitt or a glove to catch . - and above hie waist. . a softball. - ThrowFieldCatchlong adistance. softballgroundflyball. ball. a short and . HowFly forthrownto balls positionthe and throwand caught. groundthemselves when fieldingballs to can get a be groundready -- andBatoverhandThrow chokea softballa softball throw.grip. using using a regularan - catchingAskSkill the drills, pupilsin two "Pepper." tolines. practice throwingball. and FOOTBALLSOCCER SOFTBALL 127 .Levolsr--- Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION rao - COAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson implementation Source Materials es Eatstance. a softballsofchal: using aa fullcorrect - assignUseIf amore battingone thar!,:tuad teeone to andbatting each play tee. teea regular is available, game. - PitchRunswing tothea andsoftballfirst bases follow base. using with through. aa lead-off.basic 36Usefence.or inches theprepare test high, awall strike 18 forinches zonepitching wide, on a practiceandwall or The strike zone is approximately - Pitchunderhandin the a softballstrike toss. zone. with accuracy 20. inetes from the ground.Askone the stands pupils in tothe practice batter's in position, "Threes" - - Stealdelivery.Pitch a base.softball using a legal . Arrangeone1 pointpitches squad for andcompetition legal one bunt,catches. for and bunting 3 points - - toaPlay softballall in the the bazes. toinfield home plate,and field and . Instructfirstif the base. utterthe pupils can beatto practice the throw in to -- TagDemonstrate rundown,fieldera runner. andforceout, ability participate asand a a in a - Skill tests, "Timed Base Bunning".hitting.and"sixes" three a batter,fielders a -pitcher, practice a placecatcher, -- Throwsidearm"windmdlI."Pitchdouble a asoftball play.andsoftball underarm using with whip. aa - pupils.modify:nstruct them the to pupilmeet thein theneeds rules of theand - togatPitchBunt("Place a avariety aa softball softball.softball Hitting"). of withplaces. fast. accuracy 128. II f Givenpractice an opportunity Speedball skit's,to learn the and - Instruct(basketball the pupiland soccer in skill skills) performance of advancing Books.101: Meyer: V pupil- can: Advanceand the the body. ball with the feet - bothProvidecatching,and interceptingfeet. instruction guarding, the and inball, thepivoting. passing,kick-up with 126:102: Miller:Vannier:pp. 398-416.341-342. - Passblocking,Intercept the ball. and the tackling. ball by trapping, . . DistributeofCraddle the feet. ball body between weight the evenly inner overpart the p. 489. -- Guard.Pivot.Catch the ball. - . Jumpouterfeet, into portions andthe catchair, of pullitthe with feet.ball hands. up with - Performfeet. the kick-up with oneboth oneProvide. foot. instruction in the kick-upPlace with the sole of the foot on top of foot. . PutPullball. toeball of toward foot underplayer. ball as it . theBendstarts ball knee to isroll.upward lifted dnd off outward of the soground. that . HavedistanceBend leg forward follow-through after and the catch ball a ball. leavesshort toe. - rollingProvide. ball.instruction in the kick-upStand of in a a stride position facing the . pointedPlaceball. lifting under thefoot rolling forward ball. with toes - player.Perform a lift-up to another - anotherProvide. player.instruction in the lift-upLiftand up catchto ball the with ball. foot, lean forward . Bendkicker.thePlace kickingopposite ball aboutleg foot. and one shift foot weightin front to of SOFTBALLSPEEDBALL SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions ._ Suggestions. for Lesson ImplementationInsert toes of kicking foot undPr the Source Materials Codes . ofLiftball.through the the other ballwith player. withthe legthe infoot the and direction follow- - PlayPerform a gamethe airusing dribble. the rules. - knowEncouragelearned what enoughthe gameclass skills is to all playto aboutplay as soonandand tohaveas enjoythey - Dividethe game. the field either actually or . I imaginatively far inexperienced players, 1 - Refertheinto players five to playerslengthwise to stay by in theiralleys their positions andown instructareas. of play - modifyEvaluateneedsInstructalong themofwith continually. the iftheir group.pupilsnecessary, names. in the to ruler,meet the and 11 Givenand practicean opportunity Volleyball to learn skills, - overheadInstruct passthe pupilhe should: that to perform the 216:16mm Films: Fundamentals V the(See pupil p.119 can: for games related to . Positionlegs bent. handsbody weight2 to 4 lawinches with above arms theand 247: Volleyballof Volleyball -Volleyball). Perform the overhead pass. . withCcutactforehead. the fleshyball about part 2'of abovethe fingers the head Spread the fingers. 248: VolleyballTechniques.Drillsfor Women. & . contacted.Straighten(not the tips).legs when the ball is 249: SkillsVolleyballPractice. & 1.30 - formInstruct. the bumpthe pupilpass, thathe should: in orderStand to per-in a stride position and move _ 261:S 8mm Loop Films. Volleyball.Power . rotatingPlaceto a crouch. forearms outward, close for togethera two arm by bump. . Straightenfists.Strike the theball legs on theand forearmfollow throughnot the . - performInstruct the the set pupil he should:that in orderwiththe to theball entire should body go. in the direction . overheadPosition pass.the body the same as for an . FormaboveRaise ashoulderhands triangle keeping height. with elbows the hands a little by - Serve the ball underhand. - underhandInstruct hethe should: pupil that in orderaboutplacing to serveone the to forefingerstwo inches apart.and thumbs . FlexStandFaceforward. thein forwardnet.knees and stride. lean the trunk . Holdfront the and ball to inthe the right (left) of thehand body. in . Keepback.Swing the serving elbow handstraight. (the right hand) . openContactSwing hand. the the arm ball forward with closethe heel to theof thebody. SPEEDBALL VOLLEYBALL 131 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes accuracy.Serve the ball underhand with "CompetitiveUse skill drills Serve." for practicing accuracy. 102:Books. p.Miller: 471. V Receive a serve. Use .skill tests to test for accuracy.TrotterCooper Serve- French Test. Serve Test. 126: Vannier:p. 528. - Perform a net recovery. - TeachInstructfor the a hard pupilthe drivenpupil to use thatserve. a bumpto perform (dig) passa net recovery,. he should: KeepBend bodythe knees.weight low. . UsePlayfrom the the net. two-handed ball just bump as itwhiff. drops per free - Perform a dink. heInstruct should: the pupil in performingpossible. the dink, . ElevateasApproachfor for a spike). spike.the the body net aswith high two as steps he would (same . . DirectpadsPass ofthe thethe ball ballfinger using close of one theto hand thehand. netwith or the - Spike the ball. executeInstruct the the spike, pupil, he thatshould: in orderclose toto the base lime. . Use a two-step approach. 132 Start approximately 6-8 feet from the net V . . Kell)Useon orathe two-footoutside ball on leftjump. the sideline.right side and in . Contacttopfront position ofthe the ball body.of highthe ball.and on the rear . opponentsDirectEmphasize the court.wrist ball action.into open areas on the - Serve the ball overhand. ovtrhandInstruct. serve, the pupil he should: that to executePaceopenContact hand.the the the net ball in awith forward tIle strideheel of position the . highweightrightHold ballonside. rear with foot. left hand about chest _es front of body and toward the . positionTossPlace theright approximatelyball ham, up onwith top the 3of to leftball. 4 feet hand above to . rightthe head shoulder. and 1 foot in front of the . ReachKeepes it theand contacts servingstrike thethearm ball.ballalmost with straight the palm - Perform a pass, set and Instruct. the pupil in: of the hand. spike with teammates. . Thehits court on a positionside. ofand the purpose blockers. of three - Perform is block. Teach. the pupil: Toextending block he theshould legs jump and straightarms. upward VOLLEYBALL 133 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementat.on Source Materiels Codes - Perform a back set. . extendedbesetThefacing higher exceptback up setoverhead, theand is contact back,back.the thesame and ofpalms asthethe the armsmustball front arebemy3t 11 Givenand practicean opportunity Archery to skills, learn - equipmentTeach safety before information the pupil and attempts care of to - Books.102: Miller: V -the pupil can: Selecttackle. and care for his - arrowsdrawInstruct the on arrow. command.pupils to shoot and retrieve 207:16mm Films. Fundamentalsp. 101. - andIdentifysafely.Carry arrow. and the use parts his tackleof the bow - Emphasizecan be a thedeadly fact weapon. that a bow and arrow 245: Archery.Worldof Archery. of - StringandarmIdentify target.guard, and other fingerunstring tackle tab, the suchquiver, bow as: - GiveonlyInstruct instructionat the pupils target towithout topoint be thehit.a drawn tackle arrow until - HoldUse (bracethe the proper bow and with unbrace).stance. the correct - Giveanchor.they instructioncan address tothe beginners target, drawat a andtarget - arrow).Nockstring the inarrow the (placenock of the the bow heThisapproximatelylocated can gives hit on the or target.archer5-10near feetthe satisfaction groundfrom the and arther. becausewhich is It is safer because - AimReleaseanchorDraw the the arrow.point. the string arrow. back to the it helps eliminate "wild" arrows. 134 - Use the point of aim for - Modify the activity when needed. - aiming.Use a range finder for . HoldTiechair. bowballoons horizontal on the when target in ato wheel increase - 20ShootScore.Use yards a bowan with endsight ofaccuracy. forarrows aiming. at - Teach the game "Archery Golf." interest. 11 andGiventhe practice pupilan opportunity can: Badminton to skills, learn - Teachthough the he pupil were toshaking grasp handsthe racket with it.as Rackets.BadmintonEquipment. V - Grip the badminton racket. - racketthumbslightlyInstruct andhandle andtheforefinger placepupilin line theto onwith spread "V"the the betweenside fingers racket of thethe head. Shuttlecocks.201:16mm Films. Badminton - hitHoldunderhand a ashuttlecock badminton stroke. racketwith an and - AllowDemonstrateracket the and pupils forehandshuttlecock to experiment and priorbackhand towith instruction.strokes. the Fundamentals. - Emphasize:. . KeepHitsoftball theright overhead throw.or left stroke shoulder similar toward to a . DropUsethe theword net. head cues--"Side of the racket to Net." behind the . Usetheback. word racket." cues--"Scratch your back with . . ContactBendforceful the the arm wrist slightly flick. and use a overhead and in VOLLEYBALL front of the body. BADMINTONARCHERY 145 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions. SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Codes . Shift weight from back foot to forward Source Materials . Followfoot. through to the left of body. - OrganizeBegin instruction the p:,pils withoutso that thethey racket. can - Execute a backhand stroke. mimatically. practice the strokes.Teachfront the foot pupil or backto pivot foot eitherin order on to U..e - Execute an overhand stroke . Emphasizewordplace cues cpposite suchthat as:the side flight to the of net.the "bird" "Pivot and Swing". changingshuttlecock.. the flight of the andis dependentthe amount upon of force.the point of contact . Drop.Smash.Clear. - Serve. the shuttlecock. Short serve. - Explain. the purpose for two serves.Instruct the pupil to: . Long serve. - body.swingSwingStrike forward,the the racket shuttle and back, contactin frontdrop the theof bird thebird, - Perform. additional strokes. - with a forceful hit. . Thebackhand. forehanddrive, forehand, clear. and mostoverhandTeach of thethe stroke pupiloffensive wheneverin a strokesgame possible to arehit executed withbecause on . . TheThe underhand backhand clear.clear. from an overhead contact. . AroundThe net the shots. head shot. 136 IRa', 11,, . 101,,..1111114 11.1.1'.":-4 r ,

l .1"

;

; '1.11111111111101

lay 11

e°701:pi

koh 11 Given an opportunity to learn - Organize class in the gymnasium or large Equipment. V Bowling,',nd(See practice p.168 the Spectator pupilthe skills can: Bowling). of - Teachroom(rollers with the squads pupiland retrievers). thefacing rolling each motionother- -using Minneapolis,The"Gym Cosom Bowl." Corp. Minn. - delivery.Execute the one step - delivery.Encouragea softball. all pupils to learn the one step . The bodyready position. position. - Teach the delivery without the use of a pendulumThe pushaway swing. and the - mimetically.Demonstrateball. and have the class follow - Instruct. the pupil to: Placefoot theopposite feet 111 the inches bowling apart hand and about the . . SwingLean431 inches forward the armbehind bending forward the the other.to knees.eye level and . Extendshoulderlet theit swinglevel.bowling backward hand as to if approximately to shake . hands.positionbringPlace the on handselbows the bowlingtogether against side tothe aof sides"begging" the and . backwardPushbody. the andhands forward. forward and swing arm - Use .key phrases: Addopposite the slide the forwardbowling onarm. the foot . slide.""Ready, push arm out, down, back and BOWLINGBADMINTON 139 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - andbowlingEncourageat balance.the handsame pupil andtime tothe forpractice opposite proper bringing timing,foot forward thecontrol, - using:Execute the four step delivery - Instruct. the pupil to: Stand with feet together or one . . The slidingfour step step. walk. . Startslightly with aheadthe right of the foot other. (if right- - For .blind: step.handed)Repeat, and making t&ke the4 brisk 4th stepsteps a forward.sliding Use guide rail for bowling. - GripLift the bowling ball. - TeachUseslide." key the phrases pupil to- "Ready,lift the one, ball two, to thethree, - intoinsertingInstruct"begging" their thetheposition. respective pupil to holesgrip theand ballthen bythe and ring fingers - Find his starting position. - turntheInstructthumb fouland all faceline thethe pupiltarget.andway walkinto to place4the hole. his back to paces away, - Teach. the pupil: firstPush thestep- ball away from body, on the . Drop arm down, on the second step. 140 . . theSlideSwing ball, foot,arm onand swingthe ball, fourth arm on forward thestep. third and step.roll - Encourage. the pupil to: Practice coordinating the push out, . KeepOne,down, thetwo, back bowling three and forward andwrist slide. firmwith andsteps. the 11 Given an opportunity to learn - Instruct the pupil that the gripforearm to be straight. Equipment. V pupiland(See practice can:p.170 forGolf Spectator skills, theGolf). - ofuponused hands, theis an golfer'setc. individual strength, matter ability, dependent size GripVee VeeTraining Molded Club. '1 - Grip. a golf club using: Organize. class so they can practice:Safety, with no danger of striking 217:16mm Films. Grip and . TheThe overlap interlock.unlapped (Varden). . . Hittinggripsanother andballs with can withthe choose clubclubs theor of amost differentball. comfor- 250: WelcomeGolf.Stance. to - Choose. a grip and use it inThe putting grip. . theOrganizetable stroking and theeffective mimeticallyclass soone. they without can practice the 257:S 8mm Loop. Films. Full Swing. - practice. - Useoverlap clubs grip.with a molded grip to learnuse of the the ball. 259:258: 171;77-Golf.GripStance. and Assume. . the stance using: The square stance. - usedInstruct depends tne pupilupon thethat stroke the stance the golfer to be 263:262: 3/4Putting. Swing. . The openclosed stance. stance. wishesGenerally:-. to perform. 264: Women'sGolf. . UseUsestance. a mediumwood with and along closed irons or withsquare a square . Usestance. short irons with an open stance. GOLFBOWLING Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO Suggestions for Lesson Implementation GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Source Materials Codes - Address the ball. - ballTeachgreatly in the relation controlspupil thatto ball the the spin.body position and club of the Books.126: pp.Vannier: 140-179. V Generally. . ball is placed: CenterForward for of mediumcenter andfor longwoods. irons. Equipment. - - . golferRight offor center short andirons. closer to the PlasticGolfBalls. Clubs. Balls. Swing. the club using a: HalfQuarter swing. swing. usedInstruct. is determined the pupil by thatthe: the swingStroke to to be be exc-uted. Targetsflags, -waste tires, . FullThree-quarter swing. swing. . Distance to the tole. baskets,16mm Films. etc. - Use .an iron club to: Perform a chip shot. - practicingProvide a 4,chipping. 5, 6, 7, or 8 iron for 228:207: PitchGolfBuilding Swing. and Your - variousEncourageaccuracy,Provide distances. targetsthe such pupil as: for to pupil practice to practice from wastebaskets, flags, 231:229: Putting.SandPitchingRun. Shot. and _. Perform a pitch shot. - Provideaccuracy.basetires; of painta 7,wall 8,or forormark 9pupils irontargets forto aimatpracticing thefor 234: Golf.Short Game in - Useiron a sandwedgeand execute or aa chipnumber shot 9 - dependsTeachpitching.. the upon pupil the thedistance club hehe selectsUsewishes plastic to balls. - Useintoor ablast putterthe hole.from and a cansand putt trap. -- InstructofUsecover rules, written and pupiletiquettethe test terrain to toswing anddetermine he terms. weightis on. knowledgeof clubs, length of shaft, types of clubs, cost of - 142 - Useball. a wood club and hit a /clubs, Match-Stroke types of (Medal) tournaments 7% . - Demonstrate a knowledge of - Instruct. pupil that: Par is determined by yardage: - Demonstrategolf etiquette a knowledgeand rules. of Men - Par 3 - Women - golfscore.Play terms. 9 holes of golf and keep 451601251 to andto 600 450Upup to 250 -- 654 - 401576211 to andto 575 400upUp to 210 12 Givenand playan opportunity Handball, theto learnpupil - readyInstruct position, the pupil legs in slightly the basic bent, handball body Books. 10: L.A. City: V -can: Assumeserving a currentor receiving stance the for ball. whenthetoin a the forwardreceiving.crouched front wall wallposition. ready when toserving move eitherand face way Stand sideways 118: p.p.Seaton: 224. 180. - handtheStrike soair that theto theballit carriesfront with wall.a inflat -- Askserving.Teachfloor the the andpupil pupil stroke to topractice itbounce toward strikingthe the ball wall ballson asthe in Handball.Equipment.16mm Films. _ - handStrikeit carriesor theclosed ball in fist thewith airso cupped thatto the - partner.thatInstructthrown it or stays thehit pupilagainstclose toto the strikethe wall floor the by andballa so 218:230: HandballPlayFundamentals. Handball. - Servefront a wall.highlow drivelob ball. ball. - Askpastcarriesfollowsthe the thefront pupil back shorta highwall fromto service arc.sohit the that the frontline. onball reboundwall high just againstit - Serve a sharp angle ball. - Asksharprebounds,angle the anglepupilagainst to backtheto the serve sideacross front wallthe the wall balland court. sothenon thatan at ita GOLF HANDBALL 143 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Stroke the ball underhand. - AskInstructstroke. him to the use pupil a slightly in the bentunderhand elbow armand - hitcomesEncouragetheto by employ ball offanother oftheon an wall the pupilunderhanCplayer. bounceafter to practice beingandthrowing then thrown hitting asmotion. itor - Stroke the ball overarm. - EmphasizeTeachitthe hard. overarmthe keeping pupil style tothe hlt withball a benthighlow andandball hittingstraight using - thenearAskarms. swing bentthethe pupil ea';armstarts strokeforto further usethe with astraight cupped back.the hand hand.arm placedstroke, Begin - Stroke the ball sidearm. - inAskflexible.the an the feeterect pupil facing position, to executethe sidekeep this wallthe stroke wristand the with body - MovePlay around a game the of court.handball. - AskTeach him the to pupilmove rapidlyto use goodforward, footwork. backward, - Keeporregulation doublesscore and handball.game complete of singles a - akeepingEmphasizeor ball left at andthe allremaining rightbody times. inon goodinyour a positionsemi-crouchsignal. to strikeand 144 - Teachso that the matchesrules and may strategy be played. of the game - Encourage. the pupils to play:Simple leadup games of elimination of . ballRotationthe inplayer sequence. games who makeswhere aa mistake.group plays the 12 practiceGiventhe pupilan theopportunity can: skills of to Tennis, learn and Books.128: 91: Xanthos:p.Leighton: 39. V - Assumeready aposition. correct stance or - bendAskonInstruct pupilsaforward tennis theto slightly court facepupils netor toin practiceor standa practicesemi-crouch inarea. open wall, orderwith BallEquipment. attached to pp. 15, 17. 1 knees bent. an elastic cord. '' HoldEastern a racket grip. using the - extendArrangefirst thewithpupils racket the in face pairs.toward perpendicular another, handle to grcund. Ask one pupil to Stroketemplates.Foot patterndeveloper. - Swing the racket in a level . - Asknaturally Instructthe pupil asthe tothough pupilstake shakinghold in openof hands.the order racket to move Tennis rackets.balls. forehand stroke. - usingAskswingracket pupils a (3) levelon tofollowcommand imitateswing through. (1)with instructors backswing limited backexample(2) forwardswing -- - Pivot from a ready position - keepingpracticeProvideRequire elbow a level pupilsstroke extended. swing. todeveloper step forward for pupils with theto and execute a forehand stroke. - Directleft(or footpupilsleft) while andin openmakingpivoting order a backon drill the swing. rightto PANDBALL (3)(1) followPivot andthrough. back-swing (2) forward swing TENNIS 145 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - swingRequireSuggestions pattern pupils for many to Lesson executetimes. I basicementation pivot Source Materials Codes - Strokethe hand a dropped and with ball a racket.with - Askballpainted swingpupilspupil and strikingon totheto the follow workother ground. thein footprintexecutes pairs.ball with apatterns forehandhis palm. One drops a Strrnke a tossed ball with the - AskballtheInstruct pupils whilethroat thetousing of work pupilthe a inchokeracket). to pairs. stroke grip (handa dropped near One tosses hand and with a racket. - handAsksothe that pupils strokingball it tobouncesto theandrotate other thenup drillto usingfrom waist beginning aa shortheight.racket distance withgrip - Strokefull swing.a tossed 15111 using a - andEncourageracket--choked. meet whenthe the ball theypupil squarely.are to ableuse ato full control size it - usingChange proper position footwork. on the court - ArrangepositioneachAsk pupilsother's pupils and to form.instruct inwork open in orderthempairs in inand properready correct - Askexecuteandmethod toss,the right. pupils ofandthe moving flatproper in aserveforward, massservice onformation comment. backward,stance, to ball left - Assumenersoverhandthe airserve, flatthe and racketcorrectservo). tosshit ittheswing stance with ball (begin- an forin - tosstheRequire airmany withthe times. pupilsa vertical to place toss-repeat the ball the in 146 I - servingflatRequire swing height.pupil using to *practice ball suspended the overhand at - intoServe the a ballplaying across court. the net - balls.AskInstructfrom the behind pupil the the topupils serveserve to acrossline. rally thethe Use many - score,appropriatePlayrules a andgameof thefollowing ofstrokes, game.tennis the keepingusing basic - rulesTeachthen progress" ofelements the game. toof servingscore keeping and rallying. and basic 12 andGiven practice an opportunity Track activities, to learn - Instruct. the pupil that: In a sprint the runner attempts to Books. 10: L.A. City: V -the pupil can: Run. . distancerun a maximum (up to speed220 yards). over a short 16: Bucher:pp. 263-272. .. MiddleShort distances. distances. - Teach the pupils the methods of passingthatIn distance the runners running conserve it is energy.important 43: pp.Dougherty: 1-541.269-279. . AndALong relay.hurdle. distances. toe. baton. The visual.non-visual. 126: pp.Vannier: 286-318. - beOrganize. active themost class of the so time.that all Usepupils small can squads and rotate to 208:220:16mm Films. highDistances. Jump. . smallerandTeachdifferent then the groups. provideevents.skill toskill the practiceentire class in 233:221:240: BroadHurdles.Sprinting,Running Jump. Jump.. . A standing long jump. - .jump.Instruct the pupils in the aspects of the 'Winter.with Bud VL . HighA Triplerunning jump. jump. long jump. . Approach.Flight.Take off. 243: Field. ack and . Landing. TRACKTENNIS 147 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - deviceUseSuggestions record (as wellkeeping for asLesson aas method a Implementationmotivational of self- _Source Materials Codes - Throw. A baseball for distance. - PlanProvideevaluation). competition for safe forexecution wheel chairof the pupils throws. i V . A discus.shotjavelin. put. in the throws. l2 andGiven practice an opportunity wrestling to skills, learn Books. 10: L.A. City: the- boy can: wrestlingAssumeoffensive a correctin or the defensive standingstance for - ofTeachthe alert body,the readinesspupil the legsto takewith bent, athe balancedand arms the close bodyposition tobent 16mm119: Films. p.Stanley:pp. 263. 280-285. - Movegoodsidewsrdposition. forward, balance. while backward, maintaining or - Conducttheforwardcommmulwhile pupils group in ato drillscrouch. move maintaining variousfor footwork. directionsa proper stance. on Direct 210:206: EscapesBreakdownsCombinationsinto Pinning and - positionDrop or fallon the to mat.a kneeling - Teachgroup.doubleDirect pupilskneethe pupilsdrops to catch to the practicetheir mats weight insingle a massequally and 241: andPositionStartingReversals. Take- - Performfrom a onestanding nr more position. takedowns - conveyersAskonto the pupilsthe hands, mats. such to walkknees,as: through and feet basic when takedown dropping 265:S 8mm Loop Films. Wrestling-downs. . Drillunder-Double pupils armleg -go dive, inbehind. pairs single on legperformance pickup, orof Skills.Basic takedowns by the numbers. 148 - Assume a referee's position - Demonstratein pairs on referee's mats. position with class - manueversdefensiveonPerform the mat onemanfrom as or(top offensivethe more oroffensive bottom).breakdown or - Teacharranged. basic in breakdown partnc:4. manueverswith toRequire pupilsa low pupils center to of keep gravity. a wide base. - Performposition one on orthe more mat. escapes - Demonstrate. and then have pupilsheadWalkand walk lever.throughfar knee. the following: Far arm and far ankle, far ankle, defensiveor counter mat manuever position. from the as:.through basic escapes and countersStandturn upsuchin, and and break the switchaway, sitand outreswitch. and Perform one or more pinning - Demonstrate. and drill pupils onhasRequire theslowly been step pupilsandlearned. carefully to repeat until each technique move holdsdown. from successful break- pinningby step. combinations:performance of the followingdoubleThe half arm Nelson, lock. crotch, and the - WrestlewrestlingofParticipate similar in bout series size in with a and usingshort a ability.pupil - aTeachaccordingConduct plan pupilsusing brief to specifictosize matches wrestle and manueversstrength.of according partners according topaired holds..downs,appropriate escapes takedowns, and pinning break- to. the situation. Haveescape pupils in apractice planned asequence. takedown, an

TRAC . WRESTLING 149 SECTION TWO - COAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 evels 1 Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes Er- 13 Exercise,practiceGiven an skillsopportunitythe girl used can: into Floorlearn and dance,aInstruct combination and thebalances pupil of tumbling, performadthat Free ballet, inExercise a routine. modern is 44:59:Books. pp.Drury: 107-117. L - positions.Perform basicthe basic movements. ballet Organizeshouldthe entire bethe creative groupclass evenand and teach thoughworked movements theon indivi-routines to p.55.L.A. City: . Hop.Gallop.Chasse. - duallyInstruct at athe later pupils stage. in the meaning of the . Slide.PasSkip. de Basque. ballet. terms including the following:step,Chasse and - Facelet theforward, following take foota sliding - Perform. standing movements.Ballet touch. . Pasdisplaceit. de Basque the lead- Stand, foot, step as ifto chasingthe . BodyBends.Lunge. wave. Drawtransferringleft the with right a spring, thefoot weight forward arms to held momentarily,the toright side. . SwedishReleve.Plie. fall. . Plieleft.foot, - andBend then knees quickly as deeply back asto possiblethe Repeat to the right. - ,. Perform. floor movements. Body sweep. . Relevedomewithout in - thebendingRise five on attheballet the toes. waist-usuallypositions. . HurdleFlankHook turn.sit.walk. . KneelingKnee lunge. body wave. . Split.ShootLeg circles- through. . Split turns. 150 - Perform. static movements. Arabesque. . LiftArabesque the right - Stand slightly, on the keepingleft leg. the . NeedleKneeFront scale.scale. scale. desiredposition.toe pointed. ballet position. Hold the arms in any Maintain an erect body . OneSideOne leg legsupport. balance. squat- . ballStepPirouette of to the the -right Aright, full foot. turnturn onright one onfoot. the Place the sole . Straddle"V" sit. stand.lean. kickToursof thethe jete leftright - Standfoot foot below onforward. the the left right foot knee. and Quickly - Perform. leaps and jumps. Aerial split. backonturn thein to aright thescissor leftfoot movement. asand the the weight left swingsis taken Finish with . StagHitchCat leap.leap. kick. . Tinsicaleftthe weightleg - Abackward combinationon the toright a ofscale. foot a cartwheel and the - . Tuck.Straddle leap. . Valdezandright a -forward Takeleg extendeda walk-over.long sit, and withthe leftthe knee Perform. . turns. SpiralPiroutte. turn. buttocks.bent,the floorwith thenear foot the closebuttocks, to the with the Place the right hand on - Perform. tumbling moves. WhipTours turn. jete. vigorouslyarmhand;left from andarm the with simultaneouslyhorizontally shoulder the left in footforward. answing upwardand the left andright Push - . . DiveForward rolls. and backward rolls. backward movement. . Headstands.Cartwheels. . Tinsica.Walkovers.Round-off. . Kips.Valdez.Springs- GYMNASTICS (FLOOR EXERCISE) 151 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 'Levels 13 andCivenSequences practice an opportunity - Teachingskills on toProgressions a learnhigh - SuggestionsallProvide stunts opportunity foron aLesson line for onImplementation thepupils floor to beforepractice Source44:Books. Materials Drury: Codes Balance- Beam, the girl can: Mount the beam with a: . --Ting the stunt .-on movementsthe beam, to then a low transfer beam. 59: pp.L.A. 86-98.84-106.City: . . CrotchBackCross pullover seatseat mount.mount. mount- - walkAllowother to pupil simpleend andto movements climbclimb onor thesuchjump high asoff- hoppingbeam and and Add . . FenceOneSquat leg vaultmount. squat mount. mount. - Observeskipping, the untilfollowing confidence safety isrules: gained. - . WolfStraddleOne mount.-knee mount.mount. . withEncouragePlace double mats thethickness on performer both atsides the to ofends.mount the orbeam - Move. on the beam and: notdismount near thein thelegs middle or supports or the ofend the but . Walktoes. backward.forward pointing the . mountRemovebeam. is themode. beat board as soon as the -. WalkChasseStep-hop. on tiptoes.or Glissade. - Usethefor spotters beginners.spotters on hand both not sides the ofreverse. the beam The performer takes . CrouchTipPlie-walk. toe turn. turn. . . Teachmove.Always the use pupil spotters to keep in learningelbows straight a new .- BackChainsPirouette shoulder turns. turn, roll- mountsand in using line armwith support. the shoulders on . BackwardForward roll. shoulderroll. roll. 152 ^A111 pr."

. al so I Is

puhallik N. ,

NilzEu.. - .. = tilliMe°11S4141 14:15:- \

!

f , \...___4.. - f

170 - *Perform balances. . "V" seat. . One-legKnee scale. squat. . PushFront up. and rear lying. . BodyArabesque.Lunges. wave. Perform. dismounts. SidePretzel seat bend. dismounts. - Onspotter. difficult dismounts always have a . Cartwheel.FrontJumpitg vault- - with variations. practiceGiven an skillsopportunity on the to Uneven learn and - Checkto see the that equipment all the before supports each arepractice, securely 44:Books. Drury: -Parallel Bars, the girl can:Mount. the bar. Straight arm support. - Followin place. safety regulations: 59: pp.L.A. 70-79.118-143.City: . ShootFront over support low baron highwhile bar. . thicknessPlace mats for around dismount. the bars--double . Single-legBackhanging pull-over from swing high mount. up. bar. . UseperformerRemove two spottersthe mounts. beat forboard learning as soon new as . GlidingShootFlank mount.through.kip mount. - Teach the simple one bar movementsmovements. on the Balance. on the bar. "V"Seat seat. balance. the regular.horizontal bar and then progress to . BackScale.One lezpull-away. squat. - aEmphasize first.movement, the and brevity a dismount. of the movement at Each student should perform a mount, This will allow GYMNASTICS(BALANCE BEAM) more pupils to use the bar during class time. (UNEVEN PARALLEL BARS) 155. SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Prsgressions. Thigh rest. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Dismount. from the bar. Swan.Arch back. . . quarterCastCastrear. off off twist. low low bar bar to with the a . dismount.Single-leg flatk vault . Undatswingdismount.Pike position dismount shoot offfrom . ForwardControlledhighfrom bar. the roll high"Skin off bar. highthe Cat"bar. 13 aandGiver Side practice anHorse, opportunity vaultingthe pupil toskills can:learn on Be. aware of safety: Setand the gradually side horse increase as low the as height.possible 235:16mm Films. BeginningSite Horse, - Returnfrontknees,Grasp supportthetoand the pommels,raise mat.on thehips bend horse, to a . assistexecutetofallsPost give atheon spotter thesupport theperformer stuntfar (a andside onteacher or help the ofto thenearthe helpor horse) performera side preventpupil ofand to Exercises. - hipsoffRun, withhigh, grasp two and thefeet, return pommels, raise to thetake . landingPlacethe horse. a sidedouble of thicknessthe horse. of mats on the same side of the horse. 156 - onTske the off horse. and land on the knees While holding - Teachbent theand pupilthe weight to land distributed with his kneesevenly - Landandthe then onpommels, the jump horse off.stand in ona squatthe feet - horseInstructon both with feet. thethe pupilhands. to push downward on the - positionPerformjump down. anda squat then vault.stand and - withposition,Instruct the hands, theand pupil keepbring theto the pushtoes knees offpointed. instrongly a tucked - Landstraddle on the position, horse in stand,a - Teach. the pupil to: Keep the head and chest up. - onpushPerform both off, feet. aand straddle land on vault. the mat - Teach. the pupil that the name ofLift alegs the widely hips tohigh clear and thespread horse. the - hipsandofRun, the vaultbent. placehorse, over both swingthe hands horse legs on withup, top vaultbody isclosest determined to the by horse. the part of the - andPerform right). a flank vault (left - Aspommels,twoInstruct the foot whole lifttakeoff,the body pupilthe becomes hipsplace to runupward bothparallel and handsanduse withsideways. aon thethe backhorse,theandaide. toperformer'son lift thethe horse,thefar right sidefeet. arms hand.of extended the horse to awaythe from The spotter should stand to the side End with the - andPerform right). a front vault (left - facesLiftfeet,Instruct thetheplace legsthehorse. both pupilhorizontally hands to takeon theasoff thepommels. with performer two When the body is GYMNASTICS(UNEVEN PARALLEL BARS) (SIDE HORSE) 157 SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions 1 horsehorizontal,Suggestions for the onefor landing. handLesson should Implementation leave the End with the side Source Materials Codes - andPerform right). a rear vault (left - feet,Instructtoward placethe the horse. the pupil hands to ontake the off pommels. with two passinghandinhipsLift a sittingthefirstso over thatlegs and position.the to then horse.thebuttocks theleft right andare lifthandto the thein horse Release theAfter left dropping nearestwithrearFinishthe the leftvault. the withright hand horse. the hand,to left steady grasp side the theof landing. thepommels body with Reverse for the right 13 onandGiven Parallel practice an opportunity Bars, beginning the toboy skills learn can: - tobars,Teach a straight holdthe pupilon armto to thesupport. stand bars, at and the jump end upof the Repeat the Books. 10: p.L.A. 213. City: n+.1, - -support onPerform the bar. a straight arm - position,aInstructexercise low pendulum withseveralpupil head swingin times. properup atand end methodarms of straight.bars. of executing Require good body Have S 8mm Loop 95:Films. p.token: 113. - inPerform a straight a pendulum arm support. swing while - suitableeachtwo pupilsend. rest at periods.a time use the bar, one at Repeat several times with 250: BoyEarsParallel - T s. - PerformPerformthe bars, one straddle or more seat seats travels. on - HaveInstructandswinging thethen pupil thestraddle both pupilperform legs seatin over athe onpendulum onetechniquethe bartwo swing andbars. of performing a cross seat. 158 - - Performfrom a cnependulum or more swing. dismounts - Teachfrontof the the of legs pupilthe andhands to swing shift again. to the a straddlehands in seatfront in Have pupils do - Performon the bars. a forwardshoulder roll balance to a - withTeachand3 or thehand the4 travels appropriate pupilgrips. thedown front transferthe bars.and rearof weight vaults Have pupils practice - onPerformstraddle the bar. changesseat. of positions - Teachmakingaturns. straddle pupil dismounts toseat. do anda shoulder add half balance and quarter from Practice first with - balance.kneesreturn bent to anda straddle then with seat straight at finish legs, of the Instruct.forward therolls pupil on theto dobars: a seriesEmphasize of safety and control. . Encourage- pupils to: KeepshouldertionReturn elbows at to theroll. erectout conclusion vide. straddle of seateach posi- -- TeachregraspingsideTeachrest the(sideways)seat the pupil bypupilthe doing to oppositeonto perform theareverse half tar. bars aturn positionsfront and and shiftingleaning from - - otherthe legs way. to a straddle seat going the andPerform upper an arm upper swing. arm hang and upperTeach. armthe withpupil an to over hold bar the arm weight Pupilposition on should the wear a sweat shirt to 237:l6mm Films. BeginningParallel Bar - haveInstructwino a good *anti.: the hand pupil grip to on keep the elbowsbars,protect andlevel, arms.to GYINASTICS(PARALLEL(SIDE HORSE) BARS) Exercises. SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences- - Teaching Progressions - Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes Movefrom to aan straight upper arm arm swing. support Teachfront. pupil uprise, to performand an overa back bar uprise,Begin kip. by a increasing the height of the . witharmsForupper the the atarm hands.theback swing. front uprise, of thestraighten swing, pullingthe . progresstheThetop barspupil kip forto byshould acomingthe straight firstlearn to afewarmthe straddle trys,pendulumover bar thenseat or on - morePerform exercises combinations to form ofa 3 or - Teachtravel, the apupils balance, to performand a dismount a mount,swing. in a routine. - giveForsmooth beginners,support sequence. as keepneeded. bars at low height and 13 andGiven practice an opportunity Tumbling toSkills, learn - Use a spotter for safety. Books. 96: token: -the pupil can perform: A sideside roll rolls or startingseries of from 3 - Instructrolling pupilson mats in in the the techniques gym or on ofgrass 126: p.Vannier: 17.277. - A ashoulder lyingstanding position roll position starting on theon thefrommat. mat. - andbodyTeachturf back and pupilareas onroll thetooutdoors. forward throwsame side. oneon thearm shoulderacross the TumblingEquipment. Mats. 160 - A forward. toll starting from:A squat position. - Askthe the hands, pupil tuck to takethe headthe bodywell weightunder, onchin 223:16mm Films. An Instruc- - A backward. roil starting mat.A standing position on the - Teachshoulderstothe the basic neck. chest, androcking back.and rollmotion forward in a squaton the sit Keep the weight off Exercises.andTotor's TOmblingFloor Guide from:. mat.A squat position on the - Stressonfrom the athemat, squat need then stand. for ask good the handpupil position to start in 245:244: TumblingII, I. . A standing position. - weightDemonstrateneck.order toto keepthe how matthe pupil withbody shouldaweight controlled lywer off of hisknee the 246: The'Ambling,Skills. Basic positionarmsbackbendtake andwith the onroll backward thebody the onchin weightmat. over sit,tucked to withthen a into hands theroll thehands andonto chest, feet andthe - A extension,hack roll with a back - wherehandstandAsksnap-down the the pupil weightat to tne toa stand.movespointpress ontoinup ato theback a momentaryhands, roll then - A squat(frog hand stand). balance - headwithonapart,Instruct thehandsoff elbows--leanwiththe onthe mat,the pupil floor,insideand to forward,lift takeshoulderof thethe a keeping squatfeetknees 'width into position restingthe - A head balance (headstand) - Ask trianglethethe balancepupil with to position. formhands an and equal the sidedhead. Shift ratherthetogether.to theheadbody thanvertical onweight the backforwardby lifting or top.partand singly raiseof head orthe legs Keep the back arched. Rest GYMNASTICS(TUMBLING(PARALLEL SKILLS)BARS) SECTION TWO - GOAL II - OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions - suggestionsspotterInstruct or pupil forhelper Lessonto towork steadyImplementation with themanother in theas a Source Materials Codes - A roll.head balance to forward - headAskverticalto pupiloverunder, balance balanceto rounding hold position. anda head theroll backbalance by tuckingand andbending thenthe - A tocartwheel the right. to the left and - .\ stand (a rockingAsk motion).frontthe the knees footpupil to to tothe back shift chest. foot his in weight a side-stride from ti - onTeachforand the hipsfull thehands handbent.body with placementextension the feet andin just aweight vertical off theshift mat As skill is achieved work CC - A one-halfroundoff turn,(cartwheel, snapdown). - withWhenfeetposition. hands,a downcartwheel togetherarms, hasand and beenshoulders. push learned, '2f the snap mat the - -A hand balance (handstand). - hands,position.Instruct and theproper pupil head in andplacement shoulder of the Mats.Equipment.Rolled mats. - headposition.Useagainst. atilted spotter toward to help the sustainback. the erect Keep the backA wall arched may andbe usedthe to balance f 162 - Use a rolled mat headasforward an and aid. handspast theon thehead, mat, and shift then. the whip hips the Place the - Stress the runningitstrongly.feet skip-step without overhead When thesingle and rolledthis down has mat. while been pushinglearned, off do - Use the rolled matplace thetakeas in mattheoff. the andhands headspring- kick on over,the floor -snapping in front the legsof - Use a spotter atmoment thedownto side helptogether.of snapdown,of lift the theperformer andshoulders push off. and back at the Goal III. toProvide his participation each pupil with in recreationan opportunity activities. to gain proficiency in games and sports skills that will lead SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATIONAL SKILLS ObjectiveLevels 1. Sequences - Teaching Progressions Theto pupiltry them can recreationally.perform the skills needed to engage in several activities with enough proficiency Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials ----..,Codes 1 Givencan:to play an opportunityTable Games, to the learn pupil and - participateProvide many with activities a. minimum so of that waiting. all can Books.108: EducationPhysical - PlayChess, games Daminoes, such as Jacks,Checkers, - Encourageorganizationand to return pupil and theto condition takeitems care L. astheof they materialssame were 40-41.pp.FrameworkCommittee: 6-38, - TopTablePlaySkittles, Spinning, games Croquet, etc.such Marbles, Boxas TableHockey, Golf, - Blind:dominoes,received. etc., for the blind. There are special checker games, 125: pp.Van230-236, 583,Hagen:57, 150,789-791, - PingPool,PlayTableBox Football,Pong. gamesMiniatureShuffleboard. such Marble Tetheras Paddle Football, Ball, CerromCarromsEquipment. Board. and 908-909. - Carroms,Play games Maze. such as Bumpo, Dominoes.ChessChessmanCheckerCheckers. Board. Board. and Game Boards for: BoxTable Hockey.Football. Croquet.Golf. 164 Marbleboard.Table Football.Shuffle- Marbles.JackJacks.Top. Ball. 2 Givenplay anQuiet opportunity Games, the to pupillearn can:and interestChange activities is at its frequentlypeak. and when Books.110: pp.L.A. 182,City: 184, -- ColorPlayFroggie matchingimitativeHunt. Froggie. games games such such as as theyInvolve may asall many have pupils turns. as possible so that 111: pp.L.A.361-362,186. 355-357,City: 364. - What'sasPlay Horseshoes coordinationmemoryMissing games (Who'sand Croquet.gamessuch Missing). assuch Equipment.CroquetColored Set.Paper. 3 - DogPlay and guessing Bone, Hands-Up,games, such Hands as Horseshoes.types.Objects of various i - Down,andsuchPlay Squares. andpencilas CorralSeven-Up. and thepaper Wild games, Horse 4 GivenSports,pate anin opportunitytheRecreational pupil: to Games partici- and - Provideenjoyto allow participatingenough the pupilpractice toin gaintimethe .enoughand instruction skill and - outsidesportChooses voluntarily motivation.and plays anda game without or QUIETRECREATIONALTABLE GAMES GAMES GAMES Cevels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWOSuggestions - GOAL III for - OBJECTIVELesson Implementation 1 Source Materials Codes - tionborhoodParticipates facilities. or on inpublic his ownrecrea- neigh- - Encouragetion.activities the which pupil seem to specializeto give him in satisfac- those - CanparticipateChooses keep severalthe in score recreationally. activities of to - well.handicappedAdaptcapped games pupil and can non-handicappedsports participate so that with thepupils handi-other as - Knowsactivities.several the activities.rules of several

166 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS ObjectiveGoal III: 2. utilizedTheProvideto pupilhis eachparticipationin can a pupilvarietyenjoy withthe ofin "Worldan gamesrecreation opportunity andof Sports"sports. activities. to asgain a spectatorproficiency and in understands games and sportsform, rules,skills andthat scoring will lead Levels I Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 5 BasketballanGiven intelligent an opportunity the pupilspectator can:to becomein - Instruct. the pupil in: The correct terminology. Books.108: EducationPhysical Watch-(See a basketballp.121 for Basketball).game and: Can define terminology. 40-41.pp.Committee:Framework 6-38, . Assist.A.B.A. . FreeFreeze throw. the . CenterCenter.Blocking, Jump. . Givego.ball. and . DeadCourt.Charging. ball. . JumpGoal.Lay ball.up. . DoubleDefense. foul. . N.C.A.A.N.B.A. . Dribble.FastDunking. break. . OutPivot.bounds. of . The court area--backcourt, frontcourt, . -Personal.Foul.Forward. . Screen.Rebound.Press. equipment--backboards,restraining circle and baskets,the types ball. of -Technical. . Zone.Shot. RECREATIONAL GAMES BASKETBALL (SPECTATOR) 167 SECTION TWO - GOAL III - OBJECTIVE 2 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes ' - Knowstypesand thethe of scoring.courtpurposeequipment area of used,andthe thegame . position,dribbling,rebounding,The basic team shooting,skills--catching, jumping, offense, pivoting, selection team defense.passing, feinting, of -----,____ - Knowsinvolved. the numberbasic skillsof players. . Men'sThe teamsteam --- 5 Women'splayers. Team - 6 players; - 5 anGiven intelligent an opportunity spectator, to become the - Instruct. the pupil in: The aorrect terminology. and:pupil(See can p.139 watch for a BowlingBowling). Match . -The leagues and bowling groups.AmericanP.B.A.Professional Bowling Bowlers Congress Association - A.B.C. - - Can. .define terms: Alley (lane). . . Head pin. -- Women'sCongress International - W.I.B.C. Bowling . . BallBackupApproach. return. ball. . . Mark.Nook.League. - AmericaBowlingNational -Proprietors BowlingB.P.A.A. Council Association - N.B.C. of . Double.Brooklyn. . . Spare.Sleeper. . The method of scoring. .. . FourFoulError. timer.line. . . Strike.Spot.Split. The techniques used. - Understands. . how to score. Gutter.Frame. . Turkey. 168 5 - pupilandGiven intelligent canan opportunitywatch spectator,a Football to become thegame Instruct. the pupils -hat: TheA team offensive consists team of has11 players.4 downs to Books. 16: p.Bucher: 261-268. and:-(See p. 125 for Football). . move10If theyards ball in has410 downs, yards.not beez the movedoffensive Can. define football terms. Backfield . Theteam objectloses possessionof the offensive of the teamball. . BrokenBlocked fieldkick. runner. runningis to advance and passing, down zhe eventually field by . Conversion.Clipping. linecrossing for atheir touchdown. opponent's goal . EndDown.Double around. team. . FakeFair kick.catch. . . FirstFlankers.Field and goal. ten. . . FlatFlooding pass. a zone. . ForwardFreeFormation. kick. pass. . . LateralKeep.Fumble. pass. . ManLine inbacker.of motion. scrimmage. Knows. the rules.leagues.champion players.Monster. BASKETBALL (SPECTATOR) FOOTBALLBOWLING (SPECTATOR)(SPECTATOR) 169 ----Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL III - OBJECTIVE 2 Suggestions for Lesson implementation Source Materials Codes 5 Givenan intelligent en opportunity spectator, to become the - instruct. the pupil in the following:18 holes make up the average course. Books.10: L.A. City: pupil can watch a Golf match and: . the1st clubhouse.9th, 10th, 18th usually are near pp. 183-191. - I.Can .define terms: Ace. . Handicap. . A 9player holes. may play any multiple of . Bogey.Birdie. . Fazard.Handicap play. . Eachlayout. hole varies in length and general . Caddie.bunker. . Hook.Hole. . aHazards poor shot. are generally placed to penalize Clubs-Woods . MedalMatch play. . A strokesplayer endeavorsas possible to forscore each as hole.few . Course.-Irons. . Pin.Par. markersPlay starts and continues at the tee along behind the twofairway, 6 . . Fairway.Eagle.Cup. . Putt.Round.Rough. atwhichsurrounded the isgreen, bounded by which traps. by isa roughgenerally and finishes The ball is rolled . Green.Flag. . Tee.Slice. . Mostinto tournaments the hole marked are 4 byrounds the pin.or 72 holes. - Trap. . MatchMedal tournaments. (stroke play) tournaments. - Understandgame. factsthe object about ofgolf the The four major tournaments are: What Where When tournaments. . such es: HowType they of areplay. scored. MastersUS Open - (Rotates)Augusta, Ga. - Spring - - 2nd week - Easter. . Rules. BritishPGA Open - England - (Rotates) - July.August. June. 5 Givengamepupilan intelligent anand can opportunity can: watch spectatorsan Iceto becomeHockey the - Use .ice BodyBlue hockey check.line. terminology: . .Forwards. Foul. . Center.Center Ice.Red line. . .Net.Goal Offside.Goalkeeper. Cage. . Check.DefenseCrease lines.men. . Penalty box.Puck. - Understands. Face-off. the rules of . Zones.Wingmen. - Instruct the pupil in the rules and the ice hockey. .reasons for the rules. -Rules Penalties for infractions. for fouls with hockey - Penalties for incorrectkneeling,bodystick are are use calledelbowing,slashing, calledof theboarding, boarding, and holding.highaticking. charging, charging, - 'Know the nurpose of the gameiceand hockeyhow to nowplayers.score. the major championship - gameInstruct. is to the hit pupil the puckthat intothe purposetheRules goal offor area. the the puck in play. - NationalTournaments.Know the and Associates International and the - Encourageabout the the National pupil toHockey become League, conversant etc. GOLF(SPECTATOR)ICE (SPECTATOR)HOCKEY 171 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL III - OBJECTIVE 2 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials odes S Givenpupilan intelligent an can opportunity watch spectator,a Soccer to become game the - Instruct. the pupil in: The fieldcorrect area- terminology. and(See can: p.126 for Soccer). . The techniquessoccerplayers leagues. position. used. - Define. . terms: Blocking. . The rules.purpose of the game. . Cover.Clear.Charging. Scoring. . Direct,Corner Kick. free kick. . GoalDropDribble. kick.ball. . . Kicking.Indirect,Heading. free kick. . . Punt.KickPenalty off. kick. . Trap.Save.Roll in. . HandlingThrowTackle. in. of hands. - UnderstandUnderstand the the number rules. of pity?.players, and thethe playingpositions field. they 172 5 Given an opportunity to become - Instruct the pupil in: Books. pupilanand(See intelligentcan: canp.145 watch for spectator, aTennis). Tennis game the . sideline,centersinglesThe structure service court, back ofcourt,line,doubles the servicetennisetc. court, court--line, alley, 16: pp.Bucher: 251-260. - Use. tennis terminology. Ace. . grip,balls,The equipment and net, throat; and to the bethe racket--taeused--the head, and tennis thehandle, . DropDeuce.Chop. Shot. . Theracket attire face. of,the players. .. Fruit.Drive. - Teach. pupil that: Tennis may be played indoors or outdoors. . DoubleFlat Serve.Fault. . Theinto serve the mustcorrect be hitservice over court.the net and . Let.Ground Stroke. . andThe leftservice sides alternates of the service between court. the right . Match.Lob. . Thecompletion server becomes of the thegame. receiver at the . Set.Server.Receiver. bounds.returnPlay continues the ball untilor hits one the side ball fails out toof - Understand. the rules of Volley.Smash. . whichA player.intoplayer isthe thenwho correct isawarded unable area to toloses the return otherthe ballpoint 1 tennis. . A player winning 6 games wins the set. I i - Know the purpose of the game - Instruct the pupil that: I - Knowand thehow majorto score. championship . governingtennis.The U.S. bodyLawn ofTennis American Association amateur is the - tennis players. . Theinternational Davis Cup Championships tournament for is men.an Tournaments).Know(National the associations and International . Thetion Wightman for American Cup matches and English offer competi-women. SOCCER (SPECTATOR) TENNIS (SPECTATOR) 173 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION TWO - GOAL III - OBJECTIVE 2 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 5 TrackanGiven intelligent(See andan p.147 opportunityField, forspectator the Track). pupilto becomein can: - Instruct. the pupil in: The correct terminology. Books.16: pp.Bucher: 248-255. - andWatch .can Breaking.Anchor-track use theand terminology..field Jogging.Jumping events leg. . Check mark. gravity.CenterCadence. of . Mark.Meter.Momentum. Pace. . HeadFreeDrive wind.leg. leg. . PassingRecovery leg.zone. - Knowthe thepurposes events of included each event. and . hurdles,Therunning,running types long events-sprints,ofand events jump,relays; including:pole jumping distancevault, events- triple - Know the equipment used. . Thediscus,jump types and javelin, highof skills: jump and and shot throwing put. events- - KnowKnow fieldthe trackchampionship skills records. records. involved. performers. shotjump,sprinting,racing, put,running hurdlediscus distance high racing,throw, jump, running, andpolerunning javelin relayvault, long - Knowstatus.and thefield background and its currentof track . HistoricalPastthrow. and present origins records. in survival games formulated by Greeks - the . TRACK(SPECTATOR) AND FIELD 174 SKILLSRHYTHMICTHE DEVELOP ENT OF I SPECIALLOS EDUCATION ANGELES BRANCH CITY SCHOOLS P.L. 88-164, Title III J.V. 69-68 r

192 .SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS SUGGESTIONS FOR TEACHING RHYTHMS TheINTRODUCTION factionstimeNams immemorial.race of has both danced play andfor art.pleasure and worship from Dance holds within it all the satis- Its opportuni'ies for pace.Whenrealize teaching that fundamentaleach pupil hasrhythms, his own it inbornis important rhythmic to The teacher should wait until he is ready to MovementForgrouptofur. thedevelop as affectecipupil, well body asdancing individualbycontrol, a time is doing,expressiveness,structure expression being, is arelearnedacting; andmanifold. creativity. bestand is The aim of the rhythmic program for the pupil is Afteraccompanimenthim.learn the aboutfirst externalwhichexploration fits rhythm him. period, and .otan accompanimentimpose it upon Allow the pupil to begin moving and then add an co A pupil can: PURPOSEthrough danceOF A RHYTHMICactivities. PROGRAM is1. to be added: Havedynamics,they pupils are andlistening listen form. to for: the music. Good listening techniques rhythm, tempo. pitch, Point out what 2.3.I. ExpressKeepDevelop time himself physical- move creativelyin fitness. rhythm. and efficiently. 2. Havehearingare developed pupils is notclap only necessarily to with the practice.rhythm listening. - adding other Remember that 4.S. Learndynamics,accompaniment,Differentiate activities and form. between rhythm,for use the tempo,in elementsrecreation. pitch, of 3. pupilDiscuss"beat".simple to themovementsmove qualities in a helpspreferred of themthe way. movement;get the feel allow of the andcreativeTheTHE rhythmicrhythmSCOPE rhythms, -program CONTENTgymnastics singing has OF manyA(the RHYTHMgames, parts,handling PROGRAMfolk fundamental ofand objects square rhythms, indances, a 4. placeEncourageing varietyabout free, the and ideas,informal combinations. music, movement activities, and with and increas- Discussion must take rhythmic way). movement.enjoyTheimmediatefeelings interests being upon surroundings"like of which youngsomething" the children and pupils experiences.or movingcenterswill base "like on theirtheir The ability to abstract grows with age. They something." 177 SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS 5. Evaluate"What are the we movement doing that experience is good?" often. 5. andLet thenpupils with perform music. the first part, without music movementHave"How pupilscan variation.we demonstrateimprove?" a novel and interesting 9.8.7.6. AddReviewCombinePresent the other anythepart parts second partsone thatand andpart two seemcombine without with difficult. music.with music. those Asincreasinglyaboutinterested the pupilsthe when, in matureable working where, to from express inand earlya howgroup emotions childhood,of andthings. arethrough concernedthey movement.become They are 11.10. Usesometimesalready cuegroups words.learned increasesof pupils until difficultyto the demonstrate. dance in is learning. complete. Remember, too much analysis METHODS FOR TEACHING THE1. BASIC DANCE STEPS Play the music. 14.13.12. ChangeandImproveUse theless partners correctthe skilled level often.quality. toof demonstratethe dance by sometimes. adding style 4.3.2.5. HaveDemonstrate pupil step clapthe instepto placethe in rhythm. place.with the music. butThe thedevelopment greater importanceof rhythmic than skills the isdevelopment of importance, of CZ0."1. 8.6.7. HelpRaveUseDemonstrate cue individualpupils words. performthe pupils.step the moving step. forward. Thethefinished emphasis product. products should isbe theon thedevelopment process, ofnot each necessarily pupil. METHODS FOR TEACHING11.10. DANCE9. HaveCombineVary pupilthe with direction. do otherthe step steps. with a partner. BIBLIOGRAPHY Dauer,for VictorElementary P. School Children. Dynamic Physical Education Minneapolis, 1. Ask pupils to listen to the music for phrasing, Minn.:392 pp. Burgess. Publishing Company, 1969. 4.3.2. music.DemonstrateHavequality, pupils and theclaptiming. firstentire to the part dance, rhythm. to beif learnedpossible. without Murray,Education.1953. Ruth Lovell. 342 pp. New York: Dance in ElementaryHarper and Brothers, 178 SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS LosPhysical248tional Angeles pp. Services,Education City ;chools: PublicationRhythmic Activities. No. EC-198, 1958. Division of Instruc- Children.Schurr,1967. Evelyn L. 569 pp. New York: Movement Experiences F**1- Appleton Century-Crofts, Ca, No.UnifiedAnTeachertional InstructionalSC -651, SchoolResourcePlanning /969. District: Bulletin.Materialand Services, for Folk Publication Dance. 44 pp. Division of Instruc-Los Angeles City

179. THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS ASSESSMENT FOR SECTION THREE beThe used following by the pagesteacher contain to: an assessment device to motivationalThe assessment tool device for pupilscan be towardvery effective self-improvement. as a I. Pre-Test.theto determineInstructional the placementSequences. of the pupil within Assess the abilities of the pupil Thisresponsiblepost-test,If device the pupil is hefor intended thenis his involved becomesown as progress. a inmoremeans the interested topre-test, aid the in instruction,teacher and 2.3. pupil.Post-Test.Instruct. Teach the appropriateMeasure the sequences.improvement of the Therefore,asnecessaryinto adetermining evaluatetest theareasto measuremarkingthem theof ininstruction.pupil's thesystemrelation pupils needs, to to beagainst aabilities,used standardized shouldeach otherand be norm.the or It is not intended cr;c47, pupil'sand then needs uses andthe abilitiesassessment in device performing toThe sequencesdetermine teacherassessment the neces- toentaimatesthe makedevice it Was-beenmorethe abilitiesusable coordinated for of the the teacher. withpupil, the Theorevaluation individual teacher"no" may mayof beand the selectappropriate, flexiable. pupil. and use in his others, own symbols a scale for ranging In some cases a simple "yes" pupil.difficulty,appropriatearyto skills.plan for dependinglevel, the individualization increasing upon the andperformance decreasing of instruction. of thethe This serves as an aid to the teacher in order He then adjusts the instruction to an wellapplicable,aboutisfrom with planned the1 leftto performance 4etc. to arm,might give needs bethe ofmore improvementteacherthe usable. pupil; space forwith to example, right,make notes notdoes The comment column 180 sscnoit =HEX - THE RNYTHMIC SKILLS remonearr Dan COMMENTS GOAL. I. 1. AndMovesrhythmsClaps Develops Effectively or - beats(rvem-unaccented, A Sense time And Of toCreatively, Rhythm.various even- 2. temposClapsuneven-accented)accented, or- (fast,beats uneves-unaccented, timeslow).. to various ti 3.4. ClapsDifferentiatesdynamicslow or pitch. beats - (loud time between or to soft). differing high and 6.5. moveslamsphrasesChanges timein various change.histo evenmovements ways. rhythm as andmusical 8.7. Seepssaveskeepsmoves intime arms, various into legs,placeuneven ways. andand rhythm body. and SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OP AH1THMIC SHILLS COMMENTS 10. 9. ofImitatesCombineslocomotor things ormovingand movementspantomimes puts in itplace andto a music.varietywithkeeps time. iii GC

182 SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS DATES GOAL II. Performs Basic Steps And Dances. COMMENTS 2.1. Performs step-swingstep-hop to to music. music. . 4.3. Performs thetwo-step schottishe to music. to music. , -6.5. PerformsPerforms the the polka waltz to to music. music. 8.7. Performs athe simple mazurka folk to dance. music. GOAL III. 1. HandlesusingPerforms ball,Objects a rhythmichoops, In A ropes, Rhythmicroutine etc. toPattern. music 183, SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS ObjectiveGoal I. 1. ThepupilProvide pupil can eachcanmove move pupileffectively to with the aelements andvariety creatively ofof music,basic to movementrhythm,develop (even-uneven),aactivities sense of rhythmto rhythmicaltempo, in conjunction(fast-slow), accompaniment with pitch, these so that movements. the Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions (high-low), dynamics, (soft-loud), Form, (phrasing), keeping time to accompaniment. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 1 andGiven move an toopportunity accompaniment to listen which - hand,Let pupil the fingersclap with of oneeach finger hand, onand each . Books.105: Mursell: -hasthe an pupil even-unaccented can: rhythm,Clap or beat time. - Askinstrumentsfinally pupil withto beatto his accompany drumwhole or hand. usemovement. self-made Equipment.117: Shurr:pp. 2,8, 12. p.28I. -- Steptime.Follow in placethe leader in rhythm. keeping - DrawconditionAdaptto rhythm.lines the of movementon the a chalkboard,pupil. to the handicapping pupil claps RhythmChalkboard.Chalk. Instruments. 2 Giventhedifferencesand pupilmovean opportunity tocan: inmusic pitch which to (high,low), listen has - objectsShowround,low pupilsmovements whichoil pictureswell might (horses pump, move - largeetc.).on with a merrry-go- andhigh small and Pictures.Equipment. A - Stand tall on a high pitch. - Teachthe Rosy"songs andand "Thegames, Merry-Go-Round." i.e. "Ring Around - MoveStoopdifferent hand on higha pitches.low and note. low, on - Draw blank Lownotation on chalkboard. High 184 - Ask pupil to move ofhands music in andthe playdirection high and low notes on 2 moveenceGiven to in anmusic dynamics opportunity which (louder, has to a listendiffer- softer), and animalsShowsongbells.little pupils whichsteps pictures might(elephants, move of largewith bears, bigand hippopotami,andsmall AnimalEquipment. pictures. -the Clap pupil loudly, can: and softly.stepsStep inand place louder using steps. softer asraccoons, 4ynimals mice, might sheep). move. Let children move 3 movetempoGiven to (fast,anmusic opportunity withslow), a changeClapthe to pupillistenfast, in can: andand slow. - -Encourage Ask pupil movement to moveDrawwithoutgoing inin all blankvariousslowly touching.directions notation (faster,directions on etc.) chalkboard Eraser.Autoharp.Equipment.Chalkboard.Chalk. - Clap increasing, andspeed.Stepspeed. decreasirg increasing,in place fast, and anddecreasing slow. - Let pupil play songbellsillustrateclapfast, and or move autoharptempo. to notation. to slow ; slow , fast. Let pupil Songbells. 3 moveaccentedGiven to anmusic rhythm,opportunity which the has pupilto an listen even--tan: and 105:Books. Mursell: p.92 - ClapStep louderin place on andthe stampaccent.lightly on the accent. - Draw blank notationclaps on toblackboard. the rhythm. Pupil Drums.Chalkboard.Equipment.CLalk. Have pupil play rhythm on resonator bells, =mar mom'---...., momm---- - asa--. Eraser.Resonator bells. drum. ElgMENTS OF NMSIC 185. SECTION THREE - COAL I. OBJECTIVE 1 Levels 4 moveGivenSequencesunaccented to an music opportunity- Teachingrhythm, that has theProgressionsto an listenpupil uneven, can:and Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - StepClapWalk, inor infollowing placebeat varying time.in therhythm.directions. leader. - Draw blank notationShortclaps on Shorttoblackboard. the rhythm. Long_ , Short Short Pupil Long 5 moveGivenaccented to an music opportunity rhythm, that thehas to pupilan listen uneven, can: and - Encourage the pupilthedirections availableto move inwithout space. different touching and use all of - FollowMoveStep in the varyingplace leader. in directions.Clap rhythm,ing louderlightly stamp- on on the the accent. accent. - Draw blank notationphrasesthe to rhythm. representon the chalkboard notes and and pupil claps 1111 p can:discernablemoveGiven to an music opportunity phrases, which has theto easilylistenpupil and - Let pupil moveidentify onearesame directionphrasesdifferent by the which forletterby "B",phraseare "A"the"C", "A",and etc. phrases which Books.105: 54: Mursell:Gary:p. 397. p.89 LA - WalkStep andin placechange and movementsdirections phrasechange change. armto to phrase changes. phraseDrawanotherpupil blank and identifydirection keepingnotations phrases forquiet on phrase blackboard,byon clappingthe "B", next etc. haveonphrase. the MusicalEquipmentInstruments. - Walk to1 phrasephrase, forward next4 2fast slow phrase andsteps steps the backward, and to next, etc. etc. - GiveLet pupilletter play names phrasesmusicaletc. Clapto blank Clap oninstruments. songbellsnotation. Clap Clap; or Waitother Wait Wait Wait, Let Songbells. - Walk a phrase and theclapturn next. theardund next. in pupil play notes on songbells. etc cc-4 186 Goal I. effectivelyProvide each and pupil creatively with a varietyto develop o2 basica sense movement of rhythm activities in conjunction to music with so thatthese the movements. pupil can move SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC STILLS ObjectiveLevels 2. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can move from place to place keeping time to accompaniment. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes, 3 movementGiven- Movean toopportunity his -music, body therhythmically to pupil explore can: - UseEncourage words suchpupil as orto "Howrhythmmove does and to thefithis musictherhythm. beat tell A - Invent his own movements.originaldevelopmentalaccording to hislevel. own individual you to move?" . 4 movementGiven an toopportunity music with to other explore - Encourage pupil andto useto movethe completewithout touchingspace the other Books. 90: L.A. City: A pupils- Move in in a variousgroup, thelevels.directions. pupil will: - Use words such aspupilb. "Who"Show can..." us how you can..." "Let's see..." "Ho-,T can 105: Maxwell:pp.pp. 6, 101-106. 7. - Move usingin various various speeds. times. - Use songs, i.e.:you..."try..." "What can you..." "Tippy, Tippy, Tiptoe." "Who can . i LOCOMOTORELEMENTS OFMOVEMENT MUSIC 187 SECTION THREE - GOAL I. OBJECTIVE 2 Levels 5 mentj1,....7..1.patoaccaniGivenSequences with an anyopportunity - Teachingeven rhythm, toProgressions walk, the run,- Suggestions- Encourage for pupil Lesson teacherto listenImplementation is thencounting clap time.while instruments.PercussiveEquipment.Source Materials Codes AL pupil- -JumpingWalking Walkingcan keep onceforward in time place.and andwhile:more sideward. than once. - Use percussive instrumentsand tambourines such andas drumsthen music. Records.135: Activities.Basic Rhythmic - Jumping forward, backwardsideways. and . 6 - Jumping bast and slow. - -Walking Walking with sideward, fast,usinglightlong, slow, backward, different steps.high, short, low,aid- floor 'heavy, patterns, and . - UseWork-with a song totalsuch partizipate.as,group "Rig-A-Jig-Jig." so that all may 178Records. RhythmIs Fun. L - HoppingWalking forward.ononcechanging either andward moredirectionfoot. left than and once.side- sideward right. - RunningJumpingHopping andsidewardheavyhighin place.stopping. andand and low.soft. backward. _ 188 7 - Hopping sidewardand turning. and backward. - Praise continuously for efforts made. Books. 39: Dauer: L - JumpingHoppingWalking withvaryingand running,holdinga partner. distances.different freeincreasing leg positions. in Records. 46: Fait: pp. 95-98.237-239. - -Jumping Jumping alternating landing crossedandwith feet decreasing feet forwardand uncrossed. speed. 159:134: Skills.IndianandBasic Ball Motor - Running in differentand back.floor directions patterns. Album. . - -Leaping RunningBopping once withto aand long,definite severalpattern.and short, light rhythmic times. heavy,steps. - Ask pupil to hop twiceleft,on right, onetc. left twice and on once right and once on - -Leaping Leaping changing high, low, leadslow. fastfoot. and - Ask pupil to hop backside andof aforth real onor eachimaginary line. ,

LOCOMOTOR MOVEMENTS 189 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION THREESuggestions - GOAL I. for Lesson Implementation OBJECTIVE 2 Source Materials Codes 8 unevengallop,Giventime anwhile:rhythm, slide opportunity tothe music pupil to with skip,can ankeep - Encourage totalmovements haveallgroup directions. topupils participation be performed use the entireandin area and move Equipment.Books.106: pp.Nagel: 92-156. A - Skipping toforward a floor and(circle, pattern, backward. square). - Use walk step firstwithoutother then movementstouching. incorporate to the game and song ments.Records.Rhythm Instru- - GallopingSkipping lightlyforward. and heavily. - Use game and songsactivities.and i.e.: "Round and Round the Village." "Looby Lou" 158:140: ToLikeRhythms.ChildhoodI Shetland.Should To Go - Galloping tohigh, a floor low,slow. pattern.fast and - -Sliding Sliding forward, fast and sideward,and slow short with andsteps. long - Sliding highto a andfloor low.backward. pattern. - Skipping, gallopingwithetc.) anda partner sliding (three, four, 190 Goal I. Provide each pupil with a variety of basic movement activities to"music so the pupil can move SECTION THXTE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS f Levels!Objective Sequences 3. - Teaching Progressions Theeffectively pupil can andmove creatively in place keepingto develop time a tosense the ofaccompaniment. rhythm in conjunction with these movements. Suggestions fr Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 3 rhythmically:placeGiven toan music,opportunity the pupil to move can in - Encourage pupil tolevels,in move one in directionand place speeds. and before face changing directions, Books.106: pp.Nagel: 140-147. - RiseBendTwist and and fall.stretch. turn. - Ask pupils to seemusic.hips, theirhow etc.),many arms ways (legs,while they keepingtrunk, can move head,time tohands, the chest, ResonatorSongbells.Drums.Equipment. Bells. Z\ZC=, - Swing and sway. - Point out-the factatbefrontor araisedthat curved;time; orarms andback;that to andlowered themovement legsthat side togethercanthe ofmay repetition the be and/orbodystraight or maybeone to Records.180:190: ShoemekerssRhythmDance. Time. - Be aware of the vibratory,percussive,onequalities or many. ofand pendularmovement- collapsed. 4winging), sustained, LOCOMOTOR MOVEMENTS AXIAL MOVEMENTS 191 SECT/ON THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OP MIMIC SKI IS ObjectiveCoal I. 4. TheProvideeffectively pupil each can pupilandcombine creatively with movements a variety to developrhythmically, of basic e sense movement moving of rhythm activitiesfrom inplace conjunction toto musicplace sowithand that movingthese the movements.inpu'il place. can move Levels 9 GivenSequences an opportunity- Teaching Progressionsto explore Suggestions- Use sentences for Lesson such asImplementation "Can you think of Records.Source Materials Codes; A moving_keep- Walk!mg, time to music,while: bopping, the andpupil jumping, moving can etc.,his bead, arms, legs, - Be aware of swinging,turning,doesother the waysswaying, rising,music to move telltwisting; lowering, toyou the to music?"bending,do?"- "7-That 163: Music.SkillsLearning to Basic - Walking, bopping,wayselbows, running,jumping, as possible. knees, skipping, etc., galloping,in as many - Encourage use ofmovements.and variousstretching, directions levels, in of combination speeds,movements. with locomotor andasasseessliding, bending, turning).=angrier's time, leaping, twisting,moving as possible hisand, swinging, body at (such thein . "Can you hoprunand together?"anda partner slide?"jump and skip turn?" and leap

192 Goal I. Provide each pupil with a variety of basic movement activities to music so that the pupil can move SECTION THREE THE DEVELt.:1(ENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS Levelseibjective 5. Sequences - Teaching Progressions Theeffectively punt! can and creatively creatively express to develop himself a sensethrough of movement.rhythm in conjunction with these movements. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Coues Giventhedramatize pupilsan opportunity thecan: movement to imitateof animals, and - Discuss the characteristicsanimals. "How prior does of to theit the move?"look?"various rhythms lesson. Books. 39:23: Clark:Dauer: pp.7.1-33pp. 100- 101. - Crawl like a seal,Ualkworm,giraffe, caterpillar, likebug. andog, elephant, bear, turtle. lion, . "Would it move withsteps?""What big sizedoes steps isit it?"do?"or little Eouipment.104: Murray: pp. 33- 49. - -Roo JumpRun like likelike a arabbit,a pony,frog. ostrich,kangaroo. etc. - Accompany the movements. of pupils withthe'animal"Haw would asyou possible?" move to be as much like Records.Instruments.Percussion - ReadDiscuss stories pictures about ofpercussive animals. animals. instruments. 140:131: Rhythms.SeriesChildhoodSongs.Activity 5 Play Givencharacters,story an book opportunity andthe make-believepupil to can:dramatize - Use characters which"Askreading are Mr. a activities, Bear"part ofby theirM. i.e.:Flack. Books.104: Murray:3?: Dauer: - Imitate Jacka giant. Frost,Bizmptydragon, witch, Peter Dumstv, brownie,gnome, Rabbit, Simple elf, Simon, etc. - Incorporate varioustumbling"Winnie"jack types end Theofactivities The stuntPooh" Bean andby Stalk."to A. imitate A. Milne. the AXIAL120: Stein: pp. 4-8. pp. 33-49 characters. CREATIVE EXPRESSION /LocomaroR 193 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION THREESuggestions - GOAL I. for Lesson Implementation OBJECTIVE 5 Source Materials Codes . "Crab"Bear"Egg Sit"Walk". Dumpty. Walk". and "Egg Roll" for Humpty 5 pupilvariousandGiven pantomine can:an objects opportunity the of movementsplay, to explorethe of - Incorporate variousactivitiessuch .stunts Bouncing as: toand beBall. tumbling performed on soft surface Books.120: Stein: pp. 7-14. - -Spin SwingRoll like likelike a atop.a ball.swing. . HumanWring Ball.the Dishrag.1/4 and 1/2 top spin. Records.170:152: lizMusic.Fun Playful with - -Walk Rock like like a arag rocking mechanicaldoll, horse.a man. . . Scarf. 6 Given- Move an likeopportunity various towind-up experi- toys. - Look at pictures of people performing Records. meatcan:occupations- withDramatize various of the people, activities movements the pupilandof sol- - Discuss types of activitiespeoplevariousthey work,do; types andwhat the ofjobs they toolsactivities. wear, they whatuse. and how 144:138: A TheStoryDanceBuildingCity. Brave AboutA diers,pilots,tightropethelumberjacks, moon, firemen, etc. walkers,Indians, astronautsclowns, bunters,carpenters, jugglers, on - Have pupils imitateactivities. and dramatize the 192: Hunter.Games.Singing 194 7 ofexploreGiven machines, an the opportunity functionthe pupil andto can: studymovene.t and - Encourage pupilimitate to imitate the sound the themovement machine and makes. 182:Records. Hour.The Rhythms - Imitate a train,rocketroper, plane,jack hammer,spboat, hell- ce ship,steam windmill, etc.shovel, oil pump, - Let a few pupilsuse imitate of voice the and/orsounds rhythmby instruments. 226:16mm Films. WhatMovementExploration- Am I? Givenin anan opportunityevent (field to trip, participat Petty. - Rave pupils listenmusic tofirst. the story or the Books.104: holiday,pupil- Going can excursion, todramatize: the zoo. etc.), the - Have a few beginthe the total dramatization group is participating.until Equipment.Scarves. pp.Murray: 33-49. - VisitingGoingAttending to athe atoyball partycircus. store. Christmas,game. (Halloween, birthday, etc.). - Use of streamers,the scarves, learning. etc., add to Records.Streamers.181: Activities.Rhythmic Givenpupilexplore an can opportunityveclous dramatize: procedures, to study theand - LetDiscuss pupil various choose typeshis favorite of daily thing activities. to do. Books.100: Murray:pp. 33-49. - WakingFlyingMakingBuilding a dress.kite.casks.a house. - Encourage all to participate at one time. Records.127:101: AdventuresDftuer: p.101. - MakingChoppingCleaning a Catching asnowmen.down thefish. ahouse, tree. the yard. 135: PlayCreativeChildren'sin Rhythms.Songs. CREATIVE EXPRESSION 195. SECTION THREE - COAL I. OBJECTIVE 5 Levels II) . awareGivenSequences ofan theopportunity - elementsTeaching to ofProgressions becomenature Suggestions- Encourage for use Lesson of total Implementation body and space. - Books.Source100: Materials Murray: Code pupiland-Wind, differences can rain,interpret: snow,in seasons, thunder,lightning, the sunshine. - Use instruments bourines;suchvarious as drums colors.Tom perms,and tam- and streamers of PoeEquipment. Poms. pp. 33-49. - Flowers,Clouds, oceantrees, waves, leaves.streams. rivers, Records.Streamers.Instruments.Rhythmic 11 Given an opportunity to nave to - Keep the moods and feelings to be expressed Books.147: .-- GardenVarieties. moods-can Happiness, expressand feeli2gs, in gaiety, movement: cheerfulness,the bravado, pupil silliness, humor, - Encourage and emphasizewithinto convey the the experiences theuse emotionsof movement of rather the pupil. than sounds. 100: 57: pp.Murray:p.L.A. 33-49.193. City: - Sadness, fear, anger,sleepiness,grief,boldness, solemnity, disgust, joy, and surprise,cautiousness.yearning, etc. - Let pupils see iftheyparticipants they are can making. guess are feelinghow the by the movement Records.175: Activities.Rhythmic 196 11 stimulationGiventhe pupilan opportunity canof thereact visual toto: move sense, after - Incorporate variouspictures,lesson, visual suchetc., aids as andintopour organize theposts, streamers, according to Pictures.Paper.PaintEquipment. Brushes. t V - -Drawings.Color-yellow, Design (lines, brown, shapes).orange, blue, green, red, etc. - Discuss types ofmove materialspurpose--color(straight as the andmaterials and have (warmcurved), pupils andand objectsetc.cool) line make Tempera.Streamers.Pour Pons. - -Paintings. Light.Sculpture. - Use 1 or 2 colorsthem thelargeof feel.childrentempera sheets pintareof paper. toand move: Paint lines the way - Stop the.092 activity rif\a..°when interest is high. /r,...:0":*\'"'-.'1% 11 Giventhestimulation an pupil opportunity can of react the to auditory to:move after sense, - Encourage the pupilswalkillustrate -to "da-da-da-da" use a asound movement to for -11Ummea run. for a heavy "Slush" Books. 85: pp.Latchaw: 141, a. - Words, poems, highsounds.low pitched pitched voice, voice, loud, soft - Ask the pupils questions:of?""Whatfor a slide,does the etc. music (sound) make you think 100: Murray:pp.143-148. 93-95. - -Songs. Percussive instrumentsshakers,sticks, drums, claves,maracas, coconut bells, shells,etc. "Rowdo?""What can does you the move (sound) to this music, (sound) tellmake music?" you tofeel?" - Melodic music -moving, swinging,strong,gay, lively, grotesque, sad, delicate, slow, weird, grave,flowing. - UseEncourage songs i.e.:the pupils"Scary",their to owndescribe "Draggy", words music- "Bane',etc. in "Tinkly", "Little Red Caboose", "The WindGallant Blew Ship", East". "Jigglity-Jogglity", "The CREATIVE EXPRESSION 197 Leveler Sequences - Teacbiag Progressions SECTION THREE - COAL I. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation OBJECTIVE 5 Source Materials Codes 11 vixenthestimulation pupilan opportunity can of react the sensetoto: move of aftertaste, - Use actual examplescandy.as salt, When lemonpossible juice, -- suchgreen fruit, sugar, Books.89:58: Latcham:p.L.A. 193. City: - Something sweet.tastingsour.salty. cold.tart. -Use songs such Down",as, "Boil "Mix the a PanCabbage Cake". FoodEquipment. to taste. pp. 110, 113. 22 Giventhestimulation pupilan opportunity can of react the scenetoto: move of aftersmell, - Use examples thatexperiences. are within their - PinePopcorn.BaiaBarbecue boughs.upon smoke.the earth. - Use songs such as,Kettle "Polly On." Put.the 12 Giventhestimulation- Softpupilan opportunity - canheed. to react the sensetoto: move of aftertouch, - Use examples such straitsilkas wood, materials, mat*, pine plastic, cotton, crepe carpeting, paper, etc. cones, Wood.PineFabric.Equipment. Cones. - -ShsTp slick.Silky.Smooth - dull.- rough. - Use songs such Firewood."as, "The Egg", "Sawing 198 12 Givenpupilsupincorporatefocus, a problemsdance; can dissension, compose space,the in factorsdance astyle, dynamics,dance: which that level, makethe . - WhichWith aexpresseshas beginning, an idea end.the ormiddle, idea theme. well. and - WhichWithOf an smoothhasShowsappropriate movements newtransitions. utilizemovements. length. that the whole body.

CREATIVE EXPRESSION , SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF Rimmic SKILLS ObjectiveGoal XI. 1. mazurka,knownTheProvide pupilas dance.andeach can use pupilperform them with in the simplean walking opportunity dances. step, tostep-hop, learn the step-swing, basic steps two and -step, to combine schottische, them into polka, definite waltz, forms Levels 1 GiventheSequences walkingan opportunity - stepTeaching to tomusic, Progressions practice the -Suggestions -Encourage Practice pupilforthe Lessonwalking tomusic. listen Implementation step carefully first. to the Books.Source117: Materials Schurr: Codes -pupil WplkWalk can: inchangingmoving place. forward. directions. - -EmphasizePerform Verbalize the the thestep facts: step towalk," the- "walk, music.as the walk, child walk, moves. Records.142: Circle.Circassianp. 277. - -Walk Walk changing iu simple armfloorspeeds. dances games,positions. patterns. (singingfolk, round, square). . StayMaintainStart when a generalthe musicthe directionmusic starts stops. andpattern. stop when in his own space. 155:15.4: Glow, worm. Green-sleeves. 2 pupilandGiven practice can:an opportunity the step-hop, to learn the - Instruct the pupil to:. Listen to the music (2/4 or 4/4 time). Books. 60: Hackett: L - -Step-hop Step-hop moving in place. forward.Step-hop changing directions. . ClapHop 4to accentingtimes the regularon L,thebeats. Repeat.hop firstbeat. 4 times on R. of every two 136:Records. Mt.Norwegianp. 31. Dance. - Step-hop raisingusing variouspatterns.Step-hop freeforward, leg floor increasing knee bent, speed. straight. - Verbalize the movementstep-bop,. Hop pattern, 2 timesstep-hop, "step-hop, on L, step-hop." Repeat.hop 2 times on R. 137:188: SevenBleking. Jumps. 200 - Step-hopthe rear, raising knee bent,free legstraight. to - step-hopDraw a line to thedesign design, and instruct pupils to - Step-hop raising free leg to ,... - ' -- ' .,....4 - the side with knee straight. ..- - - . .., .. -, ... -- - Step-hopswingingdiagonallyStep-hopthe body, holding arms,swinging across clappingarms the out, frontfree hands, legof or step-hop the design of their name. `..- ..'' - .1.J.L,R.otherStep-hopetc.run, locomotoretc.) step in combinationL, stepsteps R, (walk, hopwith R, 0 zt I y 3 can:practiceGiven an theopportunity step-swing, to learnthe pupil and - Instruct. the pupil to: time).Listen to the music (2/4, 3/4 or 4/4/ 187:157:Records. Bora.Sel ancica. L - -Step-swing using various Stop-SwingStep-swing movingin place. forward. . beataeveryClap into accentingthree 2/4the andregularbeats the4/4; in first beat. and3/4 count-of omit every one count twoof - Step-swingwalks,Stepdirections -swing runs, within andstamps, combination partners.floor etc. patterns. with . ofSwingSteptwo the sidewayd and theright clapleft and to onleg theatcount across theR on three.same theand time Rin foot. frontraise - Step-swing in simple dances. . Verbalize"Step,and lower heel the thetime. -step. rightstep, heel.heel" or 4/4 or 2/4 - Variations:. Step"Step,step forward backwardswing, and heel' and raise raisefor leg 3/4 leg to time. forward.the rear, (Called Balances). BASIC STEPS 201 SECTION THREE - GOAL II. cmacrIvE Levels 4 SequencesGivenpractice an opportunity -the Teaching two-step, Progressionsto learnthe pupil and 1 I Suggestions- instruct for the Lesson pupil Implementation. to:Listen to the music (2/4 or 4/4 time). Records.Source171: Materials Oklahoma Codes L can:- Two-step inforward, place.backward. sideward, . ClapClsp the rhythm two,counttwopattern (and)" three,of oftwo. 4/42/4holdfour, - the one,"oz:hold "and" andcount after four. the 143: Mixer.Joe.Cotton-Eyed - -Teo-step Two-step in inwith various combination a positions.patterns.variety floor withof arm . .Gallop Gallop 248 8times times lardingleading leading withwith with L.R.R- L. - Two -step in simpleother dances. steps. . .Gallop Left, 2together, times UseleadingslidesRight, leftthe sameandtogether,with -you sequencesR. have right, a abovetwo-step and (gallop) to the with side. 5 can:Givenpractice an opportunity the schottische, to learn the and pupil - Instruct the pupil to:. ClapListen theloud to even onthe count4/4 meter. schottischeone and snap music. fingers ,Records. 187:145: Sellancica.Schottische.Danish L - -Schottische Schottische forward.diagonallyin forwardbackward. place. but sideward. raise . RunUse towordthree cues, beats "Step-together-step-hop." "Run,onand count hop run, on4 run,(wherecount hop." four.hop comes). 4/4 music (one run for every beat). - -Schottische Schottische backward varyingtherear.free andfree theleg raise speed.leg(on forward.the hop) to the 202 - Schottische varying the arm position. . - Schottischehopswith -other 2 schottisches). stepswithin combination a(4 partner. seeps- 6 Given- an opportunity to learn Schottische in simple dances. - Instruct the pupil to: Records. can:and practice the polka, the pupil . ClapListen to tothe the music. polka music. 143:139: Cotton-EyedButterfly. L - Polka in place. . beat.Use a snap of the fingers on the hop 161: Kalvelis.Joe. - rear.freePolka legforward.forward (on the - raisinghop) to thethe . ExecutePerform8ceding facing slidingtheeach in two-step andtwo-step. steps 8 facing withto the aout hopright - pre-4 in,- - Use. word cues: "Hop4 out two-step- 2 facing right, in, 2hop facing two-step out. left." . "Hop, step, closestep, step." run, run, run." 7 practiceGiven an opportunitythe waltz, the4.a pupillearn can:and - Instruct. the pupil to: Listen to a drum beat "one, two, three" 194:Records. - WaltzWaltz in backward, place. forward, . ofTake each(accent one measure. step count sidewarys one). on count one Hold on counts two 119: WaltzWaltz.Bells.Spinning of the - WaltzMaltzWaltz in in avarious boxrunning formation. floor waltz. patterns+ . StepandListen three forward to (the music taking feet and willa reheatlong alternate), step above. on - Waltzin and inwith out,simple a partner.turn. dances. "one",tiny stepa medium on. "three". one on "two", and a -...... _____ 203 SECTION THREE - COAL II. OBJECTIVE 1 Levels Sequences Teaching Progressions Suggcstions for Lesson Implementation. Move forward taking a long first step L Source Materials Code . Repeat above movingside,andfoot,side, bringback together."a together."short -L "Backward,foot step close sideward up to withR. R foot "Forward, 8 Givenpracticecan: an opportunity the mazurka, to thelearn pupil and - Instruct the pupil. to:-.Clap ListenClap :accenting to to the the beat countsmusic "Onm, one two, and three."two. (3/4 time). Records.176: LittlePut Your Foot. - Mazurka inmoving place. forward.forward, hop- . .Stand StandMoveAccent inforward countsplace, step onestepstep. L,andL, stepR,two and R,with holdhop a onheavierL. R - in place step L, R, and hop on R. - -Mazurka Mazurka with in simplea partner.swinging dances. the free leg. . Lead L. R, downStep forL, Stepthe nextR, hop lead on step.R. hop-swinging the free leg 204 SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS ObjectiveGoal II. 2. TheformsProvide pupil known eachcan as usepupil dance. the with basic an folk opportunity dance steps to learnin a plannedthe basic pattern steps andand sequence.to combine them into definite Levels 9 GivenSequences an opportunity - Teaching toProgressions use and -Suggestions for Lesson ImplementationUse various types of dances from many Books.Source Materials Codes -dance,enjoy thethe basicpupil skillscan: of folk - Begingeographical the class areas. with a familiar dance, 48:39: Dauer:L.A.City:pp. 206-236. L fromPerform many many countries. folk dances ' - Givethen theintroduce pupils thea chance, new dance. occasionally, 49: pp..1-153.pp.L.A.City: 1-14?. - bulletins.Useto teachingselect a guidesfavorite and dance. instructional 108: 58: EducationPhysicalpp.L.A.City: 157-181. 123: p.L.A.City:pp.Committee:Framework 44. 30-31. 168:Records. ModernBand Tunes.Rhythm FOLKBASIC DANCES STEPS 205 SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS Objective Goal3. II. TheProvideforms pupil knowneach can pupilasuse dance. the with basic an opportunitySquare Dance to formations learn the andbasic patterns steps andin dances.to combine them into definite Levels GivenSequences an opportunity - Teaching to Progressions learn and Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationEmphasize importance of the call, to Books.Source Materials Codes practice-can: square dance, the pupil - movefollow at thedirections proper time.and to be ready to . 39: p.Dauer: 225 L - SwingBalance."walking-step".Perform - buzz the step.basic square dance - UsewhenHave theconfused.pupils "shuffle return step" to homeor "walking-step". positions Records.195: - Square,Dances. - RightAllemandeleft.Execute and theleftleft. grand through. right and - AdaptDo not for allow wheelchair pupils topupils. skip. 160: SquareIt's Fun Dance. to - LadiesPromenade. choice. . . - Elbow swing. . - Do-si-do.Do-sa-do.HonorSashay. his partner, corner. 206. Goal III. rhythmicProvide eachpattern. pupil with an opportunity to develop skill in handling a variety of objects in a SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT 7F RHYTHMIC SKILLS LevelsObjective 1. Sequences - Teaching Progressions ballThe pupilin a rhythmiccan perform pattern. ball handling skills, such as swinging, rolling, tossing, and bouncing a Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Code 1 Givenaswinging ball, an opportunitythe movements pupil can: whileto practice handling - PlayUse 6"waltz utility rhythm ball. (or 6/8 time). Books.44: Drury: pp.34-36. - Perform a wrist grasp.. Hold the ball inbendingbetween one hand the wristpalm andat rightforearm, - EncourageEmphasize creativegood posture.questions movements. such as: Use - Perform a forward swing.. HoldSwing ball arms at forward side.angles. to ball?""Canthe"Who ball?" we can move think our offeet another as we wayswing to theswing . Repeat.Change ball to otherswingshoulder hand arms height.and back. - Encourage variations.. WalkForward forward. stride and- shift back. weight forward - Perform a swing across. SwingHold the armsbody.ball atdiagonally shoulderout to theacrossheight side. . .gold TurnSlideBending, ball around. to intheturning, both side. hands. twisting trunk. . Change hands andother therepeat body.side. for BALLFOLK DANCESHANDLING 207. Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION THREE - GOAL III. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation OBJECTIVE 1 Source Materials Codes - Circle forward,horizontally. backward,. Swing the ball backward.,forward, upward,and foreward again. - Encourage pupils to. .Aexecute: Awaltz spiral turn. swing. - Circle around the body.. ChangeReverseSwing ballhands. directions. in front of body, - . Reverse directions.backchange of body,hands, change carry hands.ball in . 2 Givenrolling an opportunitya ball, the topupil practice can: 44:Books. pp.Drury: 36-37. V - Perform a floor roll.. .Shift Stand weight with feetto rightballbent. apart, fromand knees, rollright to left Balls.Equipment. - around body. Reversewhile sit- directions.handleft.letting as weight it roll is intoshifted left - Encourage creativity. ing. Straighton floor. legs, hands.bendingrolllengthwise ball trunk around and changing legs by - Instruct pupil to smooth,keep movements and rhythmic. graceful, . V seat - roll ball under legs. 208 - Roll ball on legs.. .Lift Place the ball onlettrunk the it feetbackward. roll and down to the chest. the legs tilting the - Roll ball on floorarms, while:shoulders,. Turning.Turning and jumping.sliding. Given an opportunity toand practice in hands. - Encourage variations. Books. V tossing- Perform a ball, a one-hand the pupil toss. can: andToss catch the ballwith uptwo with hands. R hand . .Crossed Jumping.Turning.Moving feet.forward. Equipment.44: Drury pp. 39-40. . ChangeStand inhands. forwardball forward.stride with -R tosshand and L leg Reverse. . Catch with hands crossed, etc. Balls. - Perform a two-hand toss.. StartRise onwith toes the as ball thetossed. lowball and is - Perform an overhead .toss. Toss returnto the to other same overposition. the head. the ball from one hand - -TossPerform Perform to a apartner.run, front leap swing toss. toss. BALL HANDLING 209 SECTION THREE - GOAL III - OBJECTIVE I Levels 4 GivenSequencesbouncing an opportunity the - Teachingball, theto Progressions practicepupil can: Suggestions- Encourage for pupil Lesson ball.to keepImplementation his eyes on the Balls.Equipment.Source Materials Codes - 3ounce with an arm swing.. Bounce a ball andhorizontallyswing swing back arms into timesides to and catch Records.134: andBasic Ball Motor . Bounce a ball underacrosswiththe a the ball.theknee legs. body. bent. 185: Handling.andRopeSkills. Ball Jumping . Bounce a ball andWithmovingkick.sideward, turn. a scissorforward, backward. . .Bounce Schottische.Grapevine.Bounce a aball ball with withof steps.a avariety partner- 5 Given an opportunity to . combineSlides. Equipment. V balltossing,- activities,Work outbouncing, a rhythmicswing, theto tolling, music.pupil"routine" can: Records.Balls.172: O'Leary. 210 . SECTION THREE THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS ObjectiveGoal III. 2. Themanner.Provide pupil eachcan performpupil with rope anactivities, opportunity such to asdevelop jumping skill and inswinging handling in aa varietyrhythmic of pattern. objects in a rhythmic Levels 1 GivenswingingSequences nn opportunity a rope,- Teaching the to pupil practiceProgressions can: Suggestions for Lesson ImplementationUse music with 3/4 or 6/8 time. JumpEquipment.Source Ropes. Materials Codes - Circle. with extended arms. Fold rope 4 times. . ExtendHoldright end armhand. of and folded make ropea circle in Kneel and swing rope over head.whenbodyChangeforward rope and rope isrepeat.(upward into otherfrom and of handbackward). . headHoldSwingrightFold andend ropehand.rope asof 4 thefolded backwardtimes. rope rope swingsover in Sit and swing rope. ward.onReturnoverhead, heels toas kneelingleanit swings back position. andfor- sit . , Fold rope 4 times. . bentSitoneHold hand.on andend one circleof hip folded with rone ropeknees in in BALL HANDLING front of body. ROPES 211 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION THREE - GOAL III. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation OBJECTIVE 2 Source Materials Codes - Stand and circle trunk. ropeShiftandOn third takewith to ropeoppositecircle,opposite in both rise hiphand. hands.andto kneesswing . . FoldrightHold rope endhand. 4of times. folded rope in . . direction.andSwingStand bend ropein widetrunk front, stride. in side,the same back, - Stand and circle side.. . Fold rope in half. - Ask pupils for variations. . CircleHoldin bothboth forward hands.ends (backward)of the rope - Encourdge. them to move different steps.directions. . oneVaryfigure hand. by holding8. rope ends in - . differentturning, bodyetc. positions. . HoldStandFold both andrope circleends in half.of overhead. the rope betweentheyInstruct can them movepupils and freely theto keepnext without enoughpupil touching sospace that . overhead.Swingin both the hands.rope horizontally another. . HoldSwingFold both andrope jump.ends in half.of the rope . itSwingin oneapproaches ropehand. low the and left jump foot. as 212 - Swing a rope horizontally.. StandFold ropein in half. wide stride. - Wor% out a "routine". toContinueHoldShift music rope weight to left.to left hand. swinging orends change in right hand. 2 Given an oppov-unityusing to practice rope swings. - .Use a variety of music with a good "beat". Books. U - -jumpingJump,Jump Jump, inturning turningaplace rope, awithout antherope imaginary pupil forward. the can:rope. rope. - Encourage variations. JumpEquipment. Ropes.44: p.Drury: 65. L - ProgressStep-hopJump, turning forwardturning a ropebackward.withropethe backward.ropeaforward. run. - Use a schottischepatterns.Combine record rope and jumpingcombine and square dance 185:Records. JumpingandRope Ball - ProgressJump onwith leftforward legs foot, in with footforward atap split the inright front.and backward. Reverse. rope jumping and the schottische. 232:16mm Film. Jumping.Handling.Rope - CombineProgress many forward rope withtostep.schottischejumping make the astepspolka "routine". step. ROPES 213 SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF RHYTHMIC SKILLS GoalObjective III. 3. TherhythmicProvidein pupila rhythmic eachpattern. can pupilperform pattern. with activities an opportunity with hoops, to develop such asskill swinging, in handling jumping, a variety circling of andobjects tossing in a Levels 1 GivenSequences an opportunity - Teaching to Progressions practice Suggestions- Use medium for sized Lesson hula Implementation hoops. Books.Source Materials Codes swinging a hoop, the pupil can: - Use waltz music, moderate speed. ' 44: Drury: p.67. - Swing and lean. . HoldStand arms hoopin wide in rightstride.facing hand, backward. palm horizontal. - Instruct the pupiltheon thetopalm usehoop, faces. a regularbut change grip the direction, Hoops.Equipment. . GraspSwing itthe hoop downoverheadpalmof thein facing frontbody in forward.and to the left. with the left hand, - Instruct-the pupilbothmovements to hands. perform with the a straightswinging arm using one or - Swing forward and backward. bothReverse. hands and lean to right. encourage variations. . StandSwingHold hoop-hoop feet inforward together.rightbendingfacing andhand, kneesback,inward. palm with the awing. . ChangeStepUse otherforward hands step and patterns etc.).swingbackward. on (slides, the other gallops, side. - Swing backward with .a HoldStand,bow. hoop forward in front stride. of body X...4....in right 4...... A hand with palm 214 . Swing hoop to rear and bow. - Swing backward with a .back Change arch. hands in thesiteswing rear side. hoop and forward on oppo- . SwingHold hoophoop atforward, sideback.hand,and in upward, topalmright the facing rear, upward.arching the Reverse. - Swing horizontally'and in. behind Holdfront hoopbody. horizontallyboth hands with to the right side, . Swing the hoop horizontallyacrosspalms inward. the body to the left, . - Turn hoop horizontally.. Swing the hoop inthechanging back body. of weight. Reverse. - Encourage variations. . Stand, feet together,slightly bend at waist. - . Different stepswaltz or turns, turn. such as . .Spin Hold or hoop turn in hoop both inwardinward.threeoutward hands fingers by withor rotating palms it facing in the fingers. . HOOPS 215 SECTION THREE - GOAL III. OBJECTIVE 3 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions suggestions for Lesson Implementation I Source Materials Codes 2 Giventhelumping an pupil opportunity movements can: towith practice a hoop, Hocps.Equipmem. - StepBackwardForward -hop Jump. jump.forward. - Instruct the pupil, when performing the - WaltzStep-hop turn. backward. waltz,. StepHold turn onhoop to: left horizontally footdownbath to in hands,the frontto left, right rightand swing sidestep palm hoopinthrough facing itbackward. with andpalmsBringleftthe return rightfoot facinghoop throughfoot;toup forward,originalover turn the head to hoopturnposition. thefrom to hoopleft thethe downward andrearright. step 3 Giventhecircling pupilan opportunity movementscan: withto practice a hoop, - Instruct the pupilhand.shouldto to start use be wristthe around hoop movements fingers,circling. palm and back of The hoop can circle inward or The circling Hoops.Equipment. - -Circle Circle the inwardin hoopfront (outward).with inwardchangeof bodyright hands.and and hand left band outward. Reverse. - Instruct pupil thatThishands, outward.even is thewhendone circling changingby putting should free be hand continuous. near to - "FigureCircleHorizontal andLight" swingcircle sideward in in Reverse.combination. front(backward). of circling hand. body (head). 216 4 Givenpupiltossing,movements an can: opportunity with toStand practicea hoop,end toss. the - Encourage variations.. ChangeVaryCombine foot hands. movements. positions. Hoops.Equipment. TT - CircleTossJumpRun, acrossandrun, hoop toss. toss, andin fronttossandReverse. leap.overhead.of body. - -Circle CircleCombine hoop hoop, hoop and tossmovements andbodytoss backcatch tobehind opposite and init. aup, overhead. side. Givenrhythmic an opportunity wave to use to"routine" various explore to music. objects,- Swing.jounce.Toss. the pupil can: - Circle.Combine?bye around into anda music."routine" parts.under body to HOOPS 217

THESKILLSSW1 MING EVELOP ENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATIONLOS ANGELES BRANCH CITY SCHOOLS P.L. 88-164, Title III J.V. 69-68

5SS SECTION FOUR - THE' DEVELOPMENT OFTCG SWIMMING SKILLS pluqrcai,.bsg brubtr %;e3 cput pG cnu Lsuirss ccax.rum. TheINTRODUCTION toaim swim of theor toswimming swim better. program is to teach pupils how The strokes and skills to be ;7 o; jo 5. ygsic zi.Lop,e eaq .qcr/rz Improveco cps tirpurcrs2control of Ot body cps moyements. crIpi;z, vcrsce Gcc. pricKGC2' ao1Je62) 2ITI/CGL?' 12 urge co jsuturun. Swimmingoftaught the individual.are is determineda non-weight-bearing by the condition activity. and the Atikty It is an A Pc- pgiebot1606A1.Y1 areiirilh'IufC16-1TerrVibliCer.qZ "q T l; .-lc' density,activityface.it is reduced isin ablewhich to to thea supportminimum. weight a ofbody the at body or nearor a thepart sur- of The average handicapped person is usualli'less Water, because of its .6. :Swimming4.cxtwiiiftWeis2.-vssiiiiaweeemsmfm3. provides a enjoyablesocial and satisfying.Skills developed have a carry-over value. a too F saVese effort.handicappedsubmergedto remain afloatpartin the of with waterthe littlebody than with onor landnocomparatively effort and will and bemovelittle able any ?' TEACEING7.%'The-haWaiappi(dbctbilaehon'il SUGGESTIONS A-tiny esrapgilentn the water. yG C. GaL:(10/:A -,OL .011h. it'iitit;cing effect. opgOrtu3IT. enccsz? TOL 69GP bodyTherapists,referredtotaltherapeutic movements rehabilitation to and agentas to othersunderwater submerged sometimes program.learned therapeuticbody employ in partsthe a use series asexercises, ofone water offacet unrelated asdiffer of &- a These movements, sometimes wi'ditigecialhandicappedThe'? ff pupil features vary toconsiderably. serve thf needs of the handl- twiciagcreitTagicalie ioc1iee A pool designed affordrelatedfrom swimmingthe and learner when inasmuch learned,with functionalas theresult movements outlets.in skills in swimmingdesigned areto Almostnotto6iiiWsitiagicteihe eliminate any swimming_pool the program.1,c,,;(0+ with handicapped a shallow area may be used q program. 2mplicurug 21q112" pub 1. The water GENERALinWith the physician's handicapped VALUES OF approval, SWIMMINGpupil's program.swimming should be included LF-ifiiimptimilly__easary_heeause innotchilled.shOdid'SiTheiViViO the be beginningactive and stageswill tend of instructionto become Relaxation is aided by warm water. atiabliara: 'tfig wariliiitueirgInec- Tesg- Z.Physiological1. Values IncreaseDevelop andrange maintain of movement s--ength. within the joints. LIIVCCq)0e C..1 hc§iptitLe tnvA p6 Thefrvq swimming co vc,2T2: area lu possessesmpscsAsx. bp926certain ot hazardscps of which both 4IAILA. IL! mpTcp cpsA 4 G psec snulTiTsr:- 4.3. PromoteImprove deepercirculation. breathing. -77t7:77-T5git;',1 l%Lbei'-elisiiiiiiiara theirteacher risks and minimized. pupil must be fully aware. All hazards should 221 SECTION POUF - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWI1Q11NG SKILLS withA prominently.list each of facility.general pool safety rules should be 'ormulated These regulations should be posted Volun,leersswimming activity may be usedin whichto assist they inare whatever best qualified. phase of the TeachBasic the Safety personal Skills safety skills needed by the pupil as TEACHING1. HINTS physical,Learn as much social, as you and can emotional about.each make-up pupil's before mental, be- 2.soon1. as possible. WalkingBreath incontrol. the water. 2. Followginning a instruction.planned progression of swimming skills. 5.4.3. TurningBackProne float floatover. and and recovery. recovery. 3. units.Break down skills and their component parts into small et. .r..te SIMS-11ZZThe6. size of the group the instructor can Changinghandle safely directions. 4.5. pupilUseProvideskill. a invariety everyopportunity oflesson. approaches for some to the.small teaching success of each for each maysmallbasishandicapped vary groups.while from otherspupilone to may lesssix need orhandicapped more. to be taught may beon taughta one-to-one in The more severely 6.7. UseCombine review games and andrepetition fun situations as with learning a part of every lesson. competentInstructorsInstructors_ and of Aides.skilled swimming and in forVolunteersswimming the handicapped activities. should be They 8. AdaptUseexperiences. variousyour methods methods to andpupil's approaches needs andin yourabilities. teaching. Aidesthecappedshould instructorshould andalso some behave usedand special an to tointerest takesupport training care in the of workingin teachingall this of with field.the efforts theI.ervice handi- of 10. 9. handicappedAdaptboards,Use floats,strokes tubes, pupil balls,and jackets, soskills buckets,that toetc.,he the cansponges, as abilitiesrealize aids sinkers,to his oflearning. maximumthe kick- andtofunctions theleaving pool, requiredthe assist water. themby the with pupils. dressing Aides and may undressing, bring pupils potential in swimming. 222 LESSON PLANNING .SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS Each1.include lesson the should following. follow a basic plan and Landshould drills for use of arms and legs. 4.5. AbstractVerbalsigns,spoken stimulusStimulate stimulus-words,word, describenumbers, -Use various theetc. the activity stimuliears throughperformed. - -signals, the The student receives, 3.2. andWaterReview legs. drills of previously for breathing, learned and skills. use of arms interprets, and translates into action. 4.5. PracticeIntroduction of diving of new and skills. water skills. BIBLIOGRAPHY: American National Red Cross. Swimming for the USE6.When A MULTI-SENSORYtwo or more senses APPROACH are used simultaneously,Practice period and games or free swim. Bandicanned.seniorAmericanBove PhysicalHigh National Schools. Education Red Cross, Teaching 1960. Guide. Instructors Manual, Washington, D. C.: Los Angeles City Unified 152 pp. Junior and be1.learning more permanent. is reinforced, more rapid, andmovementsAssistiveGuide likely toto capitalize body parts on kinestheticthrough the (pro-desired AAHPER.CouncilPublicationSchool District: for No.National SC-585, Cooperation 1960. in Aquatics and A, Practical Guide for-Teaching the Mentally Division of Instructional Services, 340 pp. 2. Tactile--Touchbrain.prioceptive)feels the part feedback body to beparts ironmoved. so the that muscles the pupil to the This is usually Retarded152 pp. to Swim. Washington, D.C.: AAHPER, 1969. 3. Visualusedstimuli. as stimulusStimulatea reinforcement for eyes visual through and/or demon- verbal strations,loops, television, pictures, orfilms, other slides, visual singlestimuli. concept 223 THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ASSESSMENT FOR SECTION FOUR Thebe followingused by the pages teacher contain to: an assessment device to motivationalThe assessment tool device for pupils can betoward very self-improvement.effective as a 1. determineInstructionalPre-Test. the placement Sequences. of the pupil within the Assess the abilftles of the pupil to Thisresponsiblepost-test,If thedevice pupil is hefor is intendedthen hisinvolved becomesown as progress. ina moremeansthe pre-test,interested to aid the instruction, in teacher and 4Z), The3.2. assessment device has been coordinated withPost-Test.Instruct. the Teach theMeasure appropriate the Improvement sequences. of the child. Therefore,necessarytoasin evaluatea determiningtest areas theto them measure markingof theininstruction. relation pupil'stheand pupilsreporting needs,to aagainst standardized systemabilities each to otherbeand norm. the or It is not intended abilitiesmentThesequences thisteacher device area in to, estimatesto performingof determinemake instruction, it the morethe theabilities necessaryusable pupil'sand then forof needs skills.usesthe teacher.pupilandthe assess- in He usedorevaluationThe "no"shouldteacher may beof maybe individualthe appropriate,select pupil. and and use flexible.in hisothers, own symbolsa scale forranging In some cases a simple "yes" vidualizationanuponthenincreasing aid adjuststhe to performance the theand ofteacher instructiortdecreasinginstruction. of in the order thepupil. to todifficulty,an planappropriate for thedepending level,indi- This serves as wellapplicable,aboutisfrom plannedwith 1the to left performance 4 to etc.might arm,give beneedsthe moreof teacher improvementthe usable. pupil; space for withto example,make right, notes notdoes The comment column 224 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SlaLLS COAL I. Adjusts Physically and Mentally I ...... 1. WalksTo The while Water. in the water. . -.--1 - - 2. Slows bubbles. . 3. Sobs in the water. , 4.5. Performs the turtlelellyfish float. float. . . 6.7. Performs the prone float back.front. . . 9.8. TurnsStands frontfrom ato float. back whit floating. II 1 , 10. Turnsfloating. back to front while 225 SZCTION FOUR - TRX DEVELOPMENT OF smattrid SKILLS , GOAL II. . PerformsPropels Bodythe proneThrough glide. The Water. 2. Performs the heck glide. , . 4.3. GlidesKicks andand useskicks. the STM stroke. ...- . GOAL III. Performs Basic Strokes. . 1. Performs the front crawl. I 'I Dal 3.2. PerformsCoordinates the backbreathing, - crawl. kick and arms. 5.4. Performs the breast-stroke.elemmutaitzbeck-stroke. , 7.6. Performs thethe butterfly-side-stroke. stroke. 226 SECT/011 YOUR - THE Sim. INC SKILLS ramormerr or GOAL IV. 1. TreadsUses Deep meter. Water Skills 3.2. Diveswater.Jumpsthe motor.from side orof frompool boardinto theinto 4. Performs a surface-4/v.. . COAL V.5. Events.SwimsParticipates underwater. In Comes And Special 2.1. PloysPlays complexsimple meterwater games.games. 3. Takesrel part in water races and . 5.4. CompotesPerforms within s othersvoter show.in meter races or !MOO. 227 Goal I. To provide an opportunity for the pupil to become physically and Mentally adjusted to the water. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveLevels 1. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can enter the water without fear and perform simple tasks. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials es SwimmingGiven an Pool,opportunity the pupil to usecan: aEnter the water. - area,theConduct pool.locker the roomspupil andon aobserve tour of activity the pool in Books.120: 34: Vannier:p.316.AAHPER: n.54, - wall.Sit on step or stand at the - pool.Explain the safety rules for use of the 129: YMCA: p.50. Lead the pupils into the pool and then move . MoveingGet inorwet shallowhand all travelingover. water by along walk- - Encouragetrougharound asthe a the shallowhandhold pupil area toif letneeded.using water overflow come up Balloons.Eamiamma, - Blowthe side. bubbles. - waterAskto thehis with pupilchin. hands. to wash face by scooping up 4"Sponges.stings.Corks. Rubber Diving - AskagainstPlay the splashing pupil the resistanceto games.lean forward of the and water. take steps - whileAskandDemonstrate theunder submerging pupils surface forceful to chin makeof theexhalat4smand a motorwater.mouth. boat at surfacesound 228 2 - Place face in the water and - Ask the pupil to count fingers.or identify - holdingDuckopen eyes.head breath. under water while -- Ask the pupil to hold breathPracticeobjects and submerge underbreath water. holding above water. - TouchCrawlin thethe onbottomshallow steps of area.in the shallow pool - whileholding.Play teachergames that counts involve to five. ducking and breath - bottomwater.Pick upof objectsthe pool. from the - Move objects to slightly deeperobjectsAsk the water inpupil shallow and to pick water. up rings or other - colorInstructinrepeat order or until number.tothe reach pupilit is the tonecessary object.pick up toobjects submerge by -- Ask the pupils to play alligatorwater.Seein whichone in try. pupilshallow can pick up the most rings 'ADJUSTMENT To HATER 229 'Goal I. To provide an opportunity for the pupil to become physically and mentally adjusted to the water. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS LevelsObjective 2. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can float in various positions. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation !Source Materials Codes 3 Givenswimmingand practicean opportunity pool, Floating the pupilto inobserve can:a - ball,differentExplain human buoyancy objectsbeing. andfloat: demonstrate wood, inflated how 34:Books. 4: AARPER:AmericanCross: p.79. p.30.Red - Perform a turtlejellyfish float. float. - whileAsking,slide pupil submergingsitting hands to fill downor the assisted lungsfront face. withof float legs air position).tothen ankles (From stand- 46: Fait: p.318. FD ) - Askthen pupil the toother, lift thenone footboth. off bottom, (From stand- Corks.BlocksEquipment of wood. - Asktoing, pupilchest sitting, towhile bend or in kneesassisted a jellyfish and floatdraw float legsposition). andup ToyPlayground boats. balls. possible.while holding the breath as long as . 4 - ReturnPerform to a standingprone float. position - hisAsksteps thehead andpupil and extend floatingto hold his oninlegs toa horizontalwhilethe wall submerging or - shortPerformfrom distance.a aprone prone float. float for a - onEncourageposition.extend knee position,arms the forwardpupil submerge to and start legs the from backward.head, a handsthen Holdin, thestraighten float a kneesfew seconds and stand. then tuck legs 230 - AsklightlyWitha shortpupil arms offdistanceto extended, standthe bottom awayin submergea fromcrouchand floatthe head,position wall. to pushthe 5 - stand.Float on the back and then - wall.position.Demonstrate method of assuming back float - I ,. thepushSittilt feet lowthe head infloatchest theback offup,water, till thearch ears fillbottom. the are lungsback in andwiththe let water,sir, I - GiveEncourage physical the pupilsupport to underrelax. the back of - Teachbackthe ofkneesheadmanner the and to pupilof the standing ifchesthips necessary. from andup bybringinga positionpulling the in - Teachheadinstraighten maintaining tothe the importance knees;the legsor as changingof andthe he.sd stand.hips bodyposition sink, position. FLOATING 231 Goal I. To provide an opportunity for the pupil to become physically and mentally adjusted to the water. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveLevels 3. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can change positions in the 'water. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 6 Giveninstruction an opportunity and to practiceto receive - headDemonstrate and reaching method the of arm; turning In the by sameturning Books.34: AABITER: -theposition pupil changescan: while Floatina,Turn from front to back. - Askthedirection. the side, pupil reach to turnacross his the head body toward with . p. 37. aDND - Turn from back to front. - alternativeTeachonethrough arm pupils, toward substitute methods with that limited ofsidemovements. turning and control, roll over over. . , 232 -SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveGoal II. 1. TheTo pupilprovide can an move opportunity through thefor waterthe pupil for shortto learn distances. to propel the body through the water. Levels 7 GivenSequences an opportunity - Teaching torrogressions learn and Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationInstruct pupil in methods of pushing off Source MaterialsBooks. Codes endpractice- of the glides pool, inthe the pupil shallow can:Perform a prone glide. - andEncouragefrom glide the asthebottom far pupil asor possibletothe hold wall. hisin abreath prone 81: p.56.Kiphnth: L - PerformflutterPerform a kick.aback prone glide. glide and - onpositionTeachposition, steps the in atthenflutter theside inwater. ofakick backthe in poolposition. a sittingor sitting - flutterPerform kick.a back glide and - EstablishbracketPractice position. thekick kick speed at andthe rhythmside in with a a - beat.handflutterPractice clapping kick. the patternglide then ewnhasizing add a slow the easy GLIDESFLOATING SECTION FOUR - TEE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveGoal II. 2. TheTo providepupil can an combineopportunity leg andfor armthe movementspupil to learnin swimming. to propel the body through the water. ... Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 8 practiceGivenStroke an withtheopportunity Kickinstruction, and toArm - flotationflutterInstruct kick thebelt usingpupil for support.ain kickboard techniques or of 81:Books. p.Riphuth: 60. the pupil can: , - Encourage the pupil to swim with the - -Combinepatternstroke kick ofin and movement.a coordinatedarm - kickunderwater,Instruct and then the butadd pupil tothe reach atto keep forward the arms pull. Equipment.Flotation belts. - Askleftand the pushand pupil rightdown to and arms.breathe backward by turningalternating boards.Plastic kick- - leachwaterwhothe cannotadapted headto breathe, sideward.turn techniques the such head as:for out those of the ... 205:16mm Films. Beginning . LiftRoll onhead to outback of to water breathe. to breathe. 225: BowSwimming.Iearninik Swim.To 234 SECTION FOUR THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveGoal III. 1. TheProvide pupil an can opportunity swim the frontfor the crawl pupil stroke. to learn basic strokes. Levels 9 SequencesGiven an opportunity- Teaching Progressionsto learn end Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationReview the prone glide to get body BooksSource Baterials Codes pupilpractice- can: Crawl fundamentals, thePerform a prone glide. - Askglide.position the pupil in theto addwater. the kick to the Stress a smooth and steady 121: 99:87:13: Nana:CityLarcom:Brown: of p.17.New p.42.p.47. - Performflutter a kick.prone glide and - - Encouragefull leg themovement. pupil to use an 126:124: YorkVannier:p.320.Torney: p.134. p.23. - Performflutter a kick,prone andglide, alternate - Teachalternate the correct arm stroke arm movementwhile kicking. with . - Breatheoverarm whilestroke. swimming. - Askfully,land the and pupillift water theto drills. moveelbow the high arms on care-recovery, 225:S 8mm Loop Films. Crawl. -, Swim a distance of 20 yardsor more using the front crawl. - Teachplaceinsplashing. shallow the pupilhand water inbreathing thein awater crouch techniques to position.minimize .(Assist where necessary). hummingonReview a 4 technique.orbubble .5 second blowing cycle. and bobbing Use a . breathing.UseBreathe flotation on one aids side while only practicing as stroke is completed. KICKCRAWL and ARM STROKE 235 SECTION FOUR - GOAL III - OBJECTIVE 1 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson ImplementationCoordinate breath with arm stroke Source Materials Codes coordinatedAsk the pupil stroke. to add breathing shallowwhileto his in water. a facedown crouch in - EncourageatExaggerate first. pupil head to turn swim and greater body rolldistances toeither-armsTeachand his for pupilpersonal longer orwho legstime limitations.has toperiods.limited adapt usestroke of

236 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS GoalObjective III. 2. TheProvide pupil an can opportunity swim the backfor thecrawl pupil stroke. to learn basic strokes. Levels GivenSequences an opportunity - Teaching toProgressions learn the -Suggestions for Lesson ImplementationPractice the back flutter kick in a Books.Source Materials Codes 10 Fundamental- Skills, the pupil can:andPerform back aglide. back flutter kick - under-waterEncourageback glide the position.and pupil kick tofrom keep the the hips feet 99:14: Mann6: Brown:p.Armbruster: 107. p.130. p. 55. - Scull,the hands fin, andand arms.wing with - withDemonstrate a loose kneemethods and offoot using action. the hands . - stroke.Perform a back crawl arm - Askand thatthe arms pupilthe for shoulder tosupport roll and inand thearm for waterare propulsion. lifted so 215:16mm Films. Fundaments of - orforSwim more. a thedistance back crawlof 20 strokeyards - Teachbackclear and ofthe tothe pupil the water sideto beforekeep for thethe reaching armstroke. stroke Swimming. - Askandunder30 aimlesstheyards. control pupil movements. toand swim to avoidcontinuously splashing for ------CRAWLBACK CRAWL SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS GoalObjective III. 3. TheProvide pupil ancan opportunity swim the elementary for the pupil back tostroke. learn basic strokes. Levels GivenSequences instruction - Teaching and Progressionsan Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationInstruct the pupil in the technique Source/12210- Materials Codes 11 Back,opportunity- the pupil to practicecan: on Perform the frog kick in a theorof inthewall.pool a frog backdeck, kicklying pool while position,side, sitting pool holding steps;on 6: p.Armbruster: 41. - theCombineback frogglide ankick position.arm in stroke a back with - waterkickAsk the withand pupil withthe legstoa briefpractice completely rest the after under-frog 236:162MFilM2. Skilled I Swimposition.for elementary20 yards or back more. stroke - movementTeacheach thekick. in elementary a standing back position arm Swimming. - Askleveland the then andpupil combineto toswim keep itfor withthe distance. bodythe kick.

tam Omm 238 Goal III. Provide an opportunity for the pupil to learn basic strokes. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SEMIS LevelsObjective 5. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can swim the side stroke. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Codes 16 Givencan:practice an opportunity Side Strokes, to learnthe pupil and - Teachand inthe the scissors water atkick the on pool the side.deck Books.Source Materials81: p.Eiphuth: 35. - Perform the scissors kick. - kickboardAsk the pupil as an tc aid. practice with a Xickboards.Equipment.87: p.Larcom: 118. 17 - Combinethe scissors an arm kick.stroke with - performDesonstrite the sideand askstroke the armpupil movement to 209:16mm Films. Fundamentals - kickboardontheInstruct the top deck arm forthe and and partialpupil standing legs to support.while practice in theusing water.with a of Swimming. 18 Swimorside more.the for side a distance stroke onof either20 yards - graduallybothInstruct sides theincreasing and pupil encourage in distances. proper him toform swim on BREAST STROKE 1 SIDE STROKE 241 Goal III. Provide an opportunity for the pupil to learn basic strokes. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVEtOP12NT OF SWIMMING SKILLS LevelsObjective 6. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can swim the butterfly stroke. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation iSource Materials Codes 19 andGiventhe practice pupilthe opportunity can: the Butterfly to learn Stroke, - Demonstratekick.execution ofand the instruct double theflutter pupil or in dolphin the Books. 6: p.Armbruster: 171. - Perform the dolphin kick. - Askanddepth the arms ofpupil at2' hisorto 3'performsides. underwater the kick with at hands a . 209:16mm Films. Butterfly.Dolphin- - AllowUsethenthe anthe head. kickundulating knees down to hard. bendmovement and sinkstarting and at 20 - strokePerform with a double a dolphin overarm kick. - Askposition.and andthe swing thenpupil themto to lift forwardpull arms with toout boththe of glidearmsthe water S 253:Smm Loop Films. Stroke.Butterfly - arms.downInstruct while thepulling pupil and to recoveringkeep his head the well Combine the kick and arms; one kick 21 f - yardsstrokeSwim aor forcoordinated more. a distance butterfly of 20 - mayeachTeach toachieve onearm the arm stroke. apupil ratio pull to ofas kick 21/2a beginning faster or 3 kicks so stroke. that to he 242 SECTION FOUR - TAE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveGoal III. A. TheProvide pupil an can opportunity swim the breastfor the stroke. pupil to learn basic strokes. Levels 12 GivenSequencesto practice instruction - BreastTeaching and Stroke opportunityProgressions' Funds- Suggestions- for Lesson ImplementationTeachpool theedge, frog and kick in aon bracket the deck, position at the at Books.Source Materials14: Brown: p. 105. Codes rentals,- the pupil can: pronePerform position.. the frog kick in the - ofpositionPracticethe thewall. body. orthe with kick a inkickboard a prone heldglide in front Kickboards.Equipment.114: Rajki: p. 15. 13 . - Combinefrog kick an armin astroke prone withposition. the a - water.armDemonstrate action in and a standingteach the position breast strokein the 252:S Smm Loop'Films. Breast Stroke. . - Askarms torhythm:the kick.to pupil chest to and follow bend aknees four preparatorycount (1) (3) Pull with arms.Kick and extend arms. (2) Recover . (4) Rest in extended glide position. . 14 - breastBreathe stroke. white swimming the - headpull.andbyDemonstrate tiltingbackup as and the the andlifting arms head teach begin backthe the chintheirand pupil liftingforward downward to breathe the - hisunderwaterAsk breaththe pupil duringas heto kicksdropthe glide. hishis headlegs, and and exhale holds BACK STROKE 6 BREAST STROKE 239 SECTION FOUR - GOAL II/ - OBJECTIVE 4 Levels .Sequences - Teaching Progressions Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials .Codes - coordinatingaEncourage stroke.standing theposition breathing pupil into withshallowpractice the waterarmin

. . 15 - more.distanceSwim breast of stroke20 yards for or a - acquired.increasingRequire pupil distances to swim as gradually skill is -...... 0 . o 1 240 Coal Iv. Provide an opportunity for the pupil to learn deep water skills. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS OjbectiveLevels I. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can tread water. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 4 HE-opportunityGiven IL, theinstruction pupil to practicecan: and an TreadingPerform a motionless - verticalhisDemonstratefill hold his position.on lungs theand wallinstructwith andair, floatthe gently pupil in releasea to Books. 86: Lanove: p.24. 5 - - Treadvertical water float with in a deepvariety water. - Give slight support if needed to 16mm Films. - 6 - Treadof kicks water and with arm legsmovements. only. - withDemonstratestabilize the three pupil'sand basic teach kicksposition. pupil and to then tread 219: Heads rite L 7 - - variations. ' - positionLevelTreed wateroff from and with aswim treadingarms in only.prone Askstrokes .the pupil such toas: tread with variousbreast,Horizontal arm and figurethe flaffle. eight, human, U position, back to a support. - comethenchinInstruct to addto the theanpupil surface. armchest, tostroke takekick as avigorously breath,soon as tuckthe and feet .._ BUTTERFLY STROKE , TREAD WATER g 243 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS. ObjectiveGoal IV. 2. TheProvide pupil ancan opportunity enter the waterfor the by pupiljumping. to learn deep water skills. vets 6 GivenSequences instruction - Teaching and theProgressions - Demonstrate a standingSuggestions jump from for the Lesson wall Implementation Source Material, Codes -theopportuniPy Jump pupil from can: theto practiceside into tming, thewater. - jumpintoInstruct well chest awaythe deep pupilfrom or thedeeperto holdside water. hisand breath,relax. . .7 Jump from a board or - Keep the head up and eyes straight forward. . L platform. - suchEncourage as a one-meterpupil to jumpboard from or lowa low plat- height . 8 Performlevel offa safety and swim. jump and - strideInstructform. jump pupil with in armtechniques spread sidewardof the . - jump.Practiceto minimize staying descent high intoin the water. water after . . 244 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMM/NG SKILLS ObjectiveGoal IV. 3. TheProvide pupil e= can opportunity enter the forwater the by pupil diving. to learn deep water skills. Levels 9 SequencesGiven instruction - Teaching and Progressions an - AskSuggestions pupil to slidefor Lesson into waterImplementation from the Source Materials ' Codes Diving,opportunity the pupilto practice ean: deck or step-rIl dive. . 11221s2.- 79:34: p.93.AAHPER:Juba: p.64. - pronePerform position. a dive from a . 126: 99: Mann:Vannier:p.32 p.81. - 10 - thesittingPerform edge. positiona dive from on a - - slideextendedtheninstruct intotip forward, forwardpupilthe water. to andwith sit hands chinon pool togetheron chest,edge orand arms step, - - Ask pupil to place hands on shouldersteacher's and push against teacher's pushoff_resistance if he has difficulty with ' 11 - standinginPerform a kneeling aposition. dive and from then side a - Ask pupil to kneel on one bykneeoneleg, leaning and footdive then aheadforwardin. of andthe raisingother. the other Repeat in standing position, 214:16mm Films OfFundamentals Diving. DIVEJUMP 245 SECTION FOUR - COAL IV. OBJECTIVE 3 Levels( Sequences - Teaching Progression.: Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes 11 beginningTeachthelowering legsthe ofpupiltothe thepivot upper-body todive springin andthe andthenupair at raising andby the enter Films.214: Fundamentals Diving. of L predeterminedAskthe the bottomwater pupil atof spotto athe neardive orpool. verticalobjectto a on angle. etc.legstheEncourage bodyextended, parts the pupiltoesunder pointed, tocontrol, keep all

/ 246 Goal IV. Provide an opportunity for the pupil to learn deep water skills. =non FOUR - TEE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS LevelsObjective 4. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can surface dive. Suggestions for Lesson implementation Source Materials Codes S theandGiven pupilpractice an opportunitycan: the Surface to learnDive, - Askfullybreathfloat the orto pupiland treadingan by overheadto raising assume position, position thea vertical arms take with force- a - Performsurface a dive.foot first, palmsthatthe thumbsup,forces execute turnedthe bodya rearwardreverse under stroketheand water.the . 9 - surfacePerform divea bead from first a - Instruct the pupil to swim one or Books.124: . tuck and/or pike position. attogether,fixtwo the thestrokes end arms ofpalms ofthewith breast up,pull, little drop strokerotate fingersthe chinthenand p.Torney: 141. TC Forofdown,a to tuck, the thethe extend water pike,thenchest, andtheaskeep pull thepulllegs the bodythe withstraightlegs kneesturns thestraight. intoarms.up,bead out SURFACEDIVE DIVE 247 Goal IV. Provide an opportunity for the pupil to learn deep water skills. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS LevelsObjective 5. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can swim underwater. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes) 10 SwimmingopportunityGiven instruction Underwater, to practice and the an - Ask towardthe pupil the tobottom. push off and glide pupil- can: completelyFromsurface, a position movesubmerged toat athe positionand - momentumofInstructto swimming keep to the theovercome downward pupilhead downbuoyancy.concerOng and ant. the the needthe necessity needfor progress.ofremain time whilethere makingfor a periodforward . 11 - Swim underwater using a kick - Ask the pupil to use one of the previously Books. and arm stroke. - Encouragemovedistanceslearned underwater. the kicksunderwater. pupil with to aswim double short arm pull to 124: p.Torney: 146. 248 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveGoal V. 1. TheProvide pupil ancan opportunity overcome fear for throughthe pupil participation to participate in variousin culminating water games. activities in swimming. Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions I Suggestions for Lesson Implementation L Source Materials Codes . 4 opportunityGiven instruction to participate and the - Ask topupil their to learningplay games level. appropriate . Books.34: -in Water Games, the pupil can:organization).Play simple games (low - andinEncourage games strengthen which pupils tendthe to learning toparticipate motivate of 51: p.AAHPER:P.Franklin: 105-125. 31. waterofbecomingducking,legs. water, skills opening adjustedswimming such as,eyes tousing breath-holding, theunderwater, thesplashing arms and . MarcoDodgeBridge,Play ,games Ball, Keep Bullsuch Follow Away, inas: thetheSplash, Ring.Leader, London 9 - Play complex games. - ofTeach. water games skills, involving such as:combinationsWaterWater Volleyball, Football. , WATERSWIM UDEN/ATERGAMES 249 Coal V. Provide an opportunity for the pupil to participate in culminating activity in swimming. SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILL S LevelsObjective 2. Sequences The pupil can achieve success through participation in water Teachingraces and Progressions relays. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes S WaterGivencan:opportunity Racesinstruction and to Relays,participate and an the pupilin - Useantolevel racesatmospheregreater that appropriate achievementtend of tofun motivate toand andthe enjoyment. also learningthe createpupil Books.126: 34: p.323.AAHPER:Vannier: p.115 - races.Participate in simple novelty . Balloon,TeachandUse running.activities games Night-gown. such such as: as walking, Kickboard, Nightgowni.Kickboards.Ballons.Equipment. 6 Participate in relays. - swimmingEncourage and pupils related to competepool skills. using Books. 34: AAHPER: 987 . Walking,Crawl-stroke,Ball-pass,Use activities Running, Kickboard Butterfly-stroke. such Prone-gliding, as:shuttle, Kickboards.Balls.Equipment. p. 116. 10 - Ask teams to cheer and supportmates.Awardfirst team-small choice privileges of water totoys, the 30winners; seconds extra pool time, etc. . 250 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS ObjectiveGoal V. 3. TheProvide pupil ancan opportunity demonstrate for personal the pupil achievement to participate through in participation culminating activitiesin special inwater swimming. events. 4---- Levels 4 GivenSequencesIndividual an opportunity - TeachingStunts and toProgressions Skills,learn -Suggestions for Lesson ImplementationskillPlan eventslevel soand that demonstrations every pupil formay eachbe 46:Books.Source Materials Fait: p.33I. Codes - -the Participate pupil can: in a water show. involved. - Demonstrateskills learned. personal water - haveProvidegroups learned anto opportunitypresent fm the thepool. forskills specific they Books.68: Hyde: p.28. 6 - inCompete races withand gamesanother they pupil have - Encourage each pupil to bemany in asevents as he can handle. learned in the pool. - ProvidewhotoConduct dosucceed. notan additional opportunityplace in theevents for first eachfor events. thosepupil RACES - RELAYS STUNTS 251 c 68 THEPHYSICALFITNESS DEVELOPMENT OF I SPECIALLOS EDUCATION ANGELES CITY BRANCH SCHOOLS P.L. 88-164, Title III J.V. 69-68 4. t 1 ;e1 '44In ; 1 1,144'*.1 I'V:144/ "., 1 ' , .44

4:" 'W ,41, r

...;t5 7, e e101t tt Of t "r, e y) 4' . a' e f . 4 '; W.°4Ntflk.. . - te4: aYr

o'

fr 1 IA -71 14,k. 1st .

;Al ..0 ,,N

. `11

}440?

I 00' IMPORTANCE OF FITNESS SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS resources. Exercise is one of the important factors ofAlthoughlogicalfitness regular therestudiesand physical its are havecomponents, varyingexercise. indicated opinions many the medical asbeneficial to theand scope physio-effects of It is the consensus, Sincecontributingtheirthe exercisepeople needs tohavean3 activities fitness. individualvarying selectedcapabilities preferences. should and be interests, suited to It is some- individual.regular,furtherthat exercise agreedvigorous, is that of enjoyable, valueexercise to most toand be individuals.suited effective to the must be It is aisexercises timesprogram ain good an believed exerciseandincludemethod, running. that thebutclass theunderstandingsit which isbest also offersway necessary to andcalisthenicacquire appreciations that fitness such There is no doubt that this Oneimprovedbenefitsasefficiency commonof the digestion,asbenefitmuscular in improved the of functionand improvedexercise ciculation, other of systemselimination, isthe the improvedvital improvementIf theorgans, andrespiration, bony. improved asand well Such Awhich asofgood wellfitness have physical as "carry-over" offeras welleducation activities as somevalues program gameswhich into should and wouldadult sports bedeveloplife. varied activities the 'NZ Theremusculaturelife.fitness is noand aredoubt its obtained significanceabout thethrough importance for regular a full of exercise. andexercise healthy and - endurance,flexibility,components balance,of muscular fitness speed and(strength, andcardio-respiratory coordination). power, agility, TheGOALenough goal OF FITNESSresourcesof fitness to is meet for thethe demandsindividual of dailyto acquire living, demands.graduallyWithiningThe body limits toalsoof the ait adaptsgrowing stresseshas the specifically child abilityimposed is remarkably toupon toadapt theit. itselfimposed adaptable. Different demands must be made in order to The grow- ACQUISITIONwithoutand sufficient causing OF FITNESS harmfulreserves strain. to withstand ordinary stresses AMAINTENANCEdevelop level ofthe fitness OFvarious FITNESS can components be maintained of fitness. by regular and abilityThefitnessthestresses level human to is of thatcope body raisedfitness existwithis andput theonein theunder life.variedattains individual stress, and is interactingthe thebuilds result level additional ofof the It is believed that as continuousexercise,important participationtheaspect more is beneficial that in the a vigorous moreit usually enjoyable activity. is. one's An 255 A program of exercise should be continued throughout Cardio-respiratory endurance is improved by appro- COMPONENTSneeds,life with interests, certainOF FITNESS andadjustments capabilities from change.time to time as Balance is of several types:priatebicycle-riding,running, prolonged swimming, andrhythmical runningcross-country activity:games. running, hiking, static, dynamic, and interval Strengthobjects;apparatus,partners,tance. may as weights, logs,bewell developed asropes, bars,stationary or bydumbbells, otherworking objects. kinds againstmedicine of weighted resis- balls, Resistance can be provided by working with that involving the hardling ofmotionless. theStatican object.postural balance orientation is developed of thein activitiesbody remains where naturethrowingatPowerforceful a specified whereis activities,developed movementsmaximum moment. inforce encourageand activities activitiesis generated the of development designedan andexplosive released for of quick,power. Jumping, certain types of ofandmotion.equilibriumDynamic balance. trampoline Balance is activities maintained is developed promote while in theactivitiesthe bodydevelopment is wherein For example: balance-board, balance beam mustAgilitydependentside-stepping be maneuveredis developedupon andagility. insudden byspace. activities starting inand which stopping the bodyare Twisting, turning, balanceproprioceptoreyesSome closedbalance is maintained as activities feedbackwell asby open.and ashould kinesthetic vestibular be practiced awareness,cues from with the the When the eyes are closed, Z\.D movementsStretching,Flexibilityfor the maximumpromote swinging,is developed rangeflexibility. swaying of in movement activities and other in any thatsimilar given provide bodypoint. alsoSpeedinner rely ear.is ondependent the visual upon cues. muscular contraction and is When the eyes are open, the pupil can Endurancerespiratory. is of two types - Muscular and Cardio - possiblements.apeed.events,developed inactivities ina specificactivities that time arewhich interval performed emphasize serve as quick rapidlyto promote move- as In addition to certain running (sprint) ofbeAlmostMuscular theadjustedrepetitions bestall endurance activitieswaysto promoteagainst to isdevelop whichcloselyendurance.a fixed musculardevelop relatedresistance strengthendurance. to strength.is onecan A maximum number aCoordination inintegratesingle a wide effective varietyseveral is the pattern. ofdifferentability activities. of kinds thl individualof movements to into This ability is developed 256 PLANNING AN EXERCISE PROGRAM example:Inthat planning there anis exercisea specificity program to onethe shouldcomponents. be aware there are strengths to be developed rather For 5. moderatelyA beneficial."tapering following off" should vigorous be planned. exercise Moving is about The vecificdevisedthanfollowing a strength. totypes principlesdevelop within each shouldthe component components. be followed: as well as the Therefore, an exercise plan must be ASSESSMENT6. OF FITNESS A intervals.medical examination is essential at regular 1. attention.A increasinglegs,involvewarm-up and theshould trunkintensity. large beshould muscleplanned. receive groups the of majorthe arms, The warm-up should be of gradually Exercises which ualThe1. servesdetermination several ofpurposes. the fitness level ofToas anknow well individ- where as to the know pupil his iscurrent prior status.to instruction it enables the teacher: It is 2. FortheExercises example: component should to be developed.specifically planned for To develop strength, the over- ofprogramdetermineimportant his achievement. and theforto alloweffectivenessthe teacher the pupil to of measureto the become fitness progress aware to waymuscleintensitybeenload to ableprincipleoverloadmust (heaviertobe perform taxed amust muscle work beyond beon used.isload--moreprior tothat increaseoccasions. which resistance) itthe has That is, the The 2. Totunitiesinstrumentrecommended plan an forindividualized to fitnesseach improve individual. test and fitness canupgrade be usedprogram. program as an oppor- A 3. Exercisesdemandsrepetitionsor increase uponmust atthethebe a ratevigorouspupilfaster (attempt in speed). enoughorder to to perform requireplace the 4.3. Tothe motivatekeep pupil parents fullyand challengeand informed. other thepersons individual. who work with 4. Exercisesmildtospecific eachis of pupil's mustadaptation.little be healthvalue.individualized and physical according capacity. Exercise that is too 257 TheretotheFITNESS medical programshould AND advice, beofTHE vigorousthoSe HANDICAPPED can handicapped profitdaily CHILD physicalfrom pupils it. activity who, according in The teacher 4. Hall,Movement.Latchaw, Inc., Marjorie, 1969. and Egstram, Glen. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: 377 pp. Prentice- Human mustItdependentindividual. isbe necessaryconcerned upon the tofor specificprovide the exercise opportunitieshandicapping tolerance condition.for of handi- each This varies among individuals and is 5. Hall,Logan,Children. Inc., Gene 1966.A., and Wallin, Earl L. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: 65 pp. Prentice-Exercise for andlife.sourcescapped individual pupilsto meet developmentto the build unusual the of necessary physicalthe fitness stressesreserve components, re-of This can best be done by a gradual, careful, 6. KindergartenSacramento,EducationPhysical EducationFramework ThroughCalifornia. FrameworkGradefor California Twelve Committee: (Tentative). Public Schools. 1969. 70 pp. Physical willTheself-testingimprovement.scores pupilallow and shouldhim should andto be readilyrecord-keeping competeencouraged measure with to himself canhisimprove beachievement. usedto his achieve whichown Activities which lend themselves to 7. Handicapped.Pomeroy,1964. Janet. 382 pp. New York: Recreation for the Physically The Macmillan Co., Fib.

ENDURANCE 265 Goal I. Provide each pupil within the limits of his physical ability with an opportunity to participate in SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS Objective 2. Theasactivitiescardio- motorpupil componentsrespiratorycan which show will an which endurance,increasehelp affect him into muscular performancestrengthdevelop, strength andmaintain, (agility, power. and and power,coordination, improve muscular the speed,following endurance, and componentsbalance). flexibility, of fitness as well -- levels activitiesGivenSequences an opportunity whi.:1 - Teaching develop to Progressions practice strength Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Books.7:Source Arnheim: Materials Codes pupil-in Squeeze the can: area a rubberand shoulders, ball. the - Encourage pupil to start slowly and increase 95:52: Logan:Franklin: pp.65-66. 40, - -Walk Walk on on all all fours fourn backward,forward, with arms sideward. and - Instruct pupil to lateralspeed.use unilateral patterns. and cross- 108:103: Mosston:Physical Educationpp. 253-286.33-49. - Perform: speeds.cross-laterallylegs straight, unilaterallyand change and - Use grmes and relays to teach and to pp.Committee.Framework39-45. 8, 10-11, . The Frog-MuleSeal Kick.Clap.Crawl.Hop -(alland directions increase distance of hop). ofreinforce War", "Seal the Walkskills: Relay". "Catch and Pull Tug MedicineMats.HorizontalEquipment. Balls. Bars. . AThe Crab Inchworm Walk. Walk. . VerticalStall(single Bars. Ropes double).and 266 1. Omem WM IMMO MO MOM Mom L_-- I bloom INNS IMO MIME MEM - Perform pushups standingpushing andagainst the wall, lying Books.103: Mosston: proneand fromand pushingthe toes. up from knees, Equipment. - pp. 253-286. - ThrowPerform and body catch turns. whilemedicineto standinghimself ball andand towhile a partner seated. - Instruct the pupilback tofromthe support support, armsfront and thesupport side,the body toes front, towith sideand etc. tosupport turn thethen body StallHorizontal Bar. Bar_ - HangClimb on on horizontal single verticaldouble bars-- verticalrope, rope. - Instruct the pupil to use different grips: - Perform bent arm hang.sidewerds."Walk" hands forward, Lackward, .. . ReverseForward grip.Mixed grip. - PerformHang on anglestall standbarsonstallchin andpull topull -upsbars. bar. - Instruct pupils withtostallarmsand place bothgrasp andbar. hand feet legsstall aboveon extended, bars,the head same step pull'rung, up cheston start stall toward with bars - PullHang upon tothe standing stall fromthebars, position body the swing fromstarting side positionto side. - Work with a partneratofalternate 45°holding and angle push thehands to barthe forward andground. body offer- - Organize class forusing "reciprocal partners. exercise" ing resistance to the partner. STRENGTH 267 SECTION FIVE - GOAL I - OBJECTIVE 2 Is Sequences- Hold arm - Teachingout steadilyhorizontal Progressions in a position as a Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Bend elbows and holdaspartnerdown aarms partner to pushesout offer pushes upresistance. and up thenand then down to offer resistance. . ' Given-inactivities Liethe an on abdominals,opportunity back, which arms develop the toat practicepupilsides, strength can: - KeepInstruct thm numberthe pupil onhaveof therepetitionsto a flexfloor.partner the tokneeshold approxi- hisand feet to keep them - Perform abdominal chestkneescurls.(Raise graduallybent, head, lift curling pullhead. chin up toto bemorematelythen done.form difficult more10. at leastresistance form 8 repetitions,of shouldthe exercise be however,applied, should pupilor a The pupil should be ableIf moreto per- than 12 can be performed - Perform situps witha .situp). Andknees armsas bent. folded at the acrosssides. the should be observed for signs of fatigue. . And holdinghands clasped a weightwiththechest. behind elbowshead. behind head held back. I 268 - Perform a "V" sitboard. on an inclined I - Perform leg lifts .knee.with .And And bentstraightening twisting to eachthe legs.side. Given an opportunity to .practice And twisting to each side. - Use stunts: Books. -thestrengthactivities Stand pupil with incan: which thefeet back willapart, muscles, increase hands - Instruct the pupilfully. to. ."Swimmer".extend "Rainbow the Arch".body 21: L.A. City: p. 14. - Lie on the abdomen,tobehindlean the partner forwardground.head, back with straight, body parallel and holding. Raise feet the and: head, rotatingextendchest, armsand the tothumbs the side,up. . . Raise the bead,head, handsextendandchest,sideways chest claspedarms,and withand diagonally, behindupward. the head - Lie on the abdomenraiseright and raiseatleft at elbows back. and left leg and and right leg. STRENGTH 269 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION FIVE - GOAL I - OBJECTIVE 2 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Lie on the abdomen and:. Raise the head, chest,tolegs, the and withside. arms held close . Raise the head, onchest,resistancetolegs, upper side andwith backand by arms partnerand pushing heldon Legs.offering closegently Giventheactivities strengthan opportunity which of the will toII& developpractice muscles, 21:Books. p.L.A. 12. City: the- Raisepupil can:the heels offthen the toes. floor-- (Toe-Heels Rock). - Instruct the pupiltimes. to repeat the exercise 10 If the pupil. can do this have him 52:95: Logan:38.pp.Franklin: 23 -29, - PerformBend one continuous knee andheel raisejumps of one thewith foot off the floor. - Instruct the pupilmaintainprogress to hold histo on thebalance. to harder a chair one to legged exercise. Chair.Equipment. p. 46. bothfeet. feetRepeat. apart. together--then with - IncorporateInstruct pupil the thatactivitiesonstrength whenone 1P7.he heinto gains should games sufficient progress to to knee bends - Extend arms forward1/2 and knee perform bends with both legs. provide. Encourage and maintain all to interest betime.the active activity and and fun. forto maintainincreasing intervals of 270 - Hold chair or partner for - Use stunts and games: balance and perform 1/2 knee . "Hop, Foot, Hop". . - Perform hops on onebends foot. or.e leg at a time. . ."Hop "Straddle on Left Run". Foot".right foot). (Alternate with (Alternate - Perform standingjump and longreach. jump. . "Long"Blind"Hop"Hobble Steps".Jump". Hop Hop Tag". on Leftwith Foot". right foot). strengthGiventhighactivities an ofmuscles, opportunity the which lateral the develop pupilto hip practice andcan:the . - LieStand on andone raiseside and:the .theleg Lift side.to one leg as high as - Instruct the pupilstraight, to keep theavoid body any flexion of the hips. . .Reverse Lift both for legsthe otherside.aspossible.as possible.high STRENGTH 271 SECT/ON FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS Goal I. ascardio-activitiesProvide motor respiratoryeachcomponents which pupil will withinwhichendurance, help affect thehim limitsmuscularto performance develop, of strengthhis physical(agility, and power,ability coordination, muscular with an speed,endurance,opportunity and balance).flexibility, to participate as well in maintain, and improve the following components of fitness -- Levels Objective 3. Sequences - Teaching Progressions The pupil can show an increase in flexibility. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes Given-andthe Sit backraneean with opportunity area, ofslightly motion the pupil toflexedin increasethe can: knees, Litz - Encourage the pupil to stretch slowly and 108: Physical95:Books. Logan: Educationpp. 25-31. trunktheextended legs, andleaning forward,armwithout position.forward, changingand straighten arm - Inform the pupilessentialthegently that point someand ofif todiscomfort discomfort.increased continue israngeto stretch of motion beyond is Framework39-45.pp.Committee: 8, 10-11, - TouchPlace alternatehands flat kneestoes onattempt floor keepingstraight. toand straighten knees. - Teach the pupil toleast repeatbe attained. five each times. movement at - Lie on back, armstouchpalms legsat sides, floorflatand hips onabove floor, up head.until roll feet - Use warm-up exercisesexercises prior toto preventstretching injury. 22 Giventheshoulder. pupilraneean opportunity can:backof motion and neck toin increase thearea, - Utilize stunts andstretch tumbling back activitiesand shoulder to area. - Twist shoulders direction.approximatelyand head 990 either wc11.Teachthe wallpupil'Ae!t) and to leftstandand toothor arms right thedistance shoulderwail. from to the Extend arms and twist as far right A mark is made wallmark.b,inflexibility a inches.andpartner A ruleractually and bycould twisting pupilmeasure be triesfastened fartherthe toimprovement improve tothan the the his area,Giventhe raneethean opportunitypupil of motion can: toin increasethe waist - Lie on back, extendward,rightlegs armsfloor smoulder and side,side on twist the -lower level, rightearl* legs raiseside,to to the the - Standing, left armhandsthekeeping raised lefton the theover-side. floor.knees straight and Repeat on bodyotherasrighthead, fa;straight. side. handpalmas possible, downtoward outside bead, keeping ofslide leg Repeat for the FLEXIBILITY 273 Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION FIVE - GOAL I - OBJECTIVE 3 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes Givenpupilshoulder,the an can:range opportunity andof motionchest to area,inincrease the the - Encourage pupils topullingto workassist inor inpartnerspushing. the stretching and by gently - Stand facing a wallanda shouldercorner) lean(preferably into placeheight wall. hands and bendat elbows - Sit, raise elbowsheightmuscles.by totightening shoulderand bend upperelbows back back

274 Coal I. Provide each pupil within she limits of his physical ability with an opportunity to participate in SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS Objective 4. Theascardio-activities pupilmotor respiratory cancomponents which show willan endurance,whichincrease help effecthim of muscularto agility, performancedevelop, strength coordination, maintain, (agility, and power,and coordination,speed, improve-the muscular and balance. endurance,followingspeed, and components flexibility,balance). of asfitness well -- Levels GivenSequences an opportunity - Teaching to Progressions partici- Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Books.Source Materials Codes V creasepate- Start, in his activities stop,agility, turn, whichthe twist. pupil will can:in- - Teach the pupils gamesstartirg which and emphasize stopping, such as "Stop and 108: Physical27: Corbin: FrameworkEducationp. 282. - Perform on obstaclemaze courses runs. or - Set up an imaginativeStart".. CravlClimbobstacle throughover course. climbing a tire. objects. 120: Stein: pp.39-45.Committee?. 11-14.8, 10-11, - Perform shuttle runs. - Use a shuttle run .as HopJumpRoll a relay.around aon line a ant.a or rope. circle. Pupil runs Equipment.Structures.Climbing V - Jump and turn. . 1/4 turn. retrievesand retrieves a second one objectobject. and returns and Ropes.Objects.Mats. . Full1/2 turn.turn. 3/4 turn. Tires. - Perform mat rolls.. BackwardForwardLongitudinal rolls.rolls. rolls. AGILTTYFLEXIBILITY levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions SECTION FIVE - GOAL I - OBJECTIVE 4 Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes - Perform various stunts.. .Heel UpHumanJump spring.click. andball. slap heels (toes). pateGiven in the activities opportunity that to improve partici- . Books.27: Corbin: coordination,- Perform forwardthe the jumping pupil stride can:jack. jump. - Encourage the pupilsin leadingto assume the leadership activities. 274.pp. 266, 272, . .Using Using unilateral cross lateralmovements. armleg andarmmovements. leg and - UseBegin stunts: the activitiesincrease slowly the and speed. gradually Sticks.Ropes.Equipment. - Perform a jump and 1/2. Changing turn. from crosssignal.to unilaterallateral and reverse on - Jump and turn into a. marked"Jack"Heel"Three Knife".Click". areaNan Roll".such as Records.163: Y-isic for Fitress.Physical . .To ToChange the the right. left.direction on signal. - Jump and turn usinga ladder the diagramdiagram. moving . - Lie on stomach, performkickstroke with flutterwith feet arms. and overhand (Swimming) forward and alternating directions. 276 - Hold a rope or abackwardhands, stick andin over bothjump the forward stick. and - Instruct pupils other.tostick keep . andboth to hands keep ona safethe distance from each - Perform side stride .jump. Jump with feet whileapart,down arms totogether side. swing over head and - Instruct pupil how to carry the stick. Givenpate anin opportunityactivities whichto partici- can - Use a stopwatch totry encourage to increase a pupil his tospeed. Books.27: Corbin: develop- PassSprint speed,thean 25,object 50, pupil (beanbag,75, 100can: yards. ball) - -Utilize Encourage relays self to improvement tition).encourage increased(self-compeT p. 281. - Skip, hop, jump, gallop,aroundleap,speed. slide, aincreasing circle increasing the speed. the - Use a game, "Hit thespeed.. Deck".Observe pupil exertion. fatigue and avoid over - Move from sittingspeed.withposition and thea lying greatestto an upright possible position - Establish boundariespupil toas helphe moves. guide the balance,pateGiven in an activitiestheopportunity pupil can:that to improvepartici- - Encourage the pupilactivities to perform with theeyes closed as well as - Stand on one foot footholding in the air. - Utilize small blockspulateopen. for and pupil balance. to mani- SPEEDCOORDINATIONAGILITY BALANCE 277 SECTION FIVE - GOAL I - OBJECTIVE 4 levels Sequences- Stand on- Teachingone foot Progressionsotherand grasp foot the behind the back with Suggestions for Lesson implementation Source27:Books. Materials Corbin: !Codes the. HopStandhand, forward.backward.turning and: to the left and still. Equipment.59: p.L.p. 19-20. 298.A. City: - Perform the tripod. to the right. - Encourage the pupilall to parts use bothof his sides body and to help him balance. SmallBeanti.is.Balance Objects. Board.Beam. - StandPerform on theone frogfoot handbodyleanthe stand. parallelforward,other foot to asfloor, high raiseas - Stand on top of body.possiblea armsbalance straight behind beam outthe tobody, sides hold of - Encourage the pupil to balance first on a - Stand on top of aboard andbalancebean walk. andbag, bend, etc. stretch. Catch - Instruct the pupilary toflat positionbalance surface inand anda thenstation- then in on a amoving raised position. surface. - Stand on one foot,highlegat extend chestasforward possible. arms level and andbackward swing asother 278 -, lomm MI IMMO Bum Goal II. Provide activities that will develop in each pupil an understanding and appreciation of fitness SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS Objective 1.Levels Sequences - Teaching Progressions Theand pupil how itcan can assess be acquired his own andfitness maintained. level. Suggestions for Lesson Implementation Source Materials Codes pupilGivenand recordcan:an opportunity his own progress,to measure the - Select a test program .to Youth be used, Fitness such TestEducationAmerican as developed Associationand Recreation.by the of Health, Physical Books.108: 15: pp.Buell:Physical 140-146. - Record his fitnesstofitnessParticipate scores his physical testfor inprogram alimitations. physical adapted - Provide for and establish. CaliforniaPhysical for the Fitness pupilPhysical the anand PerformanceAmateur Proficiency Athletic Test. Test Union. of . pp.Committee:FrameworkEducation 42-45. - Maintain his own keephisrecords owntrack individualand of his progress. use. - Instruct pupil toprogresskeeping. individualkeep records by notingrecord of his theform level for hishe beginsown record - Re-assessUse the records his activities toimproves. planfitness hisas activities.he - Emphasize that thehimselfwith pupil and in hisis order competingattainment to improve. with as he progresses. FITNESSBALANCE LEVEL 279 SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS ObjectiveGoal II. 2. TheProvideit pupilcan activitesbe can acquired understand that and will maintained,the developnature of,indespite eachthe acquisitionpupilthe presence an understanding of, of anda limiting the andmaintenance appreciationphysical ofcondition. physical of fitness fitness. and how Levels LSequences - andGivenTeaching experiment an opportunityProgressions with the to componentsdiscuss - Instruct the pupilSuggestions in. Resistancethe importance for Lesson- Strength of Implementation is improved by Source15:Books. Materials Buell: Codes of- fitness,Identify thethe pupilcomponents fitness.can:. Endurance. of . Overload principleMuscularworkingtanceoverloaded - A toagainst musclestrength the in action mustorderresistance. is be increasedtois buildincreased strength.-as resis-progres- 95:27: pp.Logan:Corbin: 1-65.140-146.167-177. . Flexibility,Strength. - Muscular.Cardio-respiratory. . Repetitions - Musculartheimprovedsively. same endurance movementby forcing is again the andmuscles again to against repeat .- Speed.Balance,Agility.Coordination. . Flexibility is improvedtionsshouldrelativelyfatigue shouldbe and inshown low maintainedabe relatively resistance.byfast the enough student.by short to producetime. Real fatigue Repeti- fitnessDetermine can how be thedeveloped. components of . Cardio Respiratorymovingactivityandfull endurance maintained rangethe mustbody of is movement. increasesegments byimproved vigorous thethrough activity.pulse their rate and The - Choose the activitiesnessbest and whichdevelop components. will the specific fit- - Encourage and helpofconclusions the fitness. pupil toconcerning drawraise the body various heat. aspects 280 - Plan and participate in a - Encourage the pupil to develop an exercise whichprogramcapabilities. will of meetfitness his activitiesneeds and - Encourage each pupilandgroupsprogram arms.to -choose thatback, encompasses exercisesabdaminals, the thighs, main musclelegs - Evaluate his progress. - Organize the grouppartnerbelowto so develop thethat and standard. each asthe one hasmuscle exercises, a areas whichthe other are - Teach the pupil that:decides. The musclewhich musclesthat feelsthat he ishard working.using. is the one ,- Replan on the basis of evaluation.the - Encourage each pupilhis .progress. toThe keep working a record musclesget of stronger. are the ones that COMPONENTS OF FITNESS 298 RESOURCE MATERIALS BOOKS: 1. AAHPER.1965. Washington, D. C.: Youth Fitness Test Manual. N. E. A., 80 pp. Revised edition 5. NewAnderson, York: Marion, et al. Play With a Purpose. 1966. physicalContainsto twelve. fitness a battery of boysof tests and girlsdesigned in gradesto measure five the Norms are given. physicalContains549 pp. education.excellent activities for elementary Harper and Row, Publishers. 2. ContainsSchoolsMotorAlameda Skills. Dept., Countyinformation 1968.Schools. on program planning, motor Hayward, Calif.: 59 pp. The Development of Basic Alameda County 6. Contains4thArmbruster,1963. Edition, materials David,St. Louis, foret al.the Missouri: beginning coach and 352 pp. Swimming and Div!.4g. C. V. Mosby Co., CAD 3. AmericanSafety.skill development, National Red and Cross. perceptual-motor learning. Washington, D. C.: American NationalSwimming Red and Water mostbeginningcompetitorthroughout complete and as andwith competitivewell technically excellent as advanced swimming. qualityaccurate performers. drawings. volume on Illustrated The C.) mingProvidesCross,in courses water 1968. information safety.for instructors. useful to all persons interested 142 pp. A textbook used in Red Cross swim- 7. ofArnheim,C. Adapted V. Mosby Daniel Physical Co., D., 1969. Education.et al. 419 pp. Principles and Methods St. Louis, Missouri: 4. Cross,Manual. 1960. . Washington, D. C.: Swimming for the Handicapped-Instructors67 pp. American National Red withEffortsinIncludes scope.examples have both beenfrom the made thetheoretical practical.to reinforce and thethe practical.theoretical Very complete onofContainsGives handicaps.effective an specificoverview teaching recommendationsof swimmingmethods. for forthe varioushandicapped. types Written for teacher-use with emphasis 8. Washington,Ashton,Presents59 pp. Dudley. good D. C.:ideas for lessons. Rhythmic Activities K-6. AAHPER - N. E. A., 1964. 284 9. Barsh, Ray. Achieving Perceptual-Motor Efficiency. 13. Brown, R. L.: aad Ober, D. K. Complete Book of emphasisPresents365Washington, pp. upona modelD. theC.: forchild curriculum with special organization problems within Special Child Publications, 1967. Hall,ofContainsHigh wrestling. 1962.School comprehensive .211 Wrestling. pp. coverage of fundamentals Pennsylvania: Prentice- gration.thelearning; highest gives possible suggestions level of to perceptual-motor help the child achieveinte- 14. Brown, Richard L. Swimminggraphs. Instructor. Illustrated with sequence photo- Teaching Progressions for the Washington, D. C.: A. S. 10. SchoolandPublicationBoys' Senior District:Physical High No. Schools. EducationSC-585, 1960. Teaching Guide. Division of Instructional Services, Los Angeles City Unified 340 pp. Junior thetechniquesContainsBarnes fundamentals Co., very for1948. detailed use of byswimming. thematerial instructor on methods in teaching and 160 pp. F--11CD priateGuidesascurriculum a descriptiongradeteachers forlevels andthe of for department schools;techniques specific gives chairmen skills.and methodssuggests in planningas appro- well 15. Bucher, Charles A. St.1969. Louis, Missouri: 312 pp. Physical Education forWebster Life. Division, McGraw Hill, 11. 1968.ingBraley, Activities. William, et al. 197 pp. New York: Daily Sensorimotor Train- Education Activities, games,ofContains physical and the sports. activity basic concepts as well underliningas various activities,the importance 12. Brown,sensoryPresents Camille; acuity activities andand )f Cassidy,useful motor for endRosalind. themovement teaching skills. of Theory. 16.> Buell, Charles E. Children.1966. 224 pp. Illinois: Physical Education for Blind Charles C. Thomas, Publisher. ofBridgesFebiger,in physical Physical the1963. education Education.gap between and thethe traditionalnewer concepts aspects of 244 pp. Philadelphia: Lea and 17. Bureau of Elementary Education - Statecontests.programDescribes Department including a program of games, of a sports,vigorous races, physical relays, education and human movement. ContainsDepartmentChildhood.Education. coverage of Education, of content 1956. taught in K, 1-3. Teachers Sacramento,Guide to Education Calif.: in Early 753 pp. California State 18. . Sacramento,Tercber's Guide California: to Education in Later California 23. Clark, Carof E. Rhythmic Activities for the CoversStateChildhood. Departmentcontent taught of Education, in Grades 1957.4-6. 615 pp. Classroom.encourageContainsInc., 1969. ateaching child's suggestionsrhythmic responses for the andteacher creative to New York:48 pp. The Instructor Publications 19. AbingdonPlayCarlson, Activities Press,Bernice 1961.for Wells; the Retardedand Ginglend, Child. David. 244 pp. New York: 24. development.Calif.:Cluro, Beth and Ramsey, Helen. ;Dowmar Publishing Corp., 1969. Me. Glendale, 22 pp. .20. Cherebetu.,languageactivitiesPresents development.a Gabriel.toprogram aid mental, of games, social, crafts, physical,and and musical Volleyball Techniques. youngDepictsof "The children. the Manipulative child and hisBooks body Series" image writtenand is onefor CDCZ ExplainsHollywood,1969. advanced California: methods for teaching fundamentals 140 pp. Creative Sports Books, 25. DepictsBowmar Publishing the child Corp.,and his 1969. activities and is one of . Through The Day. Glendale, Calif.: 22 pp. 21. ChildrensionLosfor Angelestopof InInstructionalflight Action City volleyball Unified- A KindergartenServices, School play. PublicationDistrict: Fitness Program. No. Divi- 26. "TheCohen,children. Manipulative Harlan. Books Series" written for young Power Volleyball Drills, Hollywood, promotingEC-81.Includes physicalactivities fitness which forhave young been children.selected for 196C. 20 pp. Containsvolleyball60California: pp. comprehensive skills. drills for all types of Creative Sports Books. 1968 Edition. 22. No.DivisionChildrenLos EC-82. Angeles Inof ActionInstructional City Unified- A Primary Services,School Fitness District: Publication Program. 1964. 40 pp. 27. Febiger,theCorbin, Elementary Charles. 1969. School. 376 pp. Becoming Physically Educated in Philadelphia: Lea and fortheirIncludes the effectiveness primary activities grades. inwhich promoting have been physical selected fitness for whichneedreacherPresents towill learn in aproduce selectingbasic in the understandingthe elementary physicaldesired learning. education schoolof what and childrenexperiences aids the 286 28. Cratty,Peekcally Publications, Handican2edBryant J. Children.1969. Devetopmenta: Games for Physi- 52 pp. Palo Alto, Calif.: 32. Children.1969. 54 pp. Palo. Alto, Calif.: Trampoline Activities for Atypical Peek Publications, handicappedContainsstories, games swing-ball children. and stories games, suitable Includes sensory-motor string-ball games, and for physically 33. approachesContainsCorrective suggestions, and Physical methods Education-Teaching activitiesfor the trampoline. and teaching Guide for 29. Motorwheelchair Tasks. games. . Developmental SequencesNew York:of Perceptual Educational Activities JuniorServices,Unified and School SeniorPublication District: High Schools.No. SC-566. Division of Instructional Los Angeles City 1958. 400 pp. neurologicallyContainsInc., 1967. appropriate handicapped movement and activities mentally 88 pp. retarded for Suggeststoeach meet pupil. andthe recommendsvarious developmental suitable activities Includes a wide range of activities characteristics and for C:) children. . Learning and Playing. New York: seniorand capacities high schools. of boys and girls in junior 30. AtypicalEvucationalConsists Child." of Activities "Fifty Vigorous Inc., 1968.Activities The activities are simple, 64 pp. for the 34. AAHPER,MentallyAAHPER.Council 1969. forRetarded National to Swim.Cooperation in Aquatics A Practical Guide for Teaching 152 pp. Washington, D.C.: The and difficulty.vigorousencourage action, the child and toare think, arranged in Equipment is kept to a minimum. and result in order of Includesendren.to teachdrawings. a aboutcomprehensive swimming statementto mentally of how and Contains progressions, methods, illustrations, retarded child- what 31. Supports77Palo pp. Alto, the Calif.: premise that movement may be telTesasttEssvtisa.2nAIhemall- Peek Publications, 1969. incor- 35. Cliffs,Counsilman, N.J. James. Prentice-Hall Inc., 1968. Science of Swimming. 457Englewood pp. ofmanyofporated movements. theways. limbs, effectively total bodyinto movements,andeducational programs Contains manual activities, movements combinations in materialgraphs.wellAnalyzes illustrated in principles how to withswim of drawings, eachswimming of the charts,with strokes. detailed and photo- Very 36. CoursePublicatDistrict:Revision. of onStudy No. for375. Elementary Schools. DivisionLos Angeles of Instructions/City Unified SchoolServices, !,72 pp. 1964. 40. ProgrammedDeCharles Santis, E. ActivitiesGabrielMerrill J.Publishing forand GradesSmith, Co., K-6.Lester. 1969. Ohio: 800 pp. experiences.guideClarifies for planningareas of classroominstruction activities and provides and a EducationalactivityContains110 page cards800 Program Research portable for Guide.the Council programmedelementary of American color-codedgrades Physicaland a Was written for the 37. Crume,Calif.: Marion. Bowmar Publishing Corp., 1968. Let Me See You Try. Glendale, 26 pp. 41. FollettDigby,Education George. Publishing Program. Co., 1960. Baseball for Boys. (ERCAPEP). 96 pp. Chicago: ChildhoodEncouragesexplorationand movement Series." the approach; skillschild toby a try thebook newuse from tasksof the in "Earlymovement motor series:rulesGives ofa comprehensivebaseball for pupilcoverage use. on skills and "All Star Sports Books." A part of the 38. Bawmar Publishing Corp., 1968. . Follow the Leader. 24Glendale, pp. Calif.: 42. SpeedballDivision ofGuide. G!rls' and Womens' Sports. Washington, D.C.: American Soccer- .421.CZ mentDepictsa book as wellchildrenfrom asthe participating reinforcing"Early Childhood languagein motor Series." develop-activities; AssociationContainsRecreation,teacher. many for 1968-1970. articlesHealth, Physicalwhich are Education helpful forand the The "official" rule book for girls' 140 pp. 39. PublishingElementaryDauer, Victor. Co.,School 1969. Children. Dynamic Physical Education for 392 pp. Minnesota: Burgess 43. EnglewoodDougherty,sports. Cliffs, J. Kenneth. N.J.: Modern Track Prentice-Hall,and Field. Inc., movementapproachelementaryeducationContains experience to comprehensive activities school.learning. and and thecoverage methodology problem-solving of physical for the Includes suggestions for (ayesactivities.1953. a comprehensive coverage on track and field 557 pp. 288 44. GymnasticsDrury, Blanche for Women. Jessen, and Molnar, Andrea Bodo. Palo Alto, Calif.: The 48. FolkInstructional Dances for Bulletin.Junior High School Girls. Los Angeles City Unified An gymnasticsContainsNational Press,the program; information 1964. includes necessary activities for ausing complete 198 pp. ningSchoolPresents154 and District.pp. Services. directions for dances. Division of InstructionalPublication Plan- No. SC -647. Material is 1968. 45. MerrillhandMotorEspenschade, apparatus. Development.Books Inc.,Anna S.,1967. and Eckert, Helen M. Columbus, Ohio: 280 pp. Charles E. graphtoaccordinggrouped basic records. accordingdance to grade steps. tolevels grade and levels arranged and arrangedaccording Suggests sources for phono- C:D ofandContains growth motor informationtoperformance the period coveringranging of decline. frommotor the development period 49. ningSchoolInstructionalFolk andDances District. Services. for Bulletin. Senior High School Girls. Division of InstructionalPublication Plan- No. SC-652. Los Angeles City Unified An 1968. 46. PresentsW.ElementaryFait, B. HollisSaunders comprehensive School F. Co., Child. 1964. coverage of elementary Physical Education for the Philadelphia:930 Penn. pp. countriesdirectionsPresents142 pp. descriptions, andfor classifieddances. background according informationto level of and Material is organized by goodphysical games education for overcoming including fear aquatics. of the water. Contains 50. difficulty. . Follow the Leader. Elgin, Illinois: 47 NewmentFleishman, Jersey: of Physical Edwin A.Fitness. Englewood Cliffs, Prentice-Hall Inc., 1964. The Structure and Measure- 207 pp. Davidren.Contains C. Cook a collection Publishing ofCo., action 1960. rhymes for child- The children may imitate and pantomime 15 pp. programs.andContains on the info-mation planning and on directingevaluation of of fitness fitness 51. Foster,inanimals, the rhymes. Mildred, objects, and and Vannier, people thatMary areHelen. portrayed Teach- PresentsCo.,Southerning Physical1968. Methodista comprehensive Education University: in coverageElementary of Schools.physical 460 pp. W. B. Sounder-, contenteducation and in methods. the elementary school. Well illustrated. Includes 289 52. MentallyIllinoisfiedFranklin, G.mes Retarded University, C. and C. Activities andChildren. Freebury,1965. of LawWilliam Organization H. for 70 pp. Illinois: Southern Diversi- 56. Gessell,Ten 1965.to Sixteen. Arnold, et al. 542 pp. New York: Youth - The Years From Harper and Brothers, Containscapped.suitablelevels a asforcollection well pupils as thoseatof thegames who beginning andare activitiesmentally developmental handi- 57. Gilliam,Tracesfromfor 10theChildren. Bonnieto development 16 yearsCherp. of of age. the behavior of youth Rationale and Teaching Units. Basic Movement Education 53. inFollettFrostig, Teachers' EducationMarianne. Manual). Corp., 1969. Move-Grow-Learn. 168 cards - (64 pp. Chicago: Massachusetts:includesProvides1970. aan progression individual ofapproach skills tofrom instruction the simple and 244 pp. Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., oncolor-codeddevelopment.Presentsto the improve contents a movement 4"the x of physical,6" "Movement cards.education creative, Education: program and to perceptuallid and The 168 activities are printed on The material is based Theory 58. DivisionLosGirls'to Angelesthe Physicalof complex. Instructional City EducationUnified PlanningSchool Teaching District: and Guide. Services, 54. ElementaryGary,and166 Practice", pp.Charles School. L. by the same author. The Study of Music inWashington, the D. C.: 1967. appropriateningGuidesPublication curriculum teachers gradeNo. SC-563.forand levels theirdepartment for schools. specific chairmen Suggests skills. in plan- 1958. 310 pp. appreciation.musicPresentssupports will a theconceptualbuild belief greater approachthat and the longer tounderstanding music. lasting of The purpose was to provide resource It 59. CityGymnastics,Instructional Unified Stunts,School Services. District.and Tumbling. Publication No. SC-32. Division of Los Angeles 55. Gesell,materialsFrom Five Arnold, in to music Sleteen. and forIlg, elementary Frances L. teachers. New York: Harper and The Child horse,andContains1966. apparatus, and stunts balance includingand beam. tumbling parallel activities bars, forside mats 137 pp. ofAnaly:fesBrothers, the child the 1046. fromgrowth ages and 5h.-!havior to 10 years characteristics of age. 475 PP- 60. PeekforHackett, thePublications. Mentally Layne. Retarded. Movement Exploratirm and Games1970. 120 pp. Palo Aleo, California: Contains activities for the mentally retarded. 290 61. DiscussesPeekGuideHackett, Publications. to Lzyne Movementmovement C., Exploration.1967.andexploration Jenson, Robertas a method G. of 74 pp. Palo Alto, Calif.: A 65. UnifiedHealthPlanning1959. Schoolin andthe Services,District:Elementary Publication Schools. No. EC-201. 360 pp. Division of Instructional Los Angeles City ;2. Halsey,RinehartEducationteaching Elizabeth, and basicfor Winston, Children. motor and andPorter,1963. movement Lorena. skills. New York: 449 pp. Holt, Physical Givesteachingroom specificphase sequences of suggestionsthe schooland methods. healthconcerning program the andclass- includes withGivesin physicalthe suggestions planning education--based andfor improvementteachers onwho soundof are programs concernedprinciples 66. mayGoldenHoll,Contains be Adelaide.Press,acted twenty-three out1964. with finger easy toand remember hand motions, verses andwhich Finger Plays. 24 pp. New York, N.Y.: Words-Movement"archer,ofCalif.: child Caro,growth and Activitiesand Mullin, development. forHilda. Children. Pasadena, Parents-For-Movement Publication, 1967. More Than 67. Hunt,ousin actionpantomime. Valerie. rhymes. They range Recreationfrom quiet forgames the to Handicapped. vigor- Contains61larly pp. suited types toof themovement very youngactivities child. particu- activitiesANew includingbrief York: description fora variety .he handicapped. of of the appropriate various disabilities recreational Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1955. 340 pp. 64. GuidesAssociationHayden,Retarded. theFrank. teacherfor Retarded in selecting Children, activities and Ontario, Canada: Physical Fitness for the Mentally Metropolitan Toronto 1964. 47 pp. 68. ContainsBoys'Hyde, ClubsGeorge. a varietyof America. of water stunts as used in water Stunts. 1945. New York, N.Y. 28 pp. chanics,planningtechnical.theory presentedasprograms well as foris physical simplethe mentally andfitness. brief retarded. and non- Covers motor ability, and body me- The 69. Oregon.swimmingImprovingIndividualized progressions Motor-Perceptual Motor-Perceptual of Boys' Skills. Club Skills of America. Committee. Continuing Education Publication. 1970. Corvallis, theContainslearning124 other pp. activitiesareas. which may inenhance the area the ofpupils' perceptual-motor learning in 70. Chicago:Irwin. Leslie, et al. Lyons and Carnahan, 1967. Foundations for Fitness. 288 pp. 75. AmericanJointstanding Committee Association in Physical from for AAHPER.Education. Health, Physical Education, Knowledge and Under- Washington, D.C.: andofContainsis fitness writtenV,lumeVII a andcomprehensivefor of otherthe the adolescent related"Dimensions coverage areas pupil. in ofof Health thehealth. aspects Series" It Definesthesubjectand Recreation,concepts the area body ofinto of1969.physical aknowledge progresssion education, contained from and thein arranges thesimple 124 pp. 71. ShowsJaynes,Ruth.Bowmar a childPublishing working Corp., in a 1968.sandbox; a book from Watch Me Outdoors. 24 pp. Glendale, Calif.: 7G. JointProjecttofor the Committee the complex. and Mentally the of Project the Retarded. Lifetime on Recreation Sports Education2nd Fitness e 72. AJohnson,the NewProblem-Solving "Early York: Perry Childhood B., Approach et -eries".al. to Health and Fitness. Holt, Rinehart, Winston, 1966. Physical Education: 486 pp. Washington,Physicalfor the Education MentallyD.C.: Retarded.and Recreation, 1968. American Association for Health, Physical ActivitiesIdeas for Instruction. 138 pp. ceO processdividualconceptStresses and thatandthe from musthealth"why" an emerge ofextensiveand physical fitnessfrom bodythe educationare problem-solvingof highly knowledge. and in- the Containsingactivities;activities,Contains activities; excellent ideas including:rolling, forand teaching instructionstriking pushing, ideas. and throwing, in kicking fundamental andactivities. catch- motor net, racket and paddle 73. Wrestling.Johnson,CoversC. V. Mosby, amateurWarren 1953. andwrestling Umbach, completely Arnold. with emphasis Alabama-Boston. Massachusetts: 256 pp. Successful 77. School.ment.AssociationAssociation,Joint Committee for and Supervisory ofMusic the CommitteeCalifornia Curriculum of Music the Develop- CaliforniaEducation Teachers Guide to Music in the ElementarySacramento, Calif.: California State 74. Jointofon wrestlingpictorial Committee inanalysis education.of the ofAmerican manuevers, Medical and Associ-the role DepartmentimplementationIncludes teachingof Education, into suggestions various 1963. types and ofideas music for lessons. their 149 pp. ContainsPhysicalationFitness. and Education, athe statement American and on Association Recreation.the contributions of Health, of Chicago: A. M. A., 1964. Exercise5 pp. and exercise to fitness. 292 78. _Tones, Perry T. (ed). Handbook for Tennis 83. Kirchner, Glenn. Physical Education for Elementary YouthofClassin Education, Tenniscooperation Organization. Foundation 1961. with theof SouthernLos Angeles California City Board Southern35 pp. California: The SchooleducationContains& Co., Children.1970. aactivities comprehensive for Kind-rgartencoverage of physicalthrough 679 pp. Dubuque, Iowa: William C. Brown assistContainsSuggeststennis the tofundamentalsa pupilvarietys large in ofgrouplearning. andways withaccessory a teacher limited devices can facilities. teach to 84. Alto,Klasen,Grade Six.California. Edith. Audio-Visuo-Motor Training. PaloPeek Publications, 1970. 69 pp. 79. ProvidesLondon,Juba, W. England: J.swimming instructions for back, front, Instructions to Young Swimmers. Museum oress, 1965. 128 pp. 85. developContainsLandis, visual aBetty, manual motor and and Boardman,perception. 50 pattern Eunice. cards to help Exploring O 80. Califoria:Keller,breast, Val.and dolphin strokes. Creative Sports Books,Point, 1968. Came and Match. Hollywood, 98 pp. CoversMusic.1966. the basic music fundamentals for the elemen- 1-6 pp. New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston, Inc., GoodContains book championshipfor high level volleyball competitive techniques. volleyball. 86. N.J.:Lanoue,tary school, Fred. one of a series. Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1963. Drownproofing. Englewood Cliffs, 112 pp. 81. ming.ContainsPress,Kiphuth,Robert, 1950. beginning and and Burke, advanced Harry swimming M. skills New Haven, Connecticut: 125 pp. New Haven Yale Basic Swim- methodPresentsthrough of quiet astaying detailed floating afloat exposition as for a meanslong of periodstheof lifesavingauthors of time. 82. room.Kephart,profusely Newell illustrated C. with underwater photographs. Columbus, Ohio.: The Slow Learner in the Class- Charles E. Merrill Books, 87. GivesNewLarcom, York:general G., andcoverage Ulen, ofH. basic strokes with The Macmillan Co., 1949. The Complete Swimmer. 224 pp. mentslowContainsInc. with 1960.learner. specialinformation emphasis on perceptual on the needs -motor of develop-the 292 pp. emphasis on how the individual learns. 293 88. ment.Latchaw, Marjorie, and Egstrom, Glen. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, Inc., Human Move- 93. Sports.Lipovetz, Ferd J. La Crosse, Wisconsin: Swimming, Diving, and Water Burgess Publishing Contributeslogicformation1969. development into thethe areaschild'sby presenting of understandinghuman scientificmovement of and conceptinforma- bio- 337 pp. waterbookGivesCo., safety.1951.on comprehensive the teaching coverageand coaching for teachers.of swimming and 169 pp. A hand- 89. ofparticipationtionLatchaw, Dance that Activities. mayMarjorie, Inbe movementacquired andEnglewood Pyatt, activities.by the Cliffs,Jean. child N.J.:through A Pocket Guide 94. 8Retarded.Loewendahl, pp. Evelyn. Pennsylvania: Exercises for the Mentally A.C. Croft, Inc., 1967. modernGivesPrentice-Hall,evaluative many dance, rhythmic check andInc., folk,list--behavioral experiences, 1958. etc. free terminology. rhythms, 234 pp. Good listings in mentallynerveContainslevels muscles retarded ofbasic motor for background child, growtheach growthshows and in development interpretingthelevel, skeletal and indescribes physicaland the 90. PlanningUnifiedLearning School. and to Services,Move-Moving District: Pub. to No.Learn. EC-260, Division of Instructional Los Angeles City /968. 95. Logan,variousthe exercise Geneobjectives. A., and and physical Wallis, activitiesEarl L. Exercise to attain for CZ104CA, approachDeals122 pp. with to the teaching movement motor explo,-ation and movement and skills.discovery OutlinesChilren,exercisesInc., 1966. aEnglewood functionalfor children. Cliffs, program N.J., of developmental 65 pp. Prentice-Hall, 91. mentalGivesIllinois:Leighton, anskills organizedHarry. of playing approach tennis. to teaching the funda- The Athletic Institute, 1958. Tennis. Instructor's Guide. Photographs and 62 pp. 96. PresentsBookLoken.1969. of NewtonGymnastics. comprehensive C. and Willoughby, coverage ofR.J. gymnastics at 212 pp. Michigan: Prentice-Hall, Inc., Complete 92. drawingsPublishingtechniques.L'Heureux, illustrate Co., Bill. 1962. teaching methods, drills and Hockey for Boys. Chicago: Follett 96 pp. beginning, intermediate and advanced levels. StarhockeyGives Sports comprehensivefor Books.pupil use. coverage on skills and rules of A part of the series: "All 294 97. Co.,EducationLawman, 1928. Charlesfor Groups. et al. 521 pp. NewCorrective York: Physical A. S. Barnes and 102. Miller,and Team Donna Sports M., forand Women.Ley, Katherine. New York: IndividualPrentice- withprogram.Includes suggestions the theory for theand implementationsr'aedules of exercises of the A theoretical and practical guide for Hall,experiencedIncludesteam Inc., sports comprehensive 1955. and for experienced women. coverage performer of individual and teacher. and 502 pp. A guide for both the in- 98. Mann,education.teachers Matt. and students in the area of physical Sports Illustrated Book of Swimming. 103. Ohio:Mosston, Musks. Charles E. Merrill Book, Inc., 1965. Developmental Movement. Columbus, 317 pp. Describes90Philadelphia,the pp. breast how stroke. Pennsylvania:to swim the front and back crawl and Lippincott. 1961. needs.arrangedPresentstotal physical invarious sequence development.movements necessary to achieve to aid in meeting individual The movements are $W99. Mann, M., and Fries, C., GivesNew York: a thorough and useful coverage of how to Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1940. Swimming Fundamentals. 120 pp. 104. NewbutGivesMurray, York: omits methodology, Ruth dance Lovell. descriptions. aids in teaching rhythm skills, Harper and Brothers, 1953. Dance in Elementary Education. Helps the elementary 342 pp. methodsteach swimmingfor teaching to individuals very young andchildren. groups. Includes 105. Mursell,classroom James teacher. L., et al. 100. SchoolMeetingandProgram: Services, District: Physical Pub. Fitness No. EC-67.Needs - A Games and Fitness Grades 3,4,5,6. Division of Instructional Planning Los Angeles City Unified 1963. 22 pp. DepartmentBook I. of Education, 1958. Sacramento, California: Music Through the Day. 15) pp. California State ties.Combines game unit activities, with fitness activi- 106. mentNagel,andContains Throughis Charles, part music Gamesof andtheand and Moore,Fredricka."Musicactivities Rhythmic for Living"forActivities. young series. children Skill Develop- Palo 101. GivesTeamMeyer,W. B. Sportscomprehensive MargaretSaunters for GirlsH.,Co. coverageand1951. and Schwarz, Women. on team Marguerite sports. M. 422 pp. Philadelphia: Covers withAlto,Includes related California: analysisgames and of activities. basic movement skills along The Natiwal Press, 1966. 310 pp. basketball,volleyball. hockey, soccer, softball, speedball, and Inc 107. Paterson, Ann (ed). New York: Ronald Press Co., 1958. Team Sports for Girls. 396 pp. 111. DivisionE.Physical of Education Instructional Teaching Services, Guide, PublicationGrades 3,4,5, Los Angeles City Unified School District: persons.juniorPresentslation and oftechniques seniorarticles high forwritten school teaching by girls. a teamvariety sports of to A compi- No.instructionContains 537, 1961. information in skills. to activities, help in the and planning games. of 373 pp. 108. Physical Education Framework Committee. Sacramento,KindergartenEducation Framework California. Through forGrade California Twelve. Public Schools. 1969. 70 pp. (Tentative). Physical 112. Handicapped.Indicates1964.Pomeroy, Janet. the need for recreation, the principles 382 pp. New York: Recreation for the Physically The Macmillan Co., menteducation,ContainstificationIncludes of a comprehensiveinformation sectionsthe of purposespupil on for needs,physicalthe and the foundations objectives, suggestionsplanning education andfor and for program. develop-physical iden-meeting nesspublicationsomethat of proceduresshould the needsis underlie the thatof result the haverecreational handicapped. of been an increasingeffective. programs, aware- and The 109. Physical Education-Rhythmic Activities-TeachingGuide,pupiltimal needs, Gradeslearning and3,4,5,6. inconditions physical needededucation. to attain op- Lcs Angeles City Unified 113. AmericanMulti-DisciplinarySymposium.P.roceedingsHealth, AssociationPhysical from the Education,Concern. forAmerican Health, andAssociation PhysicalRecreation of Perceptual-Motor Foundations: Washington, D. C.: A programDesignedServices,School District: and to?ublication howhelp it teachers can No. provide EC-198,understand developmental, 1958. the rhythms Division of Instructional 248 pp. growthContainsEducationtual motorand topics anddevelopment, learning Recreation. covering including early the wideeducation, the area influence of and percep- the of 1969. 174 pp. ideaspurposeful,learnings. on how and rhythms creative can experiences.be integrated with other Includes 114. activity.development7:iki, Bela. of Techniqueperceptual of mechanisms, Competitive and Swimming. motor 110. Physical Education Teaching Guide. K-1 2. No.DivisionLos X72,Angeles 1957.of CityInstructional Unified School Services, District: Publication 289 pp. ofGivesC.5.1:'apest, pp.simming detailed Hungary:and coveragecompetitive of stylesstrokes: and crawl,breast, techniques University Print House, 1956. Presents selections of physical education activities. photographs.butterfly, and back-stroke. Many sequences of 296 115. ProvidesEPerceptua:-Motor Roach,Merrill E,,grneinformation Books CInc.,Survey. , andwhich 1966. Kephart, can be Newell used toC. identify Cylumbus, Ohio: 82 pp. The PurdueCharles 119. Stanley,GivesBacon,Education a1962. condensedD. Activities V., and presentation Waglow, Handbook. I. F.of fundamentals of 270 pp. Florida: Physical. Allyn and 116. childrening. who sleet. help in perceptual-motor learn- 120. EnrichmentStein,wrestling Joe. forMaterials school Co.,use. 1967. Head Over Heels. Campbell, California:34 pp. MCMXLIX.Schneider,DealsBody Work'. with Herman. the boy and and Schneider, how it works. Nina. 160 pp. New York: William R. Scott, Inc., Includes How Your activitiesContains a arrangedprogression from in the stunts simple and to tumbling the complex. 117. NewSchurr,experiments York: Evelyn. for pupil use to reinforce the concepts. Appleton-Century Crofts, 1967. Movement Experiences for Children. 569 pp. 121. ContainsEducation,Swimming andsequences 1968. Water Safety.of content and suggested teaching 64 pp. New York Board of educationandtrends,Provides implementing references, program.a comprehensive of a anddevelopmental activities. guide to physicalthe planning Contains information on current 122. Taylor,methods.CenteredPublic Z.Schools. CoreAnn andCurriculum Sherrill, for Claudine. Educationally Handi- A curriculum bulletin for New York City A Health- 118. book.Seaton,1969. Don C., et al. 432Englewood pp. Cliffs, Physical Education Hand- Prentice-Hal;, Inc.. cappedContainsPublications, Children. activities 1970. to teach basic concepts and to Palo Alto, California. 130 pp. Peek anda fundamentals,Includesdescription care of a equipment,brief of strategy, the history nature basic safety of of rules,a the varietyhints, games, techniques, playingof selectionsports, and 123. SchoolTeacherdevelopInstructional District. Resourceperceptual-motor Bulletin. Material skills.for Folk Dance. Division of Instructional Plannitr Los Angeles City Unified An courtesies, and terminology. recreationalbasic.danceProvidesand Services. information stepsfolk dance.and aboutpatterns, methods and ofa sectionorganizing on Publication No. SC-651. 1968. 44 pp. 2c7 124. Torney,Hill Book John Co., A. 1950. Swimming. 315 pp. New York: McGraw- 128. Xanthos,for Teachers. Paul1963. J. Los Angeles, 120California: pp. Tennis. A Pictorial Guide beginning,andCoversfor teaching teachers. swimming advanced, of specialin aand comprehensive relatedskills included.skills. manner, includes AMethods book originalThisPresentssituation. volume ideasa plan is useful afor guide teaching to for the teaching teacher.tennis toin groups.a school There are many innovative and 125. CaliforniaVan1008in Hagen,the pp. Elementary StateWinifred, Department School. et al. of Education, 1951. Sacramento, California:Physical Education 129. YMCA.Council, 1964. YMCA Swimming Manual. Canada: 72 pp. YMCA Guidesablethein conducting planning, inelementary grades organization,physical1-8. school educationteachers and activities andprograms; supervisors suit-covers YMCA-Canada.forContains YMCA. a descriotion of the swimming program It is the basic swimming manual for C.D 126. Vannier,Individual Mary and Helen; Team Poindexter,Sports for GirlsHally-Beth. and Women. PICTURES:130. Motor Perceptual Learnings. Early Childhood play,ChapterExcellentPresents and 10. methods individualoverview for of andteaching swimming team sports,these and divingactivities. the rolein they childrenConsistsPublishingSeries Set inof A.Corp., actuallarge 1968. fullsituations; color photographs teaching sugges- of Glendale, Calif.: 8 pictures. Bawmar 127 AlamedsWorkshopCoversLearning. County aPlanning wideThrough Schoolrange Committee Movement. ofDistrict, activities for 1969.AAHPER including Conference. ideas Hayward, California: 53 pp. tions included. andgamesinstructionalthroughfor dances. squareprogression, rope dance, jumping,sequences, thechallenge stegel,motor and perceptualcourse sourcesphysical equipment, for fitnessactivities, materials. It has descriptive lesson plans, 298 131.PHONOGRAPH RECORDS: Activity Play Songs. Volume 5. Stepping Tones Records. 142. Circassian Circle. #753 Series 5. Windsor. 132. Activities.Advanced Modern Dynamic Physical LPFitness 16-A. Educational Activities, Inc. 144.143. DanceCotton-Eyed a Story Joe. Series - The Brave 1006.Hunter. Imperial. 134.133. AdventuresBasic Motor in andRhythms. Ball Skills. CC 623. Rhythms Productions. 145. Danish Schottische. M-102.#LE 105. World of Fun. R.C.A.Victor Records. CAD 135. aL-2-ImilmJ1E2ILE.Basic Rhythmic Activities B 2065. Bowmar Records, Inc. Rhythmic Program 146. PrimaryDeveloping Level the Children. Perceptual-MotorL.P. Abilities 605. of Educational Activities, Inc. 1 136. Basic Rhythmic Activities forE UpperVolume73-Volume71-Volume Grades. 5. 3.1; R.C.A. Victor Record. E R.C.A.Victor72-Volume 2; Record. 147. T172in Space.Development of Body AwarenessL.P. and 606-7. Position Educational Activities, Inc. 137. Bleking. 45-6169. R.C.A. Victor Record. 149.148. Dynamic Balancing Activities-BalanceActivities.Aft 657. Beam. Educational Activities, Inc. 139.138. Butterfly.Building A City. M #711.114. Young 'People'sWorld Record. of Fun. 150. Follow the Leader. #658.Bowmar Publishing Corp. Educational Activities, Inc. 140. Childhood Rhythms. Series 1-7. Ruth Evans Series. 152.151. Fun Withand FitnessMusic. for Primary Children.B-2057-LP. Bowmar Records. 141. Childrens' Creative Play Songs.VolumeRecords. 1 #1101; Volume 7 #1102. Stepping Tones 153. Garden Varieties. AEDBowmar 4. Records, Inc. Phoebe James. 154. Glow Worm. FD-9. #E-75. American Folk Dances. 166. ModernElementary Dynamic Grades. Physical Fitness#L.13. Activities 15A for Educational Activities, Inc. 156.155. HolidayGreens1ecves. Rhythms. Bowmar21619. Records. Inc. R.C.A.Victor. 167. ModernPrimary Dynamic Grades. Physical Fitness AlbumActivities #LP 14A. for Educational Activities, Inc. 157. Bora. A-106 LP. Rhythms Productions. 169.168. MusicModern for Rhythm Physical Band Fitness-I.Tunes. AR-523. Educational Activities, Inc. 159.158. IndianI Should Album. Like To Go To Shetland.#1190. Folkcraft Records. 170. My Playful Scarf. #1019.Bowmar Records, Inc. Children's Record Guild. co...160. Its Fun To Square Dance. E Capitol.89. R.C.A. Victor Record. 171. Oklahoma Mixer. 52006. Columbia. 161, Kalvelis. #1051 and #1418. Folkcraft Records. 173.172. O'Leary.Play Time. Childhood Rhythms. 163.162. '...earningLearning Basic Basic Skills Skills ThroughTo Music. Music.AR 514-1.521-1. Educational Activities, Inc. 174. Play Time. A-112vCC 618. Rhythms Rhythms Productions.Productions. 164. Learning Basic Skills To Music.version.This record is also available in a Spanish 176.175. Pre-TumblingPut Your Little Skills Foot. for Impulse#656. Control. Educational Activities, Inc. 165. Let Me See You Try. ARBowmar 522-1. F3blishing Corp. Educational Activities, Inc. 177. Relaxation Training. 0655.#1165. EducationalFolkcraft Activities. Records. 300 178. Rhythm is Fun. 191. Skip To My Lou. 179. Rhythm Instruments. A Bomar103-5. Records. Rhythms Productions. 192. Singing Games. #1,#1192. 2, 3. Folkcraft Records. Bowmar Records, Inc. 181.180. RhythmicRhythm Time. Activities. Bowmar Records, Inc. 193. Sousa Marches. Bowmar Records, Inc. 182. The Rhythms Hour. A-11.Volume 1. Rhythm Productions. Primary Grades. R. C. A. Victor. 194.195. SquareSpinning Dances. Waltz. Album1036. #4 and #7. Imperial. MacGregor. Co.D 183. RoundThe Rhythms and Round Hour. The Village. CC 615. Rhythms Productions. 196. The awing. #3002. Pioneer Record. t:184. 185. Rope Jumping and Ball Handling.No.B 2058.1512-B. Bowmar Records, Inc. Album I. Bowmar Records, Inc. 198.197. TenVictor Little Library Indians. for Elementary41197. Schools."Rhythmic Activities" Volume I for Folkcraft Records. 187.186. SelRound ancica. and Round The Village.#1191. Folkcraft Records. 199. Waltz of the Bells. M 113. Primary Grades. World of Fun. R. C. A. Victor Record. 188. Seven Jumps. 4-6172.1006. Folk Dancer. R. C. A. Victor. 200. Watch Me Outdoors_ Bowmar Publishing Co. 190.189. Shoemakers' Dance.Dance, #1187A. Folkcraft Records. 445-6171. R. C. A. Victor Records. 301 16mm FILMS: 202.201. BadmintonBalance Skills.Fundamentals. Coronet Instructional Films. 213. Fundamentals of Archery. Bailey Films. 203. Ball Skills. Film Fair Communications. 214.215. Fundamentals of Diving.Swimming. AmericanUnited WorldNational Films, Red Inc.Cross. 204.205. BeginningBasic Movement Swimming. Skills. Film Fair Communications. -216. Fundamentals of Volleyball.All American Productions. C4 206. Breakdowns into Pinning Combinations.ColburnCoronet Associates.Films. 217.218. HandballGrip and Fundamentals.Stance. BaileyUnited Films.World Films. 208.207. Distances.Building Your Golf Swing. National Golf Foundation. 219. Heads Up. American National Red Cross. 209. Dolphin Butterfly. UnitedIowa StateWorld University.Films. 221.220. Hurdles.High Jump. AssociationUnited World Films. Films. 211.210. FundamentalsEscapes and Reversals.for Soccer. Colburn Associates. 223.222. AnHula Instructor's Hoop Skills. Guide to TumblingG. N.and Productions. Floor 212. Fun With Parachutes. AllDocumentary American Productions.Films. 224. JustExercises. For The Fun Of It. Syracuse University. Orange County Dept. of Education. 302 225. Learning How To Swim. American National Red Cross. 237. Soccer for Girls. Coronet Films. 226. Movement Exploration.Exploration-What Am I?DocumentaryFilm Associates. Films. 238.239. SprintSoccer-Let's Crawl. Play. RyanS. L. Films. Productions. 228.227. PitchParallel and BarsRun. - Beginning Exercises.NationalAssociated Golf Film Foundation. Services. 241.240. StartingSprinting Position With Bud and Winter. Takedowns.Colburn Associates. PlayPitching Handball. and Sand Shot. GaborNotional Nagy Golf Productions. Foundation. 243.242. TrackTouch and Football. Field. S.Film L. Trends. Film Productions. 732.231. RopePutting.. Jumping. NationalFilm Associates. Golf Foundation. 245.244. Tumbling II.I. Martin Moyer Productions. 234.233. ShortRunning Game Broad in Jump.Golf. UnitedAssociation World Films.Films. 247.246. VolleyballTumbling -Drills The Basic & Techniques. Skills.AllFilm AmericanTrends. Productions. 236.235. SkilledSide Horse Swimming. - Beginning Exercise.Duet Films. 249.248. VolleyballVolleyball for Skills Women. & Practice.All American Productions. American National Red Cross. Film Associates. 1A/ 251.250. WorldWelcome of to Archery. Golf. National Golf Foundation. 262.261. Power Volleyball. The Athletic Institute. Aetna Affiliated Companies. 263. ThreePuttin&. Quarter Swing. Film Trends. SUPER252. 8mm LOOP FILMS: Breast Stroke. McGraw-Hill. 265.264. WrestlingWomen's Golf.Basic Skills. ColburnThe Athletic Associates. Institute. Co) 254.253. BuildingButterfly Your Stroke. Golf Swing. NationalMcGraw-Hill. Golf Foundation. 0 256.255. DolfinCrawl. Butterfly. McGraw-Hill.Iowa State University. 258.257. GripFull and Swing. Stance. Film Trends. 260.259. Men'sParallel Golf. Bars - Boys. The(7 Athleticcartridges). Institute. The Athletic Institute. V

321 ASSESSMENT The following pages contain an assessment device The assessment device can be very effective as a 1.to be used by the teacher to: Pre-Test.to determine the placement of the pupil within Assess the abilities of the pupil ment.motivationalestedinstruction, in and tool responsiblepost-test, for pupils hefor thentoward his becomesown self-improve- progress. more inter- If the pupil is involved in the pre-test, 2. Instruction.the instructional sequences. Teach the appropriate sequences. word,evaluationThe teachersuch as, of may "yes"the select pupil. or "no" and mayuse behis appropriate, own symbols for In some cases a simple 03 3. Thethe assessment sequences deviceto make it more usable forpupil.Post-Test. the Measure the improvement of the as been coordinated with needsusable.intheteacher others improvement pupil; spacea scalefor towithexample, rangingmake right, notes doesfrom not about well1 applicable,to withthe4 might performanceleft beetc. arm, more of The comment column is planned to give the performdetermineoftion,teacher. the pupilandthe the thennecessary inpupil's aryuses of theskills.needs the assessment fiveand howareas welldevice of heinstruc- tocan The teacher estimates the abilities He then adjusts andThisintendedteacher the device necessary inas is determininga intendedtest areas to measure ofasthe instruction.a pupil'smeans pupils to needs, aidagainst the abilities, each It is not themancedifficult izationtheinstruction teacherof the ofor instruction. pupil.easier into orderan dependingappropriate to plan uponfor level, individual-the perfor-more This serves as an aid to othertoized be or norm,used to evaluateshouldtherefore, be them individual the in markingrelation and and flexible.to reportinga standard- system 306 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS GOAL I. 1. DevelopsIdentifiesRelationships. Body body Awareness parts and1nd surfaces,Spatial on 2. himself,bottom,himselfIndicates up,other directionsdown, people, sidewards, -and left, objects. etc. right, - on top, other cole and ob ects. GOAL II. 1. UsespartsBends Fundamental inand various stretches Movements. ways. his body and body 3.2. Liftssafely.Pushes and and lovers pulls heavy objects. and light objects. 4. positionFellseasilyRises from fromandin a a rapidly.a standing relaxedlying to manner.position a standing to aposition lying 6.5. TurnsSwings and and twists sways inhis various body and directions. its parts. 307 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS 7. movements.Creeps and crawls with cross-patterned COMMENTS 9.8. WalksRuns within various cross-patterned directions. movements. 11.10. hisJumpsGallops arms forwards towith help. leftand backwardsfoot leading; and usesthen 13.12. Y19Llii242tItta4---flopsSlides on in either various foot. directions. - 14.15. LeapsSkips wit'evenly various and swings speeds. his arms freely. 17.16. bodyStartsPivots in balance.and stopsdodges moving in various easily directions. and with 308 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OP MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS DATES COMMENTS GOAL :ill. 1. TossesUses Small and catchesObjects aAnd beanbag. Equipment. 3.2. ThrowsRolls anda ball catches and retrievesa ball. it. 4.5. BouncesRuns while a ball. bouncing a ball. t\:C.s., 6. Kicks a ball. _ C...n 8.7. JumpshitsStrikes anda target. aturns ball awith long his jump hand rope. and 10. 9. JumpsRolls and the turns hoop aand short runs jump along rope. 11. Jumpsbeside onit. the top of jumpboard ---, 12. Walkswhile bouncingforward ona ball.a 2" balance beam. i 1(19 SECTION ONE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOTOR AND MOVEMENT SKILLS COMMENTS______14.13. BalancesRunssquare through balanceand turns tires board. around placed on flat a on i. 15. Usesthe amiddleground parse% ofby eachputting one. a foot in .hers. 17.16. ClimbsoverHolds it, aup wand anda single stepsin both hangingback. hands, rope. steps - 19.18. DoesdoubleHangs a infronthanging an inverteddrop ropes. on aposition trampoline. on SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OP PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS GOAL- I. 1. TakesExhibits turns.: Acceptable Social Behavior. 1 COMMENTS 3.2. ExhibitsCooperates the with ability others. to be a leader. irD 5.4. Exhibits goodthe abilitygrooming. to be a follower. GOAL II. 6. OfPracticesExhibits Activities. good Movement health Skills habits. In A Variety I. Movesother on children wheel toys or objects.without bumping . . 3.Z. usesstall-bars,ClimbsBuilds toys. onwith objects boxes,sand in (climbingtables), a sand boxandstructures andclimbs 4. Playsoff. simple games. t 311 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES COMMENTS 6.S. bothPerforms direction.. the BearLog-Ro17 Wa7k. on mat in r 7.8. Heels.PerformsPerforms the the stunt. Crab Walk.Jump and Slap 10. 9. horizontalHangswith hands. byon handsbar bar. or and horizontal knees on ladderlow /I 11. Travels across the horizontal ladder. 13.12. overhandPassesCatches a apass. basketballbasketball. using a one hand I.14. jpass.DribblesPasses a abasketball basketball. using a bounce 312 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PIATCROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS 16. Shoots a basketball through the goal. 1 COMMENTS 16.17. Dribblesstops.shoots pivuts. aa laybasketball up.and passes. while running, basketball, stops, and 20.19. KicksThrows and catches a football. football. 21.22. CenterspassThrows to athea footballmoving football. target. with overhand spiral 23.24. Catch*sitCatches scurel a apassed football football. and runs carrying in either arm. 26.25. "arts ofKicksandDribbles the the afoot. soccerright foot.ball with various soccer ball with the left sEcTIoY TWO - 711E wetormENT OF PLAYGROUND ANV RECREATION SKILLS 77. Tracts a soccer ball. COMMENTS 29.28. Drop-kicksPunts a soccer a soccer ball. hall. 31.30. BatsRuns frombases a onbatting the diamond. tee. 32.33. YieldsCatches aa groundflyball. ball. (softball). (softhal2). 4 35.34. ThrowsPitches a softballa softball. with accuracy. 37.36. PerformsfullRats(npeedba/I). aswl pitched aand kick-up follow softball to throeself. using a 39.38. Servesplayer.Performs a volleyball a lift up overto another the net. (speedball . 314 SECTION TWO - TttE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES

I COMMEN/S 40. Passes (strikes) a volleyball to F I ; 41. Volleysanother a plater.volleyball over the net. 1 42._ Performs the "b.722". (volleyball). } - I .. 1 43. Serves the volleyball with accurecm:. -.. 1 . r 1 44.___.----- Performs a net recoTerx. ,.3.1 / i- -4' ,I 1 rI i 1 i,.,Ncz 45. Performs a pass, set and spike with , I 1 46. Shootsteammates_ an arrow using proper form. ______! 47. Wits a shuttlecock with a badminton i racket in an underhand strnke. 1 1 )t i 1 I 48. Hitsstroke. a shuttlecock with an overhead I I !: i 4 t 44.50. ServesRita a anet shuttlecock shot. into the (badminton). i t ------Vrropriste51. court area. Executes the one-step delivery in 1 SECTION TWO - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS COMMENTS 53.52. Swingsbowling,.Executes the the golf four-step club using delivery proper in 54. Chipsfore. a golf ball. -.. 56.55. Servesball.Uses a awood handball club andin varioushits a golfways. 58.57. PerformsstrokesReceives it. a forwardhandball roll. and successfully 60.59. Performs a headstand.frogstand. 6.1.62. aPerforms high balance a cartwheel.mount, beam, a simpleand a dismount.routine on 316 SECTION TWO - TEE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS 63. utilizingPerforms standing szoeessents, floor free exercise routine . . COMMENTS 64. movements,unemsarallelPerformturns, and a balances, mount,tumbling bar, a leapsmovementandeaves. a anddismount. onjumps, the czC..: 66. 65. horse.PerformsPerform aa frontrear vaultvault onon a aside aide horse. 67.68. thePerformsaPivots tennis parallel from aball mount, abar, withready anda asimple position racketa dismount. routine using and hits on _ forehand stroke. , . 69. Runsquickly, to the and left strokes or right, a tossed stops ball 70. withPerforms a tennis a backhand racket. stroke in tennis. , 71. Servesstance a intotennis the ball appropriate with a correct court area. _ 31.7 SECTION TWO - TRE DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYCRODXD AND RECREATION SKILLS 4 i ' COMMENTS 73.72. inReceivesSprints. a relay. and passes baton to teammste 76.75.74. !browsPerforms a softball aa Berndt.:running for 1..,..long_inmp. distance. - -. 78.77. wrestling.Performsstandimg_Rosition. a breakdownwrestling maneuvertakedown infrom a 79. bold.Performs an escape from a wrestling I 318 SECTION NO - THE DEVELOPKENT OF PLAYGROUND AND RECREATION SKILLS DATES GOAL III. Gains Proficiency In Gases, And Sports I1 l I W al, *ad .1: 1. SkillsPassespation That Ina written RecreationalWill Lead test To on Activities.His tennis Partici- which 2. players]Passesincludes asad terminology,written test rules,on track scoring, and 3. rules,Passesfield scoring,awhich written includes and test leagues. onterminology, basketball . Cn 4. whichPassesscoring includes a players,written terminology, testand leagues.on rules,ice hockey 5. which?assesscoring, includes a players,written terminology, testand leagues.on golfrules, which 6. Passesplayers,includes a andwritten terminology, leagues. test on rules, soccer scoring, which 7. players,includes and terminology, leagues. rules, scoring, players,Passesincludes a andwritten terminology, leagues. test on rules, bowling scoring, which _ _ SECTION TEEM - TEE remormen or ENTIENIC SKILLS COAL I. Naves Effectively And Creatively, 1 I I COMMENTS 1. accented,AndrhythmsClaps Develops or - uneven-unaccented, beats(even-unaccented, A Sense time Ofto Rhythm.various evenun- - 2. even-accented).temposClaps or- Sfast,beats slow)...time to various 4.3. DifferentiatesdynamicsClaps or -beats (loud, betweentime soft) to .highdiffering and 5. phrasesChangeslow yi change.tchhis movements as musical . . . . 6. movesKeeps intime various to even ways. rhythm and 7. owesKeeps in timevarious to unevenways. rhythm and _ . 320 SECTION is= - THE DEVELOFMEW OF SIC SKILLS 8. Keeps time in place and moves A -A1- A COMMENTS 9. time.Combinesarms,locomotor legs, moving andmovements body.in piece and withkeeps ,.. C.:.Cti 10. ofImitates things orand pantomimes a variety puts it to music. - - , SECTION THREE - THE DEVELOPMENT OP RHYTHMIC SKILLS GOAL II. Performs Basic Steps And Dances. r 1 1 1 ...... , 2.I. Performs stepstep-swing -licp to to music. music. 3. Performs two-step to music. A.- (..,D 5.4. Performs polkaschottische to music. to music. cc 7.6. Performs mazurkawaltz to to music. music. - 8. Performs a simple folk dance. . GOAL III. 1. HandlesusingPerforms balls,Objects a rhythmic hoops, In A Rhythmicandroutine ropes. toPattern. music 322 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS DATES GOAL I. COMMITS 1. WalksAdjustsTo The while PhysicallyWater. in the water.And Mentally J 2.3. BobsBlows inbubbles. the water. - 4.5. Performs the turtlejellyfish float. float. 1 ilitCCCoD 7.6. PerformsPerforms the the gone prone float float front. back. 9.8. TurnsStands front from to a backfloat. while floating. 10. Turns back to front while floatinj. 1 1 323 SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS TES COAL II. Propels Body Through The Wazer. COMMENTS I. Performs the prone Slide. _. / 2. Performs the back glide. M411cz 4.3. GlidesKicks andand kicks.uses the arm stroke. COAL III. I. PerformsPerforms Basic the frontStrokes. crawl. . 2.3. PerformsCoordinates the breathin:back-crawl. kick and arms. 4.5. PerformsPerforms the the breast-stroke. elementary back-stroke. ... .- . . 7.6. Performs the butterfly-stroke.side-stroke. _ 324 " I I I I MN I IMM sip SECTION FOUR - THE DEVELOPMENT OF SWIMMING SKILLS GOAL IV. Uses Deep Water Skills. r r COMMENTS 2.1. JumpsTreads fromwater. side of pool into the water. I C,...,4-.:IN 3. Divesthe water.from side or from board into ....) 5.4. SwimsPerforms underwater. a surface-dive. GOAL V.1. PlaysEvents.Participates simple waterIn Games games. And Special 3.2. TakesPlays part complex in water water races games. and relays. 1 . 5.4. orCompetesPerforms :awes. Inwith a waterothers show. in water races 325 SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS OBJECTIVE I. Demonstrates Endurance. Performsseconds).(Record the the 300 time yard, in run-walk.minutes, OBJECTIVELegs. II. Performs a standing long jump. Demonstrates Strength And Power. Back. Liesininterlaced feet(Record face and down theinchesbehind onbest mat tohis of thewith neck;the nearest fingers three inch).trils Raises andhead,thestraight.from to floor chestthehold floor fortheand 10 specificlegswhile seconds). as keeping farbody as parts legspossible off (Measure the ability to lift Arms and Shoulders--Boys. Performstheas manynumber). pull-upstimes as withpossible. overhand grip, (Record .-- 326 SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS Arms and Shoulders--Girls. Performs the flexed-arm hang as long commas Arum and Shoulders--Boys. seconds).as possible. (Record the time in Arms and Shoulders Girls. numberPerformsPerforms is the30. the push-up. push-up from a bent knee Record the number Maximum Abdomen. theposition number). (maximum number is 30. Record handsnumberPerformsseconds). behind of the sit-ups neck. bent kneeperformed sit -up in with 30 (Record the - 327 SECTION FIVE - THE DEVELOPMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS DATES ___--OBJECTIVE III. Demonstrates Flexibility. 4 COMMENTS asStudentplacingPerforms far as bendstoes possibletoe even overtouch. withwithand reachesfronthis hands edge. down while Stand on a bench keepingistopinchesruler the of ishisdistancetheabove placed kneesbench. and on solocked ten (Thescalethat inches student's straight. ithe extendscouldbelow scoretouchthe ten A OBJECTIVE IV. isand allowed). hold for two seconds. Demonstrates Speed, Agility No bobbing thePerforms time theof theShuttle better Run. of two trials and Coordination. (Record . to the nearest tenth of a second). bestaThrows distance of threea softball as trials possible. overhand to the nearestas great (Record the . OBJECTIVE V. Standsfoot . on one foot holding other foot in Demonstrates Balance. the air. (Record the time). 328 arms uses him. and and help to forwardbackward Jumps

variousdirections. in Runs cross-pattern withmovements. movements. in Walks crawls cross-patternand Creeps directions.in twists andvarious parts. Turns his its sways and . and body to Swings position,lying a reverse. fromstanding heavyobjects. Rises lowers light and and objects. Lifts pulls and ways. his Pushes various stretches Li am! body Movements. Bends - FundamentalII people, GOAL otherobjects. rect and Getters. sur- himself, andhimself, on parts faces Relationships.Identifies Spatial Awareness- I Body GOAL III. foot. GOAL either on Hops various directions.in leading. foot) foot Slides left right with then Gallops**I * YA

a on bouncetrampoline. a ropes. Does double on inverted an hanging positionin rope. Hangs single a WO uphanging PS it, overback. Climbs both steps steps and 0 hands, ft * with Holdsawandin 0 one.parachute others. a Uses the each by in of 1*% foot a placedground middle the 10 tires on p flat board. through Runs aroundbalance turns square and a on 2" a on Balances beam. a forwardbalance Walks jump-bouncing a of while ball. top on runs it. board Jumps and beside hoop a along short a Rolls turns *0 and tope. Jumps 0**** te*4* est ert SPECIAL EDUCATION BRANCH PHYSICAL EDUCATION PROJECT LOS ANGELES CITY SCHOOLS

SUGGESTIONS FOR USE OF SUPER 8mm LOOP FILMS:

The S 8mm loop films were designed to be used alone or with the tape cassette recording with the same title.

If the film is used with the tape cassette, the film should be inserted in the viewer and run, and stopped at the logo, the silhouette of the three children. The tape cassette may then be started. The tape cassette will give full instructions for starting the viewer at the correct moment.

These materials have been designed to be used by children 1, individualized instruction, after receiving instruction in the U: of the viewer and player.

1. Open front access door from the top edge and insert film cartridge.

2. Turn the large control knob from OFF to MOVIE positio The movie is on instantly.

3. locus the picture, by rotating focus control knob to right or left.

4. Use the frame adjustment knob until film is centered vertically on the screen.

5. Stop the motion by turning the right hand knob frow t to STILL. This stops the action for prolonged view! By returning the knob to MOVIE the film will resume m(

6. Turn the knob to OFF at end of your viewing. Viewer should always be turned off before removing cartridge.

NOTE: For longer film life do not run any individual cartridge continuously for more than four (4) showings.

34 SPECIAL EDUCATION PHYSICAL EDUCATION PROJECT LOS ANGELES CITY SCHOOL

SUGGESTIONS FOR USE OF TAPE CASSETTES:

These tape cassettes were made to be used alone or with the Super Emm loop films of the same title. It is suggested that the film at first be used alone by the student.Then the tape cassettes may be used alone and then the two can be used together for a combined audio-visual experience.

INSERT CASSETTE: Insert tape cassette in such a way that the side of exposed tape faces the front and the name of the desired recording is up. Rewind tape so the full hub of tape is on the left, as the tape advance is from left to right.

PLAYt Push selector lever to PLAY position.

VOLUME: Roll volume control knob to adjust playback volume to your preferred listening level.

STOP: Pull the selector lever to STOP position when playback operation is through.

NOTE: TO INSTALL BATTERIES:

First press knob of battery room lid downward with your thumb and then slide it toward yourself. Now, the battery room lid can be easily removed.

Insert batteries correctly as indicated in the battery room, avoiding possible confusion of positive (+) side of battery with the negative (-) side.

TO OPERATE WITH AC CURRENT:

To operate with household current (AC), connect AC adaptor, AIWA AC-607 to AC adaptor jack of this set.

CAUTION: The recording is made on the exposed side of the tape. Handle tape with special care to avoid damage to that surface.

Do Not Touch Tape With Fingers.

349 SPECIAL EDUCATION BRANCH PHYSICAL EDUCATION PROJECT LOS ANGELES CITY SCHOOLS

SUPER 8mm LOOP EVALUATION FORM:

FILM LOOP TITLE YES NO COMMENTS

EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION CONTENT and PRESENTATION of the LOOPS:

support the sequences

are current

are accurate

are of interest to the pupil

resent a challen e to the

CONCEPTS in the LOOPS:

are appropriate to grade level

are obscure

are appropriate in number

are too many in number

are too few in number

are too difficult

are too easy

Oko TECHNICAL EVALUATION COMENTS

IMAGE: ON THE SCREEN:

shows adequate site of projected image.

contains adequate brightness of projected image

evidences sharpness and focus

is appropriate in a single frame mechanism.

focuses on the needed arts 350 -2-

0 0 0 VISUAL QUALITY 0 showing slow motion COMMENTS

Showing regular speed

showing titles of the hoto ra h

EQUIPMENT

evidences acceptable projector noise level

demonstrates durability of cartridge

demonstrates durability of film

evidences dust free cartrid

enables picture to remain in focus

Describe briefly the general pupil reaction to the S 8mm loop films:

Describe any inadequacy of the S 8mm films and projectors:

Describe say special uses you made of the S 8mm materials:

In what ways, if any, did the use of the S 8mm film contribute significantly to learning?

351 SPECIAL EDUCATION BRANCH PHYSICAL EDUCATION PROJECT LOS ANGELES CITY SCHOOLS

TAPE CASSETTE EVALUATION FORM:

TAPE CASSETTE TITLE

EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION YES NO commrstirs

Content and Presentation of the Tape Cassette:

are relevant to curriculum

are coordinated with loop film

are meaningful alone without the loop film

have text that is too difficult to understand

have text that is too elementar

have directions that are meaningfu to children

have too many directions

have too few directions

have directions that are too specific

have directions that are too general

appear to have enhanced the learning process

used tape alone without loop

used tape with loop

used film alone without tape

pupils used equipment alone

C52 NARRATION YES NO COMMENTS

was well adapt:A to grade level

was vocabulary appropriate to grade level

was vocabularytoo simple

was vocabular too difficult

was voice easy to listen to

was voice distracting

was the narration too fast

was the narration too stow

were the number of repetitions on tape sati story

would you prefer more taped repetitions

would you prefer one recorded sequence

Satisfactory Unsatisfactory I TECHNICAL EVALUATION

Equipment (AIWA Playback Unit) by pupil with a minimum amount of instruction

operated with battery use 1. operated with AC adaptor

ran satisfactorily

MECHANICS OF OPERATION

tone level clarity of tape - range of volume 1 I .

durability of the _tape

mechanical difficulty with tape

could pupils work tape and film in a nchronizAtion

length of the tape on cassette

rewinding of tapes th